WO2025160766A1 - 美容仪 - Google Patents
美容仪Info
- Publication number
- WO2025160766A1 WO2025160766A1 PCT/CN2024/074778 CN2024074778W WO2025160766A1 WO 2025160766 A1 WO2025160766 A1 WO 2025160766A1 CN 2024074778 W CN2024074778 W CN 2024074778W WO 2025160766 A1 WO2025160766 A1 WO 2025160766A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- shell
- head
- assembly
- beauty
- airflow
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61N—ELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
- A61N1/00—Electrotherapy; Circuits therefor
- A61N1/40—Applying electric fields by inductive or capacitive coupling ; Applying radio-frequency signals
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of beauty instruments, and in particular to a beauty instrument.
- Radiofrequency beauty devices primarily stimulate collagen production in the dermis through radiofrequency heating, thereby tightening the skin and reducing wrinkles.
- Traditional radiofrequency beauty devices are large medical devices primarily used in hospitals and beauty salons, and are no longer able to meet the needs of most people.
- radio frequency beauty devices To improve user convenience and reduce costs, related technologies have miniaturized and made radio frequency beauty devices portable, allowing them to be used at home. These devices incorporate radio frequency electrodes directly on the skin-facing surface of the device. During use, the skin-facing surface faces or even contacts the facial skin, where the electrodes transmit radio frequency energy to stimulate the skin and achieve cosmetic results. However, the radio frequency current emitted by these electrodes is limited in its ability to penetrate subcutaneously, resulting in poor cosmetic results.
- negative pressure adsorption technology can improve the effectiveness of beauty devices.
- One design incorporates a negative pressure tank and radio frequency electrodes within the beauty device's main body, while an air pump is housed within the device's main body.
- the pump and negative pressure tank are connected via an air hose.
- one end of the hose is first connected to the pump within the main body, and the other end is then connected to the beauty device. Finally, the device is mounted on the main body.
- this process requires extreme caution to prevent the hose from separating from the pump or head, leading to low assembly efficiency.
- the present application provides a beauty instrument, which is convenient for improving the assembly efficiency of the beauty instrument.
- An embodiment of the present application provides a beauty device.
- This beauty device includes a main body and a beauty head.
- the beauty head includes a negative pressure tank and a radio frequency electrode.
- the negative pressure tank is used to negatively absorb the user's skin to attract the skin into the negative pressure tank; the radio frequency electrode is used to release radio frequency current to the user's skin.
- the beauty head is detachably connected to the main body. When the beauty head is connected to the main body, the negative pressure tank communicates with the main body, allowing the main body to negatively absorb the user's skin through the negative pressure tank.
- the radio frequency electrode is electrically connected to the main body, allowing the main body to provide electrical energy to the radio frequency electrode.
- the beauty head is detachably connected to the main body to achieve electrical connection between the radio frequency electrode and the main body and communication between the negative pressure tank and the main body, so that the main body can suck the skin into the negative pressure tank through the negative pressure tank, and then emit radio frequency current to the skin after suction through the radio frequency electrode, so that the radio frequency current can penetrate the skin sucked into the negative pressure tank, thereby increasing the penetration depth of the radio frequency energy and improving the beauty effect.
- the present application separates the beauty head from the main body and provides the negative pressure tank on the beauty head.
- the beauty head When the beauty head is installed on the main body, the negative pressure tank and the main body can be connected, so there is no need to consider whether the airway hose is separated from the beauty head or the air pump, thereby improving assembly efficiency.
- the inside of the negative pressure tank and the radio frequency electrode will usually be stained with sweat, gel and other stains.
- the present application makes the main body and the beauty head detachable, so that the beauty head can be removed for cleaning when needed, thereby facilitating the cleaning of the inside of the negative pressure tank and the radio frequency electrode, and preventing cleaning water from entering the main body module to avoid damage to the beauty instrument.
- the negative pressure adsorption system is relatively complex, and the non-detachable setting makes repair and installation difficult.
- the detachable negative pressure radio frequency beauty instrument makes assembly easy, and the functional design of the negative pressure adsorption system is also diverse, such as more convenient negative pressure connection, negative pressure relief, etc.
- the main body includes a first electrical connector
- the beauty head includes a second electrical connector
- the second electrical connector is electrically connected to the RF electrode, and when the beauty head is connected to the main body, the first electrical connector and the second electrical connector are electrically connected, so that the main body provides electrical energy to the RF electrode
- the main body includes a first airflow connection portion
- the beauty head includes a second airflow connection portion that is connected to the negative pressure tank, and when the beauty head is connected to the main body, the first airflow connection portion and the second airflow connection portion are connected, so that the negative pressure tank is connected to the main body.
- the main body has a first assembly surface
- the beauty head has a second assembly surface.
- the first assembly surface and the second assembly surface are arranged correspondingly; the first electrical connector is exposed to the main body from the first assembly surface, and the second electrical connector is exposed to the beauty head from the second assembly surface, so that when the beauty head is connected to the main body, the first electrical connector and the second electrical connector are electrically connected; and/or, the first airflow connection part is exposed to the main body from the first assembly surface, and the second airflow connection part is exposed to the beauty head from the second assembly surface, so that when the beauty head is connected to the main body, the first airflow connection part and the second airflow connection part are connected.
- the main body further includes a main control board electrically connected to the first electrical connector to control the release of radio frequency current by the radio frequency electrode via the first and second electrical connectors. Furthermore, when the beauty head is connected to the main body, the first assembly surface and the second assembly surface are arranged in a corresponding direction in the direction of disassembly. Furthermore, when the beauty head is connected to the main body, the first assembly surface and the second assembly surface contact or abut against each other.
- the RF electrode is arranged close to the negative pressure tank, or the RF electrode at least partially extends to the inner wall of the negative pressure tank, so that the RF electrode releases RF current to the skin adsorbed by the negative pressure of the negative pressure tank.
- the main body includes a connection module
- the connection module includes the first electrical connector and the first airflow connection part
- the first assembly surface is provided on the connection module
- the beauty head is detachably connected to the connection module so that the beauty head is detachably connected to the main body.
- the connecting module or the beauty head is provided with an assembly groove, and the bottom of the assembly groove forms the first assembly surface or the second assembly surface, so that the beauty head can be installed into the assembly groove of the connecting module or the connecting module can be installed into the assembly groove of the beauty head, and the relative position of the connecting module and the beauty head can be limited.
- connection module further includes a locking component, which is used to connect the beauty head when the first assembly surface contacts or abuts the second assembly surface to limit the beauty head from moving away from the connection module.
- the locking assembly is used to lock the first assembly surface and the second assembly surface.
- the locking assembly engages with the beauty head to limit the beauty head from being away from the connection module; or, the locking assembly is used to magnetically adsorb the beauty head when the first assembly surface contacts or abuts the second assembly surface to limit the beauty head from being away from the connection module.
- the locking assembly includes a snap-fitting portion, and the beauty head is provided with a snap-fitting portion; the snap-fitting portion is provided on the first assembly surface, and the snap-fitting portion is provided on the second assembly surface; when the first assembly surface contacts or abuts the second assembly surface, the snap-fitting portion cooperates with the snap-fitting portion and limits the relative position of the beauty head and the main body.
- connection module further includes an unlocking component; the unlocking component is used to release the engagement between the locking component and the beauty head.
- connection module further includes an unlocking component, which acts on the locking component; the unlocking component is configured such that when the unlocking component is pressed, the unlocking component drives the engaging portion and/or the engaging portion to slide to release the engagement between the locking component and the engaging portion.
- connection module is provided with an assembly slot
- the first airflow connection part is provided at the bottom of the assembly slot
- the bottom of the assembly slot forms the first assembly surface
- the beauty head is installed in the assembly slot
- the first assembly surface contacts or abuts the second assembly surface
- the connection module also includes a movable limiting member, the movable limiting member is slidably provided on the inner side of the bottom of the assembly slot, the bottom of the assembly slot is provided with a buckling movable hole, the movable limiting member has a clamping part provided at the buckling movable hole, and a clamping part is provided on the second assembly surface, the movable limiting member has a locking position that allows the clamping part and the clamping part to be clamped together through the buckling movable hole, and an unlocking position that allows the clamping part and the clamping part to be separated.
- the locking portion is protruded from the surface of the movable limiting member, and the locking portion is movably arranged in the buckling movable hole in the sliding direction for cooperating with the locking portion; and/or, a guide member is protruded from the inner side surface of the bottom of the assembly groove, and the guide member defines a slide groove structure, and the movable limiting member can be slidably arranged in the slide groove structure; and/or, the main body also includes an outer shell with an opening, and the outer shell is provided with an inward inner flange at the opening, and the connecting module also includes a connecting inner shell, and the connecting inner shell defines the assembly groove, and the connecting inner shell is installed in the outer shell and is provided at the opening of the outer shell so that the assembly groove is exposed from the opening of the outer shell; the connecting inner shell includes an inner base plate and an inner surrounding plate, and the inner surrounding plate and the inner base plate are combined to form the assembly groove, and the inner base plate forms the bottom of the assembly
- the first electrical connection member is a PIN needle; and/or the second electrical connection member is a PIN needle.
- the beauty head also includes a mounting shell and a head circuit board arranged in the mounting shell, the negative pressure groove and the second assembly surface are both arranged in the mounting shell and located on opposite sides of the mounting shell, the radio frequency electrode is installed in the mounting shell, and the head circuit board is electrically connected to the radio frequency electrode; one end of the second electrical connector is installed in the mounting shell, and is exposed from the mounting shell to form a pin point to be electrically connected to the first electrical connector; the other end of the second electrical connector elastically contacts or abuts the head circuit board to be electrically connected to the head circuit board; and/or, the main body also includes a main circuit board arranged in the main body, one end of the first electrical connector is installed on the main circuit board, and the other end passes through the first assembly surface to elastically contact or abut the second electrical connector; and/or, there are multiple first electrical connectors.
- the first airflow connection part when the beauty head is connected to the main body, the first airflow connection part is inserted into the second airflow connection part, or the second airflow connection part is inserted into the second airflow connection part, so that the first airflow connection part is connected to the second airflow connection part.
- the main body includes a connection module: the connection module is provided with an assembly groove, the bottom wall of the assembly groove forms the first assembly surface, the first airflow connection part protrudes from the first assembly surface to be inserted into the second airflow connection part, so that the first airflow connection part is connected to the second airflow connection part; or, the beauty head is provided with an assembly groove, the bottom wall of the assembly groove forms the second assembly surface, the second airflow connection part protrudes from the second assembly surface to be inserted into the first airflow connection part, so that the first airflow connection part is connected to the second airflow connection part.
- the beauty head also includes a mounting shell, the mounting shell includes a shell and a cover body, the shell includes a negative pressure substrate, a negative pressure enclosure connected to the negative pressure substrate and protruding toward one side, and a accommodating enclosure connected to the negative pressure enclosure and protruding toward the other side, the negative pressure enclosure and the negative pressure substrate form the negative pressure groove, the radio frequency electrode is arranged on the negative pressure enclosure and/or the negative pressure substrate; the negative pressure enclosure and the accommodating enclosure form a accommodating cavity with an opening, the cover body is installed at the opening of the accommodating cavity, the second assembly surface is arranged on the outer side surface of the cover body, the second electrical connector is installed on the cover body and exposed from the cover body; the second airflow connection part extends from the bottom of the negative pressure groove toward the cover body, and is exposed from the cover body to communicate with the first airflow part.
- the second airflow connection part is a negative pressure pipe, a negative pressure hole is provided on the cover body, and the second airflow connection part is connected to the negative pressure hole so as to be exposed from the cover body; and/or, a breathable part is provided in the second airflow connection part; and/or, the second electrical connection part is a PIN needle, and the beauty head further includes a head circuit board provided in the mounting shell, and the head circuit board is electrically connected to the radio frequency electrode; one end of the second electrical connection part is installed on the cover body and exposed from the cover body to form a pin point to be electrically connected to the first electrical connection part; the other end of the second electrical connection part elastically contacts or abuts against the head circuit board to be electrically connected to the head circuit board; and/or,
- the main body also includes a shell with an opening and a connecting module, the shell is provided with an inward inner flange at the opening, the connecting module includes the first electrical connector, a first airflow connecting part and a connecting inner shell
- the outer shell includes a first half shell, a second half shell and a head shell having an opening and an inner flange, the first half shell is connected to one side of the second half shell to form a holding portion, one end of the first half shell has a bending portion that is bent and inclined toward a side close to the second half shell and is arranged in a first inclined direction, the bending portion protrudes from the second half shell, the head shell is connected to the bending portion and the second half shell, the head shell has an assembly recess that cooperates with the bending portion, and the opening is used to be set toward the user's face; the connecting inner shell is arranged in the head shell.
- the first airflow connection part is an airflow connection tube, which protrudes from the first assembly surface to be inserted into the second airflow connection part to communicate with the second airflow connection part.
- the main body further includes a sealing ring, which is sleeved on the outer circumference of the airflow connecting tube to seal the airflow connecting tube and the second airflow connecting portion.
- the main body further comprises a shell having an opening, a connection module and a main circuit board arranged in the shell, the shell is provided with an inwardly turned edge at the opening, the connection module comprises the first electrical connector, the first airflow connection portion and a connection inner shell, the connection inner shell defines an assembly groove, the connection inner shell The first assembly surface is formed by the bottom of the assembly groove, and the bottom of the assembly groove forms the first assembly surface.
- the beauty head is installed in the assembly groove, and the first assembly surface contacts or abuts against the second assembly surface.
- the main circuit board is provided on the inner side of the bottom of the assembly groove.
- the first electrical connector is a PIN pin.
- the connection module also includes a movable limiting member, which can be slidably arranged on the inner side of the bottom of the assembly groove, and the bottom of the assembly groove is provided with a buckling movable hole.
- the movable limiting member has a clamping portion provided at the buckling movable hole, and a clamping portion is provided on the second assembly surface.
- the movable limiting member has a locking position in which the clamping portion and the clamping portion are clamped together through the buckling movable hole, and an unlocking position in which the clamping portion and the clamping portion are separable;
- the movable limiting member is an annular structure, the first electrical connector is provided on the outside of the annular structure, and the first airflow connection portion is provided on the inside of the annular structure.
- the main body further includes an airflow driving member: the airflow driving member is connected to the first airflow connection portion and is used to drive the airflow to flow in the first airflow connection portion.
- an exhaust channel is formed between the second assembly surface of the beauty head and the first assembly surface of the main body, and the exhaust channel is connected to the airflow driving member to exhaust the gas driven by the airflow driving member.
- the second assembly surface is provided with an exhaust groove, and the exhaust groove and the first assembly surface form the exhaust channel.
- the main body also includes an airflow driving component: the airflow driving component is connected to the first airflow connection part, and is used to drive the airflow to flow in the first airflow connection part; the airflow driving component includes an air pump, and the main control board is electrically connected to the air pump to control the air pump.
- the first airflow connection part and the second airflow connection part are detachably connected so that the first airflow connection part and the second airflow connection part are in communication; and/or the ventilation area of the connection channel of the second airflow connection part is smaller than the slot area of the negative pressure groove.
- the first electrical connector contacts or abuts the second electrical connector in the disassembly direction, so that when the beauty head is connected to the main body, the first electrical connector is electrically connected to the second electrical connector; and/or the first airflow connection part and the second airflow connection part are docked in the disassembly direction, so that when the beauty head is connected to the main body, the first airflow connection part and the second airflow connection part are connected.
- FIG1 shows a schematic structural diagram of a beauty instrument in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG2 shows an exploded schematic diagram of a beauty instrument in one embodiment of the present application from one perspective.
- FIG3 shows an exploded schematic diagram of a beauty device in one embodiment of the present application from another perspective.
- FIG4 shows an exploded schematic diagram of a housing of a beauty device in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 5 shows a partial enlarged view of area A in FIG. 4 .
- FIG6 shows a schematic structural diagram of a connection module and a head shell of a beauty instrument in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG7 shows a schematic structural diagram of a connection module of a beauty instrument in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG8 shows a schematic structural diagram of a connection module from another perspective in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG9 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of the connection module of the beauty instrument in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the unlock The button is pressed to drive the movable limiting member to approach the abutting member.
- FIG10 shows a schematic structural diagram of a connection module of a beauty instrument in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the unlocking button is not pressed, and the locking elastic member restores its shape to drive the movable limiting member away from the abutting member.
- FIG11 shows a schematic structural diagram of a connection module from another perspective in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 12 shows a partial enlarged view of area B in FIG. 11 .
- FIG13 shows a partial cross-sectional view of a beauty device in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG14 shows a schematic structural diagram of a head shell and a connection module in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the connection module includes a main circuit board.
- FIG15 shows a schematic structural diagram of a beauty head in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG16 shows a schematic structural diagram of a shell of a beauty head in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG17 shows a schematic structural diagram of a beauty head in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG18 shows a schematic structural diagram of a shell of a beauty head in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG19 shows a schematic structural diagram of a beauty head in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the number of radio frequency electrodes is four.
- FIG20 shows a schematic structural diagram of a beauty head in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the cover is detached.
- FIG21 shows a cross-sectional view of a beauty head in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the cross-sectional view is taken at a position of a group of second electrical connectors.
- FIG22 shows a partial cross-sectional view of a beauty device in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG23 shows a schematic structural diagram of a beauty instrument in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the rear shell is detached.
- FIG24 shows a schematic structural diagram of an air source assembly in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the gas in the negative pressure tank is sucked by an air pump.
- FIG25 shows a schematic structural diagram of an air source assembly in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the negative pressure tank inhales air through the air vent.
- FIG26 shows a schematic structural diagram of an air path switching module in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG27 shows an exploded schematic diagram of a rear housing and a display module in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG28 shows a schematic structural diagram of a pressing member in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG29 shows a schematic structural diagram of an air path switching module in one embodiment of the present application.
- FIG30 shows an exploded schematic diagram of a beauty device in another embodiment of the present application.
- FIG31 shows a cross-sectional view of a beauty device in another embodiment of the present application.
- first”, second, etc. are used for descriptive purposes only and are not to be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of the indicated technical features. Thus, features defined as “first”, “second”, etc. may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of such features. In the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, “multiple” means two or more.
- Directional terms such as “upper”, “lower”, “left”, and “right” are defined relative to the orientation of the components schematically placed in the accompanying drawings. It should be understood that these directional terms are relative concepts, which are used for descriptions and clarifications relative to each other, and may change accordingly according to changes in the orientations of the components placed in the accompanying drawings.
- connection should be understood in a broad sense.
- “connected” can mean fixed connection, detachable connection, or integration; it can be directly connected or indirectly connected through an intermediary.
- the term “and/or” as used herein includes any and all combinations of one or more of the relevant listed items.
- FIG1 shows a schematic structural diagram of a beauty instrument 001 in one embodiment of the present application.
- this beauty device 001 includes a main body 010 and a beauty head 030.
- the beauty head 030 includes a negative pressure tank 4111 and a radio frequency electrode 420.
- the negative pressure tank 4111 is used to apply negative pressure to the user's skin, thereby attracting the skin to the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the radio frequency electrode 420 is used to release radio frequency current to the user's skin.
- the beauty head 030 is detachably mounted on the working end 011 of the main body 010.
- the negative pressure tank 4111 communicates with the main body 010 to generate negative pressure, and the radio frequency electrode 420 is electrically connected to the main body 010, allowing the main body 010 to provide electrical energy to the radio frequency electrode 420.
- This beauty device 001 is a radio frequency beauty device.
- the beauty head 030 can act on the user's skin.
- the main body 010 applies negative pressure to the beauty head 030, causing the user's skin to adhere to the beauty head 030.
- the beauty head 030 then transmits radio frequency current to the user's skin, achieving a beauty effect.
- the beauty head 030 when using the beauty device 001, the beauty head 030 is detachably connected to the main body 010, electrically connecting the RF electrode 420 to the main body 010 and connecting the negative pressure channel 4111 to the main body 010. This allows the main body 010 to draw skin into the negative pressure channel 4111 through the negative pressure channel 4111. The RF electrode 420 then emits a radio frequency current to the skin, allowing the radio frequency current to penetrate the skin drawn into the negative pressure channel 4111. This increases the penetration depth of the radio frequency energy and enhances the beauty effect.
- the detachable connection between the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 allows the beauty head 030 to be separated from the main body 010 and stored separately.
- the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 are reassembled to electrically connect the RF electrode 420 to the main body 010 and connect the negative pressure channel 4111 to the main body 010.
- the user can replace different beauty heads 030 according to usage needs, such as replacing the beauty head 030 with a different negative pressure groove 4111, or replacing the beauty head 030 with a different number of radio frequency electrodes 420, or replacing the beauty head 030 with radio frequency electrodes 420 of different sizes, etc., so as to meet the diverse needs of users.
- the present application separates the beauty head 030 from the main body 010 and makes the negative pressure tank 4111 It is provided on the beauty head 030.
- the negative pressure tank 4111 can be connected with the main body 010, so there is no need to consider whether the airway hose is separated from the beauty head 030 or the air pump 510, thereby improving assembly efficiency.
- the beauty head 030 has a skin-contacting surface 410 c that faces or even contacts the facial skin during operation, and the radio frequency electrode 420 and the negative pressure groove 4111 are provided on the skin-contacting surface 410 c.
- the beauty device 001 further includes a control component for controlling the operation of the radio frequency electrode 420 , etc.
- the control component is disposed within the housing 100 to form a part of the main body 010 .
- the main body 010 includes a first electrical connector 240
- the beauty head 030 also includes a second electrical connector 470.
- the second electrical connector 470 is electrically connected to the RF electrode 420.
- the beauty head 030 is connected to the main body 010
- the first electrical connector 240 and the second electrical connector 470 are electrically connected, so that the main body 010 provides electrical energy to the RF electrode 420.
- the RF electrode 420 can be controlled through the first electrical connector 240 and the second electrical connector 470.
- the main body 010 includes a first airflow connection portion 232
- the beauty head 030 also includes a second airflow connection portion 4114 that communicates with the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 communicates with the second airflow connection portion 4114, thereby connecting the negative pressure groove 4111 with the main body 010.
- the main body 010 can be connected to the negative pressure groove 4111 by simply connecting the first airflow connection portion 232 with the second airflow connection portion 4114 when the beauty head 030 is installed on the main body 010, thereby further simplifying assembly.
- the RF electrode 420 is positioned near the negative pressure groove 4111, or the RF electrode 420 at least partially extends to the inner wall of the negative pressure groove 4111, so that the RF electrode 420 releases RF current to the skin that is negatively pressured by the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the RF electrode 420 is positioned near the negative pressure groove 4111 so that the distance between the RF electrode 420 and the inner wall of the negative pressure groove 4111 is less than or equal to 12 mm. In this way, by positioning the RF electrode 420 near the negative pressure groove 4111, or by extending the RF electrode 420 at least partially to the inner wall of the negative pressure groove 4111, the RF path can be reduced, thereby improving the cosmetic effect.
- the first electrical connector 240 and the first airflow connection portion 232 constitute a portion of the connection module 200 described below.
- the main body 010 includes a connection module 200 to which the beauty head 030 is detachably connected, thereby detachably connecting the beauty head 030 to the main body 010.
- the first electrical connector 240 and the first airflow connection portion 232 are all part of the connection module 200.
- connection module 200 mentioned in this application can be either an independent module or a feature set formed based on other features of the main body 010. Its relationship with other components is mutually dependent, and it is listed separately for the convenience of description.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 can be detachably connected to each other, thereby communicating with each other.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 are connected to each other, thereby communicating with each other.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 can be detached.
- one of the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 can be a nozzle, and the other can be an airway connector with a socket, into which the nozzle can be inserted.
- first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 can also be set as other structural forms, as long as the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 are connected and communicated when the beauty head 030 is installed/connected to the main body 010, and the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 can be separated when the beauty head 030 is removed.
- the ventilation area of the connection channel of the second air flow connection portion 4114 is smaller than that of the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the ventilation area of the connecting channel of the second airflow connection portion 4114 refers to the ventilation area at the connection between the connecting channel and the first airflow connection portion 232.
- the negative pressure groove 4111 can have a larger adsorption area, while the channel for sucking gas is thinner, so as to facilitate connection with the air pump 510 and control the suction of the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the main body 010 has a first assembly surface 212b
- the beauty head 030 has a second assembly surface 412a.
- the beauty head 030 is connected to the main body 010, the first assembly surface 212b and the second assembly surface 412a are correspondingly arranged.
- the first electrical connector 240 is exposed from the first assembly surface 212b to the main body 010
- the second electrical connector 470 is exposed from the second assembly surface 412a to the beauty head 030 , so that when the beauty head 030 is connected to the main body 010 , the first electrical connector 240 and the second electrical connector 470 are electrically connected.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 is exposed from the first assembly surface 212b to the main body 010
- the second airflow connection portion 4114 is exposed from the second assembly surface 412a to the beauty head 030 , so that when the beauty head 030 is connected to the main body 010 , the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 are connected.
- first assembly surface 212b and the second assembly surface 412a are limited by the shapes of the main body 010 and the beauty head 030, respectively. However, as long as the first assembly surface 212b and the second assembly surface 412a correspond when the beauty head 030 is connected to the main body 010, they will suffice. For example, if the beauty head 030 has an opposing surface opposite the skin-engaging surface 410c, this opposing surface can form the second assembly surface 412a.
- the first assembly surface 212b can also be the surface of the main body 010 that faces the facial skin during operation. For another example, if the main body 010 has an assembly groove 212a, the first assembly surface 212b can be either the bottom of the assembly groove 212a or the inner peripheral wall of the assembly groove 212a.
- the first electrical connector 240 and the second electrical connector 470 can be electrically connected when the beauty head 030 is mounted on the main body 010.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 from the first assembly surface 212b to the main body 010 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 from the second assembly surface 412a to the beauty head 030 By exposing the first airflow connection portion 232 from the first assembly surface 212b to the main body 010 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 from the second assembly surface 412a to the beauty head 030, the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 can be connected when the beauty head 030 is mounted on the main body 010, thereby improving ease of use.
- the first assembly surface 212b contacts or abuts the second assembly surface 412a, which facilitates the positioning of the beauty head 030 and the main body 010.
- the first assembly surface 212b and the second assembly surface 412a are arranged in a corresponding disassembly direction.
- the disassembly direction refers to the direction in which the beauty head 030 moves away from or toward the main body 010 when the beauty head 030 is removed from or installed with the main body 010.
- the first assembly surface 212b is the side of the main body 010 that faces the facial skin during operation and is opposite the opposing surface.
- the second assembly surface 412a is the side of the beauty head 030 corresponding to the bottom (e.g., the aforementioned opposing surface).
- the disassembly direction can be parallel to the first inclined direction U.
- at least one of the first electrical connector 240 and the first airflow connection portion 232 extends along the first inclined direction U.
- first electrical connector 240 and the second electrical connector 470 contact or abut against each other in the removal direction, so that when the beauty head 030 is connected to the main body 010, the first electrical connector 240 and the second electrical connector 470 are electrically connected. This facilitates the electrical connection between the first electrical connector 240 and the second electrical connector 470.
- first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 are connected in the disassembly direction, so that when the grooming head 030 is connected to the main body 010, the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 are connected. This facilitates the connection between the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114.
- first electrical connector 240 the damage to the first electrical connector 240, the second electrical connector 470, and the like during the process of disassembling the beauty head 030 can be reduced.
- the risk of the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 can also reduce the design difficulty of the first electrical connector 240, the second electrical connector 470, the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114, thereby reducing design costs.
- the beauty head 030 or the main body 010 is provided with an assembly groove 212a.
- the bottom of the assembly groove 212a forms a first assembly surface 212b or a second assembly surface 412a.
- the assembly groove 212a during operation, the facial skin contacts the beauty head 030.
- the sidewalls of the assembly groove 212a can be used to support the beauty head 030, thereby improving the stability of the beauty head 030 during operation.
- the first assembly surface 212 b is provided on the connection module 200 .
- connection module 200 or the beauty head 030 is provided with an assembly groove 212a, and the bottom/bottom wall of the assembly groove 212a forms a first assembly surface 212b or a second assembly surface 412a, so that the beauty head 030 can be installed in the assembly groove 212a of the connection module 200 or the connection module 200 can be installed in the assembly groove 212a of the beauty head 030, and the relative positions of the connection module 200 and the beauty head 030 are restricted.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 there are many ways to detachably connect the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 is inserted into the second airflow connection portion 4114, or the second airflow connection portion 4114 is inserted into the first airflow connection portion 232, so that the first airflow connection portion 232 and the second airflow connection portion 4114 are connected.
- the plug-in connection method can quickly achieve a detachable connection and facilitate sealing.
- connection module 200 is provided with an assembly slot 212a, the bottom wall of which forms a first assembly surface 212b, and the first airflow connection portion 232 protrudes from the first assembly surface 212b to be inserted into the second airflow connection portion 4114, thereby connecting the first airflow connection portion 232 with the second airflow connection portion 4114.
- the grooming head 030 is provided with an assembly slot 212a, the bottom wall of which forms a second assembly surface 412a, and the second airflow connection portion 4114 protrudes from the second assembly surface 412a to be inserted into the first airflow connection portion 232, thereby connecting the first airflow connection portion 232 with the second airflow connection portion 4114.
- Figure 2 shows an exploded schematic diagram of a beauty device 001 in one embodiment of the present application from one perspective.
- Figure 3 shows an exploded schematic diagram of a beauty device 001 in one embodiment of the present application from another perspective.
- the main body 010 includes a housing 100.
- the housing 100 comprises a first half shell, a second half shell, and a head shell 110.
- the first half shell and the second half shell do not necessarily have to be strictly divided into halves. That is, the first half shell can be significantly larger or smaller than the second half shell, or one of the first half shell and the second half shell can even be a plate-like structure.
- one end of the first half shell has a bending portion 121 that is bent and tilted toward a side close to the second half shell and is arranged in the first tilt direction U.
- the bending portion 121 can adapt to the head shell 110 to assemble the head shell 110, the first half shell and the second half shell.
- the first half shell is defined as the rear shell 120
- the second half shell is defined as the front shell 130.
- the rear shell 120 extends as a whole along the first direction X
- the front shell 130 extends as a whole along the first direction X.
- the bent portion 121 is formed by bending forward and tilting forward.
- the head shell 110 is arranged to tilt forward, so that the head shell 110 can be provided with multiple RF electrodes 420 arranged forward and tilted, so as to release RF current to the user's skin through the RF electrodes 420.
- the multiple RF electrodes 420 arranged forward and tilted means that the multiple RF electrodes 420 are arranged tilted toward the side of the first half shell close to the second half shell.
- the front shell 130 and the back shell 120 cooperate to form a holding portion 101, which is convenient for the user to hold the beauty instrument 001.
- the bending portion 121 protrudes from the front shell 130, and the head shell 110 is connected to the bending portion 121 and the front shell 130.
- the holding portion 101 extends along the first direction X, and the bent portion 121 is located at one end of the holding portion 101 and extends obliquely to the first direction X.
- the front shell 130 does not directly cooperate with the bent portion 121, so that after the front shell 130 and the rear shell 120 are connected, the bent portion 121 appears to protrude from the front shell 130.
- the head shell 110 has a skin-facing plate 011 a.
- the skin-facing plate 011 a faces the user's skin.
- the head shell 110 is used to install the beauty head 030, for example, the beauty head 030 can be installed on the skin-facing plate 011a; in other embodiments, as shown in Figures 30 and 31, the head shell 110 is used to form the beauty head 030, on which the radio frequency electrode 420 and the cold compress 910 are installed (specifically, the skin-facing plate 011a).
- the head shell 110 has an assembly recess 5122 that cooperates with the bending portion 121 , and the head shell 110 is detachably mounted on the bending portion 121 and the second half shell 517 through the assembly recess 5122 .
- the head shell 110, the first half shell, and the second half shell can be combined to form the accommodating cavity 100a of the outer shell 100. Furthermore, this arrangement facilitates demolding of the head shell 110 during manufacture, thereby reducing manufacturing difficulty. Furthermore, during assembly, the provision of the assembly recess 5122 increases the assembly space, facilitating the installation of features such as the RF electrode 420 and the cold compress 910, or facilitating the installation of the connection module 200.
- the head shell 110 includes a base plate 110b and a surrounding plate 110c.
- the base plate 110b is used to form the skin-facing plate 011a, that is, the base plate 110b is the skin-facing plate 011a, and the assembly recess 5122 is formed in the surrounding plate 110c.
- the surrounding plate 110c is connected to the periphery of the base plate 110b, making the head shell 110 generally hollow.
- the enclosure 110c comprises an enclosure body 111 and an assembly 113.
- the enclosure body 111 is a hollow structure, connected to the periphery of the base plate 110b. Its interior forms a mounting cavity 110a, which accommodates the connection module 200, etc., for the beauty head 030.
- the assembly 113 is located at one end of the enclosure body 111 and is used to engage the rear shell 120 and the front shell 130, thereby connecting the rear shell 120 and the front shell 130 to the head shell 110.
- the connecting module 200 is exposed from the other end of the enclosure body 111, facilitating the mating connection between the grooming head 030 and the connecting module 200.
- the end of the enclosure body 111 facing away from the assembly 113 is flatly configured so that the connecting module 200 can be accommodated within the mounting cavity 110a and exposed from the end of the mounting cavity 110a facing away from the assembly 113.
- the assembly part 113 and the enclosure body 111 are integrally formed to improve the strength of the head shell 110 and facilitate the production and preparation of the head shell 110 .
- the assembly 113 includes a first head shell assembly portion 1131 and a second head shell assembly portion 1132.
- the first head shell assembly portion 1131 is used to connect to the rear shell 120
- the second head shell assembly portion 1132 is used to connect to the front shell 130.
- the front shell 130 and the rear shell 120 extend generally along the first direction X
- the head shell 110 extends along a first inclined direction U, which is inclined relative to the first direction X.
- the angle between the first inclination direction U and the first direction X is 20-80°, such as 22°, 24°, 26°, 28°, 30°, 32°, 34°, 36°, 38°, 40°, 42°, 44°, 46°, 48°, 50°, 52°, 54°, 56°, 58°, 60°, 62°, 64°, 66°, 68°, 70°, 75°, 78° or 80°.
- the included angle between the first inclined direction U and the first direction X can be selected to be 36°-63°.
- the included angle between the first inclined direction U and the first direction X is 37°.
- the head shell 110 is used to mount the beauty head 030 or to form the beauty head 030, by setting the included angle between the first tilt direction U and the first direction X to 20-80° or 36-63°, the skin-contacting surface 410c of the beauty head 030 can also be tilted, thereby preventing the user from lifting their arm too high when holding the beauty device 001 and applying it to the face. This allows for more effortless beauty treatments.
- the above arrangement allows the user to conveniently apply the beauty head 030 to the user's skin (e.g., face) by holding the handle 101 formed by the front shell 130 and the rear shell 120 after the beauty head 030 is assembled on the head shell 110, without having to raise their arm, which is labor-saving.
- the dimension of the beauty device 001 in the second direction Y can be kept relatively small, making it easier to store the beauty device 001.
- the first inclined direction U is located between the first direction X and the second direction Y, and the second direction Y is perpendicular to the first direction X.
- the first direction X forms the length direction of the beauty device 001.
- the second direction Y forms the thickness direction of the beauty device 001.
- the third direction Z which is perpendicular to the first direction X and the second direction Y, forms the width direction of the beauty device 001.
- FIG4 shows an exploded schematic diagram of the housing 100 of the beauty device 001 in one embodiment of the present application.
- the first head shell assembly portion 1131 includes a first head shell region 11311, a second head shell region 11312, and a third head shell region 11313.
- the first head shell region 11311 and the second head shell region 11312 are arranged at an obtuse angle
- the second head shell region 11312 and the third head shell region 11313 are arranged at an obtuse angle to form an assembly recess 11314, and the assembly recess 11314 is enlarged to further facilitate demolding and increase assembly space.
- the notch formed by the first head shell region 11311 in the head shell 110 is approximately perpendicular to the first tilt direction U.
- the notch formed by the second head shell region 11312 in the head shell 110 is approximately perpendicular to the second direction Y.
- the notch formed by the third head shell region 11313 in the head shell 110 is approximately perpendicular to the first tilt direction U.
- the first head shell area 11311 and the second head shell area 11312 transition in an arc shape, and the second head shell area 11312 and the third head shell area 11313 transition in an arc shape, so as to facilitate demolding.
- the area between the first head shell area 11311 and the second head shell area 11312 forms an assembly recess 11314.
- the size of the portion of the head shell 110 corresponding to the second head shell area 11312 in the first tilt direction U gradually increases from close to the first head shell area 11311 to close to the third head shell area 11313.
- the extended dimension of the panel body 111 corresponding to the first head shell region 11311 is smaller than the extended dimension of the panel body 111 corresponding to the second head shell region 11312.
- the extended dimension of the panel body 111 corresponding to the second head shell region 11312 is smaller than the extended dimension of the panel body 111 corresponding to the third head shell region 11313, thereby forming the assembly recess 11314.
- the assembly notch 11314 of the head shell 110 is used to cooperate with the bent portion 121 for connection.
- the assembly recess 11314 can also be formed in the base plate 110b and the enclosure 110c.
- the enclosure 110c protrudes and is connected to a portion of the periphery of the base plate 110b.
- the assembly recess 11314 can be formed between the base plate 110b and the enclosure 110c.
- the portion of the head shell 110 corresponding to the first head shell region 11311 extends a smaller dimension in the first oblique direction U. This facilitates inserting tools into the head shell 110 through the notch corresponding to the first head shell region 11311 when assembling the head shell 110 and the connection module 200, thereby reducing assembly difficulty and cost and improving assembly yield. Furthermore, the head shell 110 is easier to remove from the mold during production.
- the head shell 110 can be produced by injection molding. After injection molding, when the head shell 110 is demolded, the assembly recess 11314 is formed on the head shell 110, which facilitates demolding, such as facilitating the head shell 110 to be demolded along the first inclined direction U or along the direction from the first head shell area 11311 to the second head shell area 11312.
- the first head shell assembly portion 1131 transitions to the second head shell assembly portion 1132 through the third head shell area 11313, making it easier for the rear shell 120 to be assembled to the head shell 110 and connected to the front shell 130.
- Part of one area is arc-shaped, wherein the first head shell area 11311 and the second head shell area 11312 transition in an arc shape, so that the contour of the connection between the first head shell area 11311 and the enclosure body 111 transitions to the contour of the connection between the second head shell area 11312 and the enclosure body 111 is arc-shaped, thereby preventing the tip from being deformed during demolding and facilitating alignment and assembly.
- the rear shell 120 is provided with a first rear shell assembly portion 1201 , and the first rear shell assembly portion 1201 is used to cooperate with the first head shell assembly portion 1131 , thereby realizing the connection between the head shell 110 and the rear shell 120 .
- the rear shell 120 has a first accommodating groove 120 a
- the front shell 130 has a second accommodating groove 130 a
- the first accommodating groove 120 a and the second accommodating groove 130 a together form an accommodating cavity 100 a between the front shell 130 and the rear shell 120 .
- the first rear shell assembly portion 1201 includes a first rear shell area 12011, a second rear shell area 12012, and a third rear shell area 12013.
- the first rear shell area 12011 corresponds to the first head shell area 11311
- the second rear shell area 12012 corresponds to the second head shell area 11312. That is, the first rear shell area 12011 and the second rear shell area 12012 correspond to the assembly recess 11314
- the third rear shell area 12013 corresponds to the third head shell area 11313.
- the first rear shell area 12011 and the second rear shell area 12012 transition in an arc shape.
- the notch formed in the first back shell area 12011 is roughly perpendicular to the extension direction
- the notch formed in the second back shell area 12012 is roughly perpendicular to the second direction Y
- the notch formed in the third back shell area 12013 is roughly perpendicular to the extension direction.
- the first rear shell area 12011 , the second rear shell area 12012 and the third rear shell area 12013 are formed in the bending portion 121 .
- the rear shell 120 When assembling the front shell 130, the rear shell 120 and the head shell 110, the rear shell 120 can be moved close to the head shell 110 along the second direction Y so that the head shell 110 is connected to the rear shell 120, and connected to the front shell 130 so that the first accommodating groove 120a and the second accommodating groove 130a form an accommodating cavity 100a.
- the first head shell assembly portion 1131 is provided with a first head shell engaging member 11315
- the back shell 120 is provided with a first back shell engaging member 12015 on the first back shell assembly portion 1201.
- the first head shell engaging member 11315 and the first back shell engaging member 12015 are engaged with each other, so that the head shell 110 and the back shell 120 are engaged.
- the outer wall surface of the first head shell assembly portion 1131 is not coplanar with the outer wall surface of the enclosure body 111 , so that a first step is formed between the first head shell assembly portion 1131 and the enclosure body 111 .
- the rear shell 120 When the rear shell 120 is connected to the head shell 110, the rear shell 120 fits against the bottom wall of the first step, and the end of the rear shell 120 close to the head shell 110 abuts against the side wall of the first step.
- the bottom wall of the first step is the outer periphery of the first head shell assembly portion 1131
- the side wall of the first step is the end face of the enclosure body 111 facing the first head shell assembly portion 1131.
- the abutment of the rear shell 120 against the side wall of the first step can limit the movement of the rear shell 120 relative to the head shell 110 along the first direction X, and can facilitate the coplanarity or smooth transition of the outer wall surface of the rear shell 120 and the outer wall surface of the enclosure body 111, thereby improving the flatness of the appearance of the shell 411.
- the first head shell engaging member 11315 is a hole
- the first rear shell engaging member 12015 is a buckle.
- the buckle can be elastically deformed to enter the hole, and after the buckle is locked in the hole, the buckle elastically recovers its shape to achieve the engagement between the buckle and the hole.
- the first head shell assembly part 1131 is provided with a first head shell fitting part
- the back shell 120 is provided with a first back shell fitting part in the first back shell assembly part 1201.
- the first head shell fitting part and the first back shell fitting part fit tightly together, so that the head shell 110 and the back shell 120 are connected.
- the first head shell fitting part is a magnetic part
- the first back shell fitting part is a magnetic part.
- the first head shell fitting part and the first back shell fitting part can fit together magnetically.
- the first head shell fitting part is an adhesive part
- the first back shell fitting part is an adhesive surface. The first head shell fitting part and the first back shell fitting part can fit together by adhesion.
- the front shell 130 When the front shell 130 is connected to the head shell 110, the front shell 130 extends generally along the first direction X. Along the second direction Y, the size of the front shell 130 is 0.2-0.25 times the size of the rear shell 120. This allows the first accommodating groove 120a of the rear shell 120 to constitute the majority of the accommodating cavity 100a, while the second accommodating groove 130a of the front shell 130 only constitutes a small portion of the accommodating cavity 100a.
- the rear shell 120 needs to be detached to expose the internal components of the beauty device 001, and a larger operating window is formed at the location where the rear shell 120 is detached to facilitate operations, such as maintenance.
- the front shell 130 is further provided with a first front shell assembly portion 1301.
- the first front shell assembly portion 1301 cooperates with the second head shell assembly portion 1132 to assemble the front shell 130 and the head shell 110.
- the second head shell assembly portion 1132 is provided with a second head shell engaging member 11321, and the first front shell assembly portion 1301 is provided with a first front shell engaging member 13011.
- the head shell 110 and the front shell 130 can be engaged with each other through the engagement and cooperation between the second head shell engaging member 11321 and the first front shell engaging member 13011 .
- a second step is formed between the second head shell assembly portion 1132 and the enclosure body 111.
- the front shell 130 fits against the bottom wall of the second step, and the end of the front shell 130 closest to the head shell 110 abuts against the side wall of the second step.
- the bottom wall of the second step is the outer periphery of the second head shell assembly portion 1132, and the side wall of the second step is the end face of the enclosure body 111 facing the second head shell assembly portion 1132.
- the front housing 130 abuts against the side wall of the second step, which can limit the movement of the front housing 130 along the first direction X relative to the head housing 110 .
- the second head shell assembly portion 1132 is provided with a second head shell fitting part
- the first front shell assembly portion 1301 is provided with a first front shell fitting part.
- the second head shell fitting part and the first front shell fitting part fit tightly together, so that the head shell and the front shell fit together.
- the second head shell fitting part is a magnetic part
- the first front shell fitting part is a magnetic part.
- the second head shell fitting part and the first front shell fitting part can fit together magnetically.
- the second head shell fitting part is an adhesive part
- the first front shell fitting part is an adhesive surface. The second head shell fitting part and the first front shell fitting part can fit together by adhesion.
- the head shell 110 may not be provided with the assembly part 113, and may be connected to the front shell 130 or the rear shell 110 in other ways.
- a magnetic part may be embedded in the head shell 110 to connect the head shell 110 and the rear shell 120 by magnetic attraction, and the head shell 110 and the front shell 130 by magnetic attraction.
- FIG. 5 shows a partial enlarged view of area A in FIG. 4 .
- the second head shell engaging member 11321 is a engaging groove
- the first front shell engaging member 13011 is a engaging block.
- the engaging groove is generally T-shaped, having a first head shell engaging section 11322 and a second head shell engaging section 11323 along a first direction X.
- the size of the engaging block matches the engaging groove.
- the engaging groove prevents the engaging block from falling out of the engaging groove along the first direction X, thereby preventing the front shell 130 from moving away from the head shell 110 along the first direction X.
- the T-shaped engaging structure has greater structural strength and higher engagement stability.
- the dimension of the first head shell engaging section 11322 along the third direction Z is greater than the dimension of the second head shell engaging section 11323 along the third direction Z.
- the front shell 130 is further provided with a locking member 1304, which is locked to the second head shell assembly portion 1132 to limit the relative movement of the front shell 130 and the head shell 110 along the second direction Y.
- extension direction of the second head shell assembly portion 1132 is inclined to the second direction Y.
- the enclosure body 111 can also abut against the front shell 130 in the second direction Y to prevent the front shell 130 from separating from the head shell 110 along the second direction Y.
- the extension direction of the second head shell assembly portion 1132 is inclined at an angle of 3-10 degrees to the second direction Y.
- the extension direction of the second head shell assembly portion 1132 is inclined at an angle of 6 degrees to the second direction Y, so that the front shell 130 is inclined along the second direction Y.
- the direction Y cooperates with the head shell 110, and can make the enclosure body 111 abut against the front shell 130 in the second direction Y, so as to limit the front shell 130 from separating from the head shell 110 along the second direction Y.
- the extension direction of the second head shell assembly part 1132 is the direction in which the second head shell assembly part 1132 extends away from the first head shell assembly part 1131.
- the front shell 130 has a tail cover portion 131 at one end away from the head shell 110. In this way, when the front shell 130 is disassembled, more operating space can be exposed to facilitate assembly or maintenance.
- the tail cover portion 131 is inclined in the first direction X and extends toward the rear housing 120. Accordingly, in one embodiment, the rear housing 120 gradually increases in size in the first direction X from a position close to the front housing 130 to a position away from the front housing 130. The rear housing 120 has the smallest size in the first direction X at an end close to the front housing 130.
- a flare is formed at the connection between the front shell 130 and the head shell 110. That is, as the front shell 130 approaches and moves away from the front shell 130 along the second direction Y, the assembly dimension along the first direction X increases, thereby facilitating the assembly of the rear shell 120 into the flared portion. It will be appreciated that if the assembly dimension along the first direction X decreases as the front shell 130 approaches and moves away from the front shell 130 along the second direction Y, a positional conflict with the rear shell 120 may easily occur, making it difficult for the rear shell 120 to be assembled into the assembly space formed by the front shell 130 and the head shell 110.
- the rear shell 120 approaches this opening from the end with the smallest dimension in the first direction X, thereby facilitating the assembly of the rear shell 120 into the front shell 130 and the head shell 110.
- the front shell 130 further includes a second front shell assembly portion 1302 .
- the second front shell assembly portion 1302 is configured to cooperate with the rear shell 120 to fix the relative positions of the front shell 130 and the rear shell 120 .
- the second front shell assembly part 1302 sequentially includes a first front shell area 13021 and a second front shell area 13022.
- the first front shell area 13021 extends as a whole parallel to the first direction, and when the front shell 130 is connected to the head shell 110, the first front shell area 13021 and the second head shell assembly part 1132 of the second front shell assembly part 1302 transition in an arc shape.
- the second front shell area 13022 of the second front shell assembly part 1302 is located at the tail cover part 131.
- the second front shell area 13022 is arranged along the outer periphery of the tail cover part 131, and the first front shell area 13021 and the second front shell area 13022 transition in an arc shape.
- the rear shell 120 also has a second rear shell assembly portion 1202.
- the second rear shell assembly portion 1202 includes a fourth rear shell region 12021 and a fifth rear shell region 12022.
- the fourth rear shell region 12021 of the rear shell 120 matches the first front shell region 13021 of the assembly portion.
- the fifth rear shell region 12022 of the rear shell 120 matches the second front shell region 13022 of the assembly portion.
- the fourth rear shell region 12021 is connected to the first front shell region 13021
- the fifth rear shell region 12022 is connected to the second front shell region 13022, so that the first accommodating groove 120a and the second accommodating groove 130a jointly form the accommodating cavity 100a between the front shell 130 and the rear shell 120.
- the tail cover portion 131 closes the end of the accommodating cavity 100a away from the head shell 110, thereby reducing the risk of foreign matter entering the accommodating cavity 100a.
- the front shell 130 may also be provided with a functional hole in the tail cover portion 131, through which the power cord 050 may be introduced into the accommodating chamber 100a, thereby supplying power to the accommodating chamber 100a.
- the front shell 130 may also be provided with a ventilation hole in the tail cover portion 131, so that the ventilation hole enables gas exchange between the accommodating chamber 100a and the outside of the beauty instrument 001, thereby facilitating heat dissipation and pressure relief of the beauty instrument 001.
- the ventilation hole on the inclined tail cover portion 131, when the ventilation hole is an air outlet, when the beauty instrument 001 is used, that is, when performing radio frequency beauty treatment on the face, air can be blown obliquely downward to dissipate heat, thereby preventing hot air from blowing onto the user and other people nearby.
- the outer wall surface of the first front shell region 13021 of the second front shell assembly portion 1302 is not coplanar with the outer wall surface of the front shell 130, so that a third step is formed between the first front shell region 13021 of the second front shell assembly portion 1302 and the outer wall of the front shell 130.
- the rear shell 120 is connected to the front shell 130, the rear shell 120 is attached to the bottom wall of the third step, and the end of the rear shell 120 closest to the front shell 130 abuts the side wall of the third step.
- the bottom wall of the third step i.e., the first front shell region 13021 of the second front shell assembly portion 1302, faces away from the outer periphery of the accommodating cavity 100a.
- the abutment of the rear shell 120 against the side wall of the third step can limit the movement of the rear shell 120 relative to the front shell 130 along the second direction Y.
- the second front shell assembly portion 1302 is provided with a second front shell engaging member 13023 in the first front shell region 13021, and the second rear shell assembly portion 1202 is provided with a second rear shell engaging member 12023 in the fourth rear shell region 12021.
- the second front shell assembly portion 1302 is provided with a third front shell engaging member 13024 in the second front shell region 13022, and the second rear shell assembly portion 1202 is provided with a third rear shell engaging member 12024 in the fifth rear shell region 12022.
- the second front shell engaging member 13023 engages with the second rear shell engaging member 12023, thereby relatively and fixedly connecting the first front shell region 13021 and the fourth rear shell region 12021 along the second direction Y.
- the third front shell engaging member 13024 is engaged with the third rear shell engaging member 12024 , so that the second front shell region 13022 and the fifth rear shell region 12022 are relatively fixedly connected along the first direction X.
- the second front shell engaging member 13023 is a locking hole
- the second rear shell engaging member 12023 is a buckle.
- the buckle can be elastically deformed to enter the locking hole, and after the buckle is locked in the locking hole, the buckle elastically recovers its shape to achieve the locking of the buckle and the locking hole.
- the second rear shell engaging member 12023 is a locking hole
- the third front shell engaging member 13024 is a buckle.
- the buckle can be elastically deformed to enter the locking hole, and after the buckle is locked in the locking hole, the buckle elastically recovers its shape to achieve the locking of the buckle and the locking hole.
- the head shell 110 and the front shell 130 can be assembled first.
- the first front shell engaging member 13011 of the front shell 130 is snap-fitted with the second head shell engaging member 11321 of the head shell 110.
- the first front shell area 13021 of the front shell 130 is connected to the second head shell assembly part 1132 of the head shell 110, and the first front shell area 13021 and the second head shell assembly part 1132 are transitioned in an arc shape.
- An opening is formed between the tail cover part 131 and the head shell 110.
- the first accommodating groove 120a of the rear shell 120 is directed toward the front shell 130, and the rear shell 120 is driven to enter the opening formed between the tail cover part 131 and the head shell 110.
- the first rear shell assembly portion 1201 of the rear shell 120 is connected to the first head shell assembly portion 1131 of the head shell 110, and the second rear shell assembly portion 1202 of the rear shell 120 is connected to the second front shell assembly portion 1302 of the front shell 130.
- the head shell 110 further fixes the relative positions of the front shell 130 and the head shell 110, so that the head shell 110, the front shell 130, and the rear shell 120 are relatively fixedly connected to form the accommodating cavity 100a.
- the second front shell assembly portion 1302 is provided with a second front shell fitting in the first front shell region 13021, and the second rear shell assembly portion 1202 is provided with a second rear shell fitting in the fourth rear shell region 12021.
- the second front shell assembly portion 1302 is provided with a third front shell fitting in the second front shell region 13022, and the second rear shell assembly portion 1202 is provided with a third rear shell fitting in the fifth rear shell region 12022.
- the second front shell fitting fits tightly with the second rear shell fitting, allowing the first front shell region 13021 and the fourth rear shell region 12021 to be relatively fixedly connected along the second direction Y.
- the third front shell fitting fits snugly with the third rear shell fitting, allowing the second front shell region 13022 and the fifth rear shell region 12022 to be relatively fixedly connected along the first direction X.
- the second front shell fitting piece is a magnetic piece
- the second rear shell fitting piece is a magnetic piece.
- the second front shell fitting piece and the second rear shell fitting piece can be magnetically engaged.
- the second front shell fitting piece is an adhesive piece
- the second rear shell fitting piece is an adhesive surface. The second front shell fitting piece and the second rear shell fitting piece can be adhesively engaged.
- the third front shell fitting piece is a magnetic piece
- the third rear shell fitting piece is a magnetic piece.
- the third front shell fitting piece and the third rear shell fitting piece can be magnetically matched.
- the third front shell fitting piece is an adhesive piece
- the third rear shell fitting piece is an adhesive piece.
- the fitting piece is an adhesive surface.
- the third front shell fitting piece and the third rear shell fitting piece can be pasted and matched.
- the control component includes a main control board 310, which is connected to the air source component 500 and is used to control the opening or closing of the air flow drive component and/or to control the air path switching module 520 to switch between the negative pressure mode and the deflation mode.
- the main control board 310 is part of the main body 010.
- the main control board 310 is disposed within the accommodating cavity 100a and can be connected to the RF electrode 420, the air pump 510, the button block 721, and the like.
- the main control board 310 is electrically connected to the first electrical connector 240, thereby electrically connecting to the RF electrode 420 via the first electrical connector 240 and the second electrical connector 470.
- the front housing 130 is provided with a first locking groove 132.
- One side of the main control board 310 is locked in the first locking groove 132.
- the rear housing 120 is provided with a second locking groove 122.
- the side of the main control board 310 facing away from the front housing 130 is locked in the second locking groove 122.
- the first locking groove 132 and the second locking groove 122 can restrict the relative position of the main control board 310 and the outer housing 100, thereby securing the main control board 310.
- the main control board 310 To assemble the main control board 310 into the accommodating cavity 100a, first secure one side of the main control board 310 in the first securing groove 132. Then, move the rear housing 120 closer to the front housing 130 along the second direction Y. At this point, align the main control board 310 with the second securing groove 122. When the front housing 130 and rear housing 120 are fully assembled, the side of the main control board 310 facing away from the front housing 130 is also secured in the second securing groove 122.
- Figure 6 shows a schematic structural diagram of the connection module 200 and the head shell 110 of the beauty device 001 in one embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 7 shows a schematic structural diagram of the connection module 200 of the beauty device 001 in one embodiment of the present application.
- the main body 010 further includes a connection module 200 (see FIG. 2 ).
- the connection module 200 is connected to the head shell 110 and exposed from the head shell 110 so as to be detachably connected to the beauty head 030.
- the connection module 200 includes a connection inner shell 210 and a first electrical connector 240 ; the first electrical connector 240 is mounted on the connection inner shell 210 , and the connection inner shell 210 is mounted on the head shell 110 , so that the connection module 200 is mounted as a whole on the head shell 110 .
- the inner housing 210 includes an inner base plate 211 and an inner panel 212.
- the inner panel 212 is positioned on one side of the inner base plate 211, and the inner panel 212 and the inner base plate 211 form a mounting groove 212a.
- the inner base plate 211 forms the bottom of the mounting groove 212a.
- the head housing 110 has an opening, and the mounting groove 212a is exposed through the opening of the head housing 110.
- the opening of the head shell 110 faces the user's skin (e.g., facial skin).
- the bottom wall of the assembly groove 212a forms a first assembly surface 212b.
- the first assembly surface 212b is designed to mate with the second assembly surface 412a of the beauty head 030.
- the assembly groove 212a which is connected to the inner shell 210, is used to insert the beauty head 030, thereby improving the installation stability of the beauty head 030.
- the head shell 110 is provided with an inwardly facing inner flange 114 at the opening.
- This inner flange 114 is formed on the base plate 110b mentioned above.
- the end of the inner panel 212 facing away from the inner base plate 211 abuts against the inner flange 114 of the head shell 110.
- the inner flange 114 of the head shell 110 restricts the connecting inner shell 210 from extending out of the head shell 110 along the first inclined direction U and serves to conceal the connecting inner shell 210, thereby improving waterproof performance.
- the beauty head 030 When the beauty head 030 needs to be installed in the assembly groove 212a, the beauty head 030 first passes through the opening of the head shell 110 and then is installed in the assembly groove 212a. It is understood that the head shell 110 and the connecting inner shell 210 can also be integrally formed to ensure that the head shell 110 and the connecting inner shell 210 are relatively fixed and reduce the number of assembly steps.
- the head shell 110 also has a stop member 115.
- the stop member 115 is used to limit the connection inner shell 210 from being away from the opening along the first tilt direction U.
- the stop member 115 is a stop protrusion, and the stop protrusion protrudes from the enclosure body 111 in the installation cavity 110a, that is, the stop protrusion is provided on the inner side of the enclosure body 111.
- the inner enclosure 212 is contacted or abutted by the inner flange 114, and the inner base plate 211 is abutted by the stop protrusion, so that The position of the connecting inner shell 210 relative to the head shell 110 along the first tilt direction U is restricted.
- the connecting inner shell 210 is not easy to move relative to the head shell 110 along the first tilt direction U.
- the inner contour of the mounting cavity 110a is non-circular
- the outer contour of the connecting inner shell 210 is also non-circular, so that when the connecting inner shell 210 is arranged in the head shell 110, the connecting inner shell 210 is not easy to rotate relative to the head shell 110 around the axis of the first tilt direction U.
- the inner contour of the mounting cavity 110a is roughly square, and the outer contour of the connecting inner shell 210 is roughly square, so that when the connecting inner shell 210 is arranged in the head shell 110, the connecting inner shell 210 is not easy to rotate relative to the head shell 110 around the axis of the first tilt direction U.
- the inner contour of the assembly slot 212a is non-circular, and the outer contour of the portion of the beauty head 030 that fits into the assembly slot 212a is also non-circular. This ensures that when the portion of the beauty head 030 that fits into the assembly slot 212a is disposed within the head shell 110, the portion of the beauty head 030 that fits into the assembly slot 212a is not easily rotated relative to the head shell 110 about the axis of the first tilting direction U.
- the inner contour of the assembly slot 212a is substantially square, and the outer contour of the portion of the beauty head 030 that fits into the assembly slot 212a is substantially square.
- connection module 200 further includes a locking structure 220 .
- the locking structure 220 includes a locking assembly 221 .
- the locking assembly 221 is used to connect the beauty head 030 when the first assembly surface 212b contacts or abuts the second assembly surface 412a, thereby preventing the beauty head 030 from moving away from the connection module 200 and the main body 010.
- the locking assembly 221 can be provided to achieve the connection between the beauty head 030 and the main body 010.
- the locking assembly 221 is used to engage with the beauty head 030 when the first assembly surface 212b contacts or abuts the second assembly surface 412a to limit the beauty head 030 from being away from the connection module 200.
- the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 can be limited by engaging, which facilitates assembly and disassembly.
- the locking assembly 221 includes a snap-fitting portion, and the beauty head 030 is provided with a snap-fitting portion 4123; the snap-fitting portion is provided on the first assembly surface 212b, and the snap-fitting portion 4123 is provided on the second assembly surface 412a; when the first assembly surface 212b contacts or abuts the second assembly surface 412a, the snap-fitting portion cooperates with the snap-fitting portion 4123 and limits the relative position of the beauty head 030 and the main body 010.
- connection module 200 further includes an unlocking component 222, which is used to release the lock component 221 from the beauty head 030. In this way, disassembly and assembly can be achieved.
- the unlocking assembly 222 acts on the locking assembly 221.
- the unlocking assembly 222 drives the engaging portion and/or the engaging portion 4123 to slide, thereby releasing the engagement between the locking assembly 221 and the engaging portion 4123. This improves the correlation between the unlocking assembly 222 and the locking assembly 221, simplifying the design.
- the locking assembly 221 is used to magnetically attract the beauty head 030 when the first assembly surface 212 b contacts or abuts the second assembly surface 412 a , so as to prevent the beauty head 030 from moving away from the connection module 200 .
- the locking assembly 221 is used to cooperate with the clamping portion 4123 of the beauty head 030 to limit the relative movement between the beauty head 030 and the connecting inner shell 210 (along the first tilting direction U, i.e., the detachable direction).
- the locking structure 220 further includes an unlocking assembly 222.
- the unlocking assembly 222 is used to release the engagement between the locking assembly 221 and the engaging portion 4123, allowing the beauty head 030 to move relative to the inner housing 210 along the first tilting direction U, thereby removing the beauty head 030 from the assembly slot 212a along the first tilting direction U.
- connection module 200 is provided with an assembly groove 212a, and the first airflow connection portion 232 is provided in the assembly groove 212a.
- the bottom of the assembly groove 212a forms a first assembly surface 212b.
- the beauty head 030 is installed in the assembly groove 212a.
- the first assembly surface 212b contacts or abuts against the second assembly surface 412a.
- connection module 200 may further include a pop-up member, which is used to drive the beauty head 030 away from the connection module 200 after the unlocking component 222 releases the cooperation between the locking component 221 and the beauty head 030.
- a pop-up member which is used to drive the beauty head 030 away from the connection module 200 after the unlocking component 222 releases the cooperation between the locking component 221 and the beauty head 030.
- the ejection element includes a first magnetic element and a second magnetic element.
- the first magnetic element is disposed on the connecting inner housing 210
- the second magnetic element is disposed on the mounting housing 410.
- the first and second magnetic elements repel each other, causing the beauty head 030 to move away from the connecting module 200.
- the ejection element can also be a spring, disposed on the connecting inner housing 210 or the mounting housing 410. When the mounting housing 410 is installed in the assembly slot 212a, the spring is compressed, causing the spring to store elastic potential energy.
- the locking assembly 221 may also include a first magnetic locking member and a second magnetic locking member.
- the first magnetic locking member is provided on the main body 010
- the second magnetic locking member is provided on the beauty head 030.
- the main body 010 magnetically attracts the beauty head 030 through the magnetic attraction of the first and second magnetic locking members, thereby preventing the beauty head 030 from moving away from the main body 010.
- FIG8 shows a schematic structural diagram of the connection module 200 from another perspective in one embodiment of the present application.
- the locking assembly 221 optionally includes a movable stopper 2211 and a locking elastic member 2212.
- the movable stopper 2211 has a locking portion 4123.
- the movable stopper 2211 is slidably engaged with the connecting inner shell 210, i.e., the movable stopper 2211 is slidably mounted on the connecting inner shell 210.
- the movable stopper 2211 has a locked position in which the locking portion 4123 is engaged with the engaging portion through the buckling movable hole 2112, and an unlocked position in which the locking portion 4123 is detachable from the engaging portion, so that the beauty head 030 can be installed by moving the movable stopper 2211.
- the movable stopper 2211 is slidably disposed on the inner side of the bottom of the assembly groove 212a.
- the bottom of the assembly groove 212a is provided with a snap-fitting hole 2112.
- the movable stopper 2211 has an engaging portion disposed at the snap-fitting hole 2112.
- a snap-fitting portion 4123 is provided on the second assembly surface 412a.
- the movable stopper 2211 has a locked position, in which the snap-fitting portion 4123 engages with the engaging portion through the snap-fitting hole 2112, and an unlocked position, in which the snap-fitting portion 4123 is detachable from the engaging portion.
- the present invention utilizes the larger space within the bottom of the assembly groove 212a to facilitate the placement of the movable stopper 2211 and provide space for its movement, thereby simplifying the design. Furthermore, by driving the movable stopper 2211 to move, the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 can be locked or unlocked.
- the surface of the inner base plate 211 facing away from the inner panel 212 forms a sliding surface 2111.
- the sliding surface 2111 is perpendicular to the first inclination direction U.
- the movable stopper 2211 can slide along the sliding surface 2111, thereby moving relative to the beauty head 030. It is understood that the movable stopper 2211 can also be guided by other components to guide its movement. For example, the movable stopper 2211 can also be guided by the surface of the inner base plate 211 that is closer to the inner panel 212.
- the movable stopper 2211 is provided with a snap-fitting portion.
- the snap-fitting portion is protruding from the surface of the movable stopper 2211 and is movably disposed within the snap-fitting hole 2112 in the sliding direction to engage with the snap-fitting portion 4123.
- the snap-fitting portion is configured to slide along the sliding surface 2111 with the movable stopper 2211 and engage with the snap-fitting portion 4123, thereby engaging the movable stopper 2211 with the beauty head 030.
- the engaging portion includes a hook 22111.
- the engaging portion 4123 includes a slot 41231.
- the inner base plate 211 connected to the inner shell 210 has a buckle movable hole 2112, and the hook 22111 extends through the buckle movable hole 2112 toward the side of the inner shell 210 where the assembly slot 212a is provided.
- the buckle movable hole 2112 extends in one direction, that is, it has a certain length to avoid the hook 22111 and the engaging portion 4123, so that the hook 22111 extending into the buckle movable hole 2112 can be fixed to the inner shell 210.
- the movable stopper 2211 can move along the sliding direction relative to the movable stopper 2211.
- the movable stopper 2211 slides along the sliding surface 2111, allowing the hook 22111 to enter the slot 41231.
- the hook 22111 acts on the inner wall of the slot 41231, thereby preventing the beauty head 030 from being separated from the inner housing 210 along the first tilting direction U.
- the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 are connected, facilitating the coordination between the main body 010 and the beauty head 030.
- This allows the negative pressure groove 4111 to communicate with the main body 010 to generate negative pressure, and the RF electrode 420 to be electrically connected to the main body 010, allowing the main body 010 to provide electrical energy to the RF electrode 420.
- the movable limiting member 2211 slides on the sliding surface 2111 along a sliding direction, that is, a second inclined direction V.
- the second inclined direction V is perpendicular to the first inclined direction U.
- a guide member 213 is protruding from the inner side surface (ie, the sliding surface 2111 ) of the bottom of the assembly groove 212 a .
- the guide member 213 defines a sliding groove structure, and the movable limiting member 2211 is slidably disposed in the sliding groove structure.
- the guide member 213 clamps onto both sides of the movable stopper 2211 perpendicular to the second tilting direction V, thereby restricting the movable stopper 2211 from sliding relative to the connected inner housing 210 in the second tilting direction V and preventing it from deflecting.
- a barb 2131 is provided on the end of the guide member 213 facing away from the sliding surface 2111. The barb 2131 extends toward the movable stopper 2211 and acts on the end of the movable stopper 2211 facing away from the sliding surface 2111, preventing the movable stopper 2211 from separating from the sliding surface 2111 in the first tilting direction U.
- the guide member 213 is an elastic element, and deformation of the guide member 213 enables the barbs 2131 to move relative to the sliding surface 2111.
- the barbs 2131 on both sides of the movable stopper 2211 can be moved away from each other, facilitating assembly of the movable stopper 2211 on the sliding surface 2111.
- the barbs 2131 return to their positions due to deformation of the guide member 213 and are located at the end of the movable stopper 2211 facing away from the sliding surface 2111, thereby restricting the movable stopper 2211 from disengaging from the sliding surface 2111 along the first inclined direction U.
- the guide member 213 is an elastic element, enabling it to deform elastically. As the guide member 213 deforms, the amount of deformation at the end of the guide member 213 away from the sliding surface 2111 is greater than the amount of deformation at the end closer to the sliding surface 2111. Therefore, the deformation of the guide member 213 allows the barb 2131 to generate sufficient displacement to facilitate assembly of the movable stopper 2211 and connection with the inner shell 210, while also ensuring that the end of the guide member 213 close to the sliding surface 2111 is almost free of deformation, so that the guide member 213 can still limit the displacement of the movable stopper 2211 in a direction perpendicular to the second tilting direction V.
- the guide member 213 can be formed of an elastic material to form an elastic element.
- a locking elastic member 2212 is disposed at one end of the movable limiting member 2211 along the second tilting direction V.
- One end of the locking elastic member 2212 abuts the connecting inner shell 210, and the other end abuts the movable limiting member 2211.
- the locking elastic member 2212 can drive the movable limiting member 2211 to slide relative to the connecting inner shell 210 along the second tilting direction V.
- the connecting inner shell 210 includes a resisting member 214 disposed on the sliding surface 2111. The resisting member 214 protrudes from the sliding surface 2111.
- the locking elastic member 2212 is disposed between the resisting member 214 and the movable limiting member 2211.
- the locking elastic member 2212 may be a compression spring to drive the movable limiting member 2211 away from the resisting member 214 along the second tilting direction V.
- a guiding slope 22112 is disposed at the end of the hook 22111, and the guiding slope 22112 is inclined relative to the sliding surface 2111.
- the movable stopper 2211 and the abutting member 214 jointly compress the locking elastic member 2212.
- the locking elastic member 2212 restores its shape, causing the hook 22111 to move away from the abutting member 214 along the second inclined direction V and enter the locking groove 41231, thereby locking the beauty head 030 and the connecting inner housing 210 along the first inclined direction U.
- FIG9 shows a schematic structural diagram of a connection module 200 of a beauty instrument 001 in one embodiment of the present application.
- 10 shows a schematic structural diagram of the connection module 200 of the beauty instrument 001 in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the unlock button 2221 is not pressed, and the locking elastic member 2212 restores its shape to drive the movable limiter 2211 away from the abutment 214.
- the movable stopper 2211 can optionally be provided with a guide groove 22113.
- the locking elastic member 2212 extends into the guide groove 22113, and the inner wall of the guide groove 22113 can contact the locking elastic member 2212, thereby limiting deformation of the locking elastic member 2212.
- the movable stopper 2211 slides relative to the connecting inner housing 210 along the second inclined direction V
- the movable stopper 2211 and the abutting member 214 jointly compress the locking elastic member 2212.
- the inner wall of the guide groove 22113 minimizes deformation of the locking elastic member 2212 along the second inclined direction V, thereby generating an elastic force as parallel to the second inclined direction V as possible.
- the elastic force of the locking elastic member 2212 is as parallel to the second inclined direction V as possible, thereby reducing the sliding of the movable stopper 2211.
- Fig. 11 shows a schematic structural diagram of the connection module 200 from another perspective in one embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 12 shows a partial enlarged view of the area B in Fig. 11 .
- the unlocking assembly 222 is used to drive the movable stopper 2211 to overcome the elastic force of the locking elastic member 2212 and move closer to the abutting member 214 along the second inclined direction V.
- the hook 22111 disengages from the locking slot 41231 along the second inclined direction V, thereby releasing the lock between the beauty head 030 and the connecting inner housing 210 along the first inclined direction U.
- the unlocking assembly 222 includes an unlocking button 2221 and an unlocking elastic member 2222.
- One end of the unlocking button 2221 extends out of the outer housing 100, and the other end is inserted into the mounting cavity 110a to drive the movable stopper 2211 to slide.
- One end of the unlocking elastic member 2222 acts on the unlocking button 2221, while the other end acts on the connecting inner housing 210.
- the unlocking elastic member 2222 applies an elastic force to the unlocking button 2221 away from the movable stopper 2211, causing the unlocking button 2221 to move away from the movable stopper 2211.
- the user can press the unlocking button 2221, which in turn applies pressure to the movable stopper 2211, overcoming the locking elastic member 2212.
- the movable stopper 2211 approaches the abutting member 214 along the second inclined direction V, causing the hook 22111 to gradually disengage from the latching slot 41231.
- the hook 22111 is disengaged from the slot 41231 , the locking between the beauty head 030 and the connecting inner shell 210 along the first tilting direction U is released, and the user can remove the beauty head 030 from the connecting inner shell 210 .
- the head shell 110 is provided with a button hole 1101, through which the unlock button 2221 extends out of the head shell 110, so that a user can press the unlock button 2221.
- the inner wall of the mounting cavity 110a forms a guide arc surface 1103 on the side where the button hole 1101 is provided.
- the unlocking assembly 222 further includes a transmission member 2223.
- the unlocking button 2221 acts on the movable stopper 2211 through the transmission member 2223 to drive the movable stopper 2211 to move along the second tilt direction V.
- the transmission member 2223 is movably connected to the connecting inner shell 210. Driven by the unlocking button 2221 or the movable stopper 2211, the transmission member 2223 moves relative to the connecting inner shell 210.
- the connecting inner shell 210 is provided with a positioning shaft 2113 on the sliding surface 2111.
- the transmission member 2223 has a first transmission end 22231 and a second transmission end 22232 that are opposite to each other.
- the first transmission end 22231 of the transmission member 2223 is sleeved on the positioning shaft 2113 and can rotate around the positioning shaft 2113 relative to the connecting inner shell 210.
- the second transmission end 22232 of the transmission member 2223 can abut against the movable limiting member 2211 to push the movable limiting member 2211 close to the abutting member 214.
- the unlocking button 2221 has a push rod 22211, which is arranged toward the transmission member 2223. When the user presses the unlocking button 2221, the push rod 22211 of the unlocking button 2221 can push the transmission member 2223 to rotate, and the transmission member 2223 can be unlocked. The movable stopper 2211 is pushed closer to the supporting member 214.
- the push rod 22211 acts on the area of the transmission member 2223 between the first transmission end 22231 and the second transmission end 22232, so that the transmission member 2223 forms a lever.
- the displacement of the push rod 22211 along the second tilting direction V is amplified by the transmission member 2223 and then acts on the movable stopper 2211.
- the movable limiting member 2211 includes an arc transmission surface 22114.
- the second transmission end 22232 of the transmission member 2223 slides with the arc transmission surface 22114.
- the second transmission end 22232 of the transmission member 2223 acts on the arc transmission surface 22114 and pushes the movable limiting member 2211 to slide.
- the arc motion path of the second transmission end 22232 and the linear motion path of the movable limiting member 2211 are matched through the relative sliding of the second transmission end 22232 and the arc transmission surface 22114.
- the arc transmission surface 22114 allows the second transmission end 22232 and the movable limiting member 2211 to slide smoothly relative to each other, and the user has a better sense of sensation when pressing the unlock button 2221 to drive the movable limiting member 2211 to move.
- the transmission member 2223 includes a plurality of centering arms 22233.
- the transmission member 2223 has a transmission hole.
- the positioning shaft 2113 passes through the transmission hole, so that the plurality of centering arms 22233 abut the positioning shaft 2113, thereby allowing the transmission member 2223 to be rotatably connected relative to the inner shell 210 about the positioning shaft 2113.
- the plurality of centering arms 22233 are circumferentially arranged within the transmission hole, and the centering arms 22233 extend from the inner wall of the transmission hole toward the axis of the transmission hole.
- each centering arm 22233 When the positioning shaft 2113 passes through the transmission hole, the plurality of centering arms 22233 are circumferentially arranged around the outer periphery of the positioning shaft 2113, and each centering arm 22233 abuts the positioning shaft 2113.
- Each centering arm 22233 is arranged at an angle to the radial direction of the transmission hole, that is, the centering arms 22233 are arranged at an angle to the radial direction of the positioning shaft 2113.
- Each centering arm 22233 has an arcuate abutment surface 222331 for abutting the positioning shaft 2113. This arcuate abutment surface 222331 increases the contact area between the centering arm 22233 and the positioning shaft 2113, improving the stability of the transmission member 2223 and the positioning shaft 2113 when mated.
- the centering arm 22233 elastically abuts the positioning shaft 2113, exerting an elastic force on the positioning shaft 2113. This allows the transmission member 2223 to elastically return to its original position after deflecting from the positioning
- each centering arm 22233 includes a first arm segment 222332 and a second arm segment 222333.
- the first arm segment 222332 extends from the inner wall of the transmission hole approximately along the radial direction of the transmission hole.
- the second arm segment 222333 extends from the end of the first arm segment 222332 that is away from the inner wall of the transmission hole approximately along the circumferential direction of the transmission hole.
- a deformation groove can be formed between the second arm segment 222333, the first arm segment 222332 and the inner wall of the transmission hole. When the second arm segment 222333 is squeezed, it can deform in the direction of the deformation groove.
- An abutting arc surface 222331 is provided at the end of the second arm segment 222333 that is away from the first arm segment 222332, and the second arm segment 222333 abuts against the positioning shaft 2113 through the abutting arc surface 222331.
- centering arms 22233 there are three centering arms 22233.
- the three centering arms 22233 are evenly arranged around the axis of the transmission hole.
- the transmission member 2223 further includes a limiting protrusion 22234.
- the limiting protrusion 22234 is located between the first transmission end 22231 and the second transmission end 22232.
- the push rod 22211 of the unlocking button 2221 acts on the side of the limiting protrusion 22234 facing the first transmission end 22231.
- the side of the limiting protrusion 22234 facing the first transmission end 22231 has a guide arc surface 22235.
- one end of the unlocking elastic member 2222 is connected to the unlocking button 2221, and the other end is connected to the fixing post 217.
- the unlocking button 2221 presses the unlocking elastic member 2222 toward the fixing post 217, causing the unlocking elastic member 2222 to deform and store elastic potential energy.
- the unlocking elastic member 2222 releases the elastic potential energy, driving the unlocking button 2221 away from the fixing post 217, returning to the position before the button was pressed.
- the unlocking elastic member 2222 includes an elastic arm 22221 and a limiting clamp 22222. One end of the elastic arm 22221 is connected to The elastic arm 22221 is connected to the unlocking button 2221, and the other end is connected to the limiting clip 22222.
- the limiting clip 22222 abuts against the fixed post 217.
- the limiting clip 22222 can also rotate around the fixed post 217.
- the elastic arm 22221 includes a first section 22223 and a second section 22224.
- the first section 22223 extends from the unlocking button 2221 to the side of the fixed post 217 facing away from the unlocking button 2221.
- the second section 22224 extends from the end of the first section 22223 toward the fixed post 217.
- the second section 22224 is curved, which reduces stress concentration at various locations on the elastic arm 22221 when the elastic arm 22221 deforms, thereby increasing the service life of the elastic arm 22221.
- the elastic arm 22221 causes the limiting clip 22222 to tend to move toward the push rod 22211.
- the elastic arm 22221 enables the limiting clip 22222 to exert an elastic force on the fixed post 217, thereby improving the stability of the connection between the limiting clip 22222 and the fixed post 217.
- the limiting clip 22222 is roughly semicircular in shape and has a linear extension 22225 on the end closest to the unlocking button 2221.
- the limiting clip 22222 rotates around the fixed post 217.
- the end of the limiting clip 22222 closest to the unlocking button 2221 exerts greater pressure on the fixed post 217, which may cause deformation at this end of the limiting clip 22222.
- the linear extension 22225 further reduces the risk of the limiting clip 22222 deforming and separating from the fixed post 217.
- each unlocking elastic member 2222 there are two unlocking elastic members 2222.
- the two unlocking elastic members 2222 are symmetrically arranged on both sides of the unlocking button 2221.
- the elastic arm 22221 of each unlocking elastic member 2222 causes the limiting clip 22222 to have a tendency to move toward the other unlocking elastic member 2222.
- FIG13 shows a partial cross-sectional view of the beauty device 001 in one embodiment of the present application.
- connection module 200 optionally further includes an airflow connector 230.
- the airflow connector 230 includes a fixed base 231 and the aforementioned first airflow connector 232.
- the first airflow connector 232 is a tubular airflow connector.
- the fixed base 231 is fixedly connected to the first airflow connector 232.
- the first airflow connector 232 is provided with a first airway hole 232a.
- the fixing base 231 is connected to the connecting inner shell 210 .
- the connecting inner housing 210 is provided with a plurality of connecting posts 215, each of which is provided with a threaded hole.
- the fixing base 231 has a plurality of connecting through-holes. Bolts passing through the connecting through-holes and then threadedly engaging with the threaded holes of the connecting posts 215 secure the fixing base 231 and the connecting inner housing 210 relative to each other, thereby securing the first airflow connection portion 232 relative to the connecting inner housing 210.
- the three connecting columns 215 are located at the three vertices of a triangle.
- the three connecting columns 215 can be located at the three vertices of a triangle (such as an isosceles triangle) to provide relatively uniform support force.
- the fixed base 231 is roughly triangular.
- the fixed base 231 is provided with a connecting through hole at each corner of the triangle to correspond to each connecting column 215.
- the fixed base 231 and the connecting inner shell 210 are connected by three bolts to improve the stability of the connection between the fixed base 231 and the connecting inner shell 210.
- the first airflow connection part 232 is located between the three connecting through holes on the fixed base 231.
- the external force can be transmitted roughly evenly to the bolts corresponding to the three connecting through holes through the fixed base 231.
- Each bolt limits the movement of the airflow connector 230 relative to the connecting inner shell 210, so that the relative position relationship between the airflow connector 230 and the connecting inner shell 210 can remain stable.
- the airflow connection member 230 further includes a reinforcing rib 233 , which connects the fixed base 231 and the first airflow connection portion 232 to improve the stability of the first airflow connection portion 232 .
- the connecting inner shell 210 is provided with an airflow connection hole 2101
- the first airflow connection portion 232 is an airflow connection tube, which is exposed from the first assembly surface 212b to the main body 010 through the airflow connection hole 2101 and further extends into the assembly groove 212a, so that the first airway hole 232a extends into the assembly groove 212a.
- the beauty head 030 is installed in the assembly groove 212a, it is connected to the portion of the first airflow connection portion 232 extending into the assembly groove 212a, so that the beauty head 030 and the main body are connected.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 extends along the first inclined direction U.
- the airflow connector 230 further includes a sealing ring 234.
- the sealing ring 234 is disposed around the outer periphery of the first airflow connector 232.
- the sealing ring 234 fills the gap between the grooming head 030 and the outer periphery of the first airflow connector 232, improving airtightness and thereby ensuring or enhancing air extraction efficiency.
- sealing rings 234 there are two sealing rings 234 , and the two sealing rings 234 are spaced apart along the extending direction of the first airflow connection portion 232 , thereby enhancing the sealing effect.
- the sealing ring 234 is mounted on the portion of the first airflow connection portion 232 located within the assembly groove 212a.
- the portion of the first airflow connection portion 232 located within the assembly groove 212a is provided with two annular grooves 2321.
- the sealing ring 234 is partially accommodated within the annular grooves 2321 and protrudes beyond the annular grooves 2321 to fill the gap between the beauty head 030 and the outer periphery of the first airflow connection portion 232.
- the movable limiting member 2211 is provided with a clearance hole 2211a.
- the size of the clearance hole 2211a is larger than the size of the first airflow connection portion 232.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 extends into the assembly groove 212a after passing through the clearance hole 2211a and the airflow connection hole 2101.
- the clearance hole 2211a also moves along the second inclined direction V.
- the size of the clearance hole 2211a is larger than the size of the first airflow connection portion 232, which can prevent the movable limiting member 22111 from touching the first airflow connection portion 232 when sliding.
- the connecting inner shell 210 further includes an exhaust port 216.
- the exhaust port 216 corresponds to the clearance hole 2211a.
- an exhaust channel is formed between the beauty head 030 and the connecting inner shell 210, and the exhaust channel is connected to the exhaust port 216.
- an exhaust channel is formed between the second assembly surface 412a and the first assembly surface 212b.
- the exhaust channel is connected to the airflow driving member to exhaust the gas driven by the airflow driving member.
- the beauty instrument 001 is exhausting, the gas can be discharged through the path from the exhaust port 216 to the exhaust channel.
- the exhaust port 216 in the connecting inner shell 210, the end of the airflow driving member with the inlet and outlet can be arranged toward the beauty head 030, thereby simplifying the air path design.
- the exhaust port 216 protrudes from the sliding surface 2111 to facilitate connection to an exhaust duct.
- the size of the clearance hole 2211a is larger than the combined size of the first airflow connection portion 232 and the exhaust port 216. This prevents the movable stopper 2211 from contacting the first airflow connection portion 232 or the exhaust port 216 during sliding.
- An exhaust gap 212c is formed between the outer periphery of the beauty head 030 and the sidewall of the assembly groove 212a. This gap 212c is connected to the exhaust channel, allowing gas to flow through the exhaust channel to the exhaust gap 212c and then exit the beauty instrument 001 through the exhaust gap 212c.
- the exhaust gap 212c can be formed by providing a groove on the outer periphery of the mounting shell 410 of the beauty head 030, so that after the beauty head 030 is installed in the assembly groove 212a, the inner wall of the assembly groove 212a and the groove on the outer periphery of the mounting shell 410 form the exhaust gap 212c.
- the exhaust gap 212c is connected to the exhaust channel, allowing gas to be discharged from the beauty device 001.
- the exhaust gap 212c can also be formed by providing a groove on the inner wall of the assembly groove 212a, so that after the beauty head 030 is installed in the assembly groove 212a, the groove on the inner wall of the assembly groove 212a and the outer periphery of the mounting shell 410 form the exhaust gap 212c.
- the exhaust gap 212c is connected to the exhaust channel, allowing gas to be discharged from the beauty device 001.
- the exhaust gap 212c is formed between the beauty head 030 and the assembly groove 212a, so that when the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 are disassembled, the exhaust gap 212c can be cleaned by cleaning the outer periphery of the beauty head 030 and the inner wall of the assembly groove 212a.
- the exhaust port 216 includes a first hole segment 2161 and a second hole segment 2162 arranged in sequence.
- the first hole segment 2161 and the second hole segment 2162 are continuous and connected along the first inclined direction U.
- the end of the first hole segment 2161 facing away from the second hole segment 2162 is exposed from the first assembly surface 212b.
- the cross-sectional area of the first hole segment 2161 is larger than the cross-sectional area of the second hole segment 2162.
- the first hole segment 2161 is connected to the second hole segment 2162 in a continuous manner and is connected to the first inclined direction U.
- the section 2161 has a larger cross-sectional area to facilitate connection to the air guide 4124 of the beauty head 030.
- the second hole section 2162 has a smaller cross-sectional area to be exposed in the accommodating cavity 100a to connect to the pipeline and further communicate with the air flow driving member.
- the exhaust port 216 may not be divided into the first hole segment 2161 and the second hole segment 2162 , so that the exhaust port 216 as a whole is cylindrical, flared or other shapes, and the exhaust port 216 can also be connected to the airflow driving member and the air guide member 4124 .
- the location of the exhaust port 216 is not limited to being connected to the inner shell 210, that is, the main body 010 is provided with an exhaust port 216 for exhaust, such as being located at the tail.
- exhaust can also be performed through the assembly gap of the main body 010 , for example, through the assembly gap between the first half shell and the second half shell.
- FIG14 shows a schematic structural diagram of the head shell 110 and the connection module 200 in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the connection module 200 includes a main circuit board 250 .
- connection module 200 also includes a first electrical connector 240 and a main circuit board 250.
- the main circuit board 250 and the connection inner shell 210 are spaced apart along the first inclined direction U.
- the connection inner shell 210 is provided with a fixing column 217, which extends from the sliding surface 2111 along the first inclined direction U.
- the fixing column 217 is provided with a threaded hole.
- a fixing through-hole 251 is provided on the main circuit board 250 at a position corresponding to the fixing column 217.
- the main circuit board 250 is electrically connected to the main control board 310.
- the main circuit board 250 and the main control board 310 can be electrically connected via a flexible wire.
- the flexible wire is disposed within the accommodating cavity 100a and is protected by the outer shell 100. When the user uses the beauty instrument 001, the flexible wire is not easily displaced by external forces, and the electrical connection between the main circuit board 250 and the main control board 310 can be maintained.
- first electrical connector 240 may also be an integrally formed conductor, such as a metal rod.
- the connecting inner housing 210 is further provided with an electrical connection hole 218.
- One end of the first electrical connector 240 is connected to the main circuit board 250, while the other end passes through the electrical connection hole 218, emerging from the main body 010 through the first assembly surface 212b and further extending into the assembly slot 212a.
- the grooming head 030 when installed in the assembly slot 212a, it can contact the first electrical connector 240 installed in the assembly slot 212a.
- the main circuit board 250 to mount the first electrical connector 240, the first electrical connector 240 is easily installed and secured, allowing the first electrical connector 240 to be exposed from the main body 010.
- first electrical connectors 240 there are multiple first electrical connectors 240.
- the beauty head 030 contacts the multiple first electrical connectors 240 at least some of the first electrical connectors 240 are electrically connected to the beauty head 030, thereby electrically connecting the beauty head 030 to the main body 010.
- the main body 010 can provide power to the beauty head 030 and control its operation.
- the number of the second electrical connectors 470 is set to be multiple, so as to correspond one-to-one with the first electrical connectors 240 .
- first electrical connectors 240 there are multiple first electrical connectors 240, for example, ten.
- the multiple first electrical connectors 240 are divided into two groups, for example, five first electrical connectors 240 form one group, and the two groups of first electrical connectors 240 are respectively located on both sides of the movable limiter 2211.
- the main circuit board 250 is provided with a through hole 252 between the two groups of first electrical connectors 240.
- An airflow connection portion 232 and the exhaust port 216 are exposed from the through hole 252 to facilitate assembly of the first airflow connection portion 232 and the exhaust port 216 with other airway components.
- the first electrical connector 240 and/or the second electrical connector 470 is a PIN, which can facilitate maintaining electrical connection with the beauty head 030.
- the PIN pin configured as the first electrical connector 240 is referred to as the "electrical connection PIN pin”
- the PIN pin corresponding to the second electrical connector 470 is referred to as the "electrical control PIN pin”.
- the first electrical connector 240 includes a fixed needle segment 241 and a resiliently movable needle segment 242.
- the fixed needle segment 241 and the resiliently movable needle segment 242 slidably and elastically cooperate to adjust the size of the first electrical connector 240 along the first tilting direction U.
- the fixed needle segment 241 is connected to the main circuit board 250, and the resiliently movable needle segment 242 is installed into the assembly slot 212a through the electrical connection hole 218.
- the beauty head 030 is installed into the assembly slot 212a and contacts the resiliently movable needle segment 242
- the resiliently movable needle segment 242 is squeezed, causing the size of the first electrical connector 240 to decrease along the first tilting direction U.
- each first electrical connector 240 By adjusting the amount of expansion and contraction of each first electrical connector 240 along the first tilting direction U, the tolerance between the beauty head 030 and the main circuit board 250 is adjusted, thereby ensuring that each first electrical connector 240 maintains a stable connection with the beauty head 030.
- the end of the elastic movable needle segment 242 facing away from the fixed needle segment 241 forms a first electrical contact, and the first electrical contact is used to cooperate with the beauty head 030 to achieve electrical connection with the beauty head 030.
- Figure 15 shows a schematic structural diagram of a beauty head 030 in one embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 16 shows a schematic structural diagram of a housing 411 of a beauty head 030 in one embodiment of the present application.
- the grooming head 030 includes a mounting housing 410.
- the mounting housing 410 has a negative pressure end 410a and a connecting end 410b that oppose each other.
- the mounting housing 410 is provided with a negative pressure groove 4111 at the negative pressure end 410a.
- the connecting end 410b of the mounting housing 410 is designed to fit into the assembly groove 212a for connection to the main body 010.
- the mounting housing 410 also has a second airflow connection portion 4114 that communicates with the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the mounting housing 410 is designed to be removably connected to the main body 010.
- the negative pressure groove 4111 and the second assembly surface 412 a are respectively located on two opposite sides of the mounting shell 410 .
- the mounting housing 410 includes a housing 411 and a cover 412.
- the housing 411 forms an opening in a receiving cavity 4112 at the connection end 410b, and the cover 412 is mounted on the opening.
- the cover 412 is connected to the housing 411 to cover the opening of the receiving cavity 4112.
- the surface of the cover 412 facing away from the housing 411 forms a second assembly surface 412a.
- the second assembly surface 412 a is disposed on the outer side of the cover 412 , and the second electrical connector 470 is mounted on the cover 412 and exposed from the cover 412 .
- the second airflow connection portion 4114 extends from the negative pressure substrate 41101 toward the cover 412 and is exposed from the cover 412 .
- negative pressure tank 4111 is more likely to absorb dirt after the device 001 is finished operating.
- the beauty head 030 can be removed and only cleaned, making cleaning the negative pressure tank 4111 more convenient.
- the housing 411 includes a negative pressure substrate 41101, a negative pressure enclosure 41102, and a receiving enclosure 41103.
- the negative pressure enclosure 41102 is disposed on one side of the negative pressure substrate 41101 and protrudes from the negative pressure substrate 41101, such that the negative pressure enclosure 41102 and the negative pressure substrate 41101 together form a negative pressure groove 4111.
- the RF electrode 420 is disposed on the negative pressure enclosure 41102 and/or the negative pressure substrate 41101.
- the receiving panel 41103 is disposed on the side of the negative pressure base plate 41101 facing away from the negative pressure panel 41102.
- the receiving panel 41103 protrudes from the negative pressure base plate 41101, so that the negative pressure base plate 41101 and the receiving panel 41103 together form an open receiving cavity 4112.
- the cover 412 is mounted on the open portion of the receiving cavity 4112.
- the receiving cavity 4112 is capable of accommodating the head circuit board 460. In this manner, the housing 411 can be manufactured by integral injection molding, simplifying assembly.
- the dimensions of the containment panel 41103 are larger than those of the negative pressure panel 41102.
- the projection of the negative pressure panel 41102 lies within the projection of the containment panel 41103
- the projection of the negative pressure tank 4111 lies within the projection of the containment cavity 4112. This allows the containment panel 41103 to be stably installed in the assembly slot 212a when installed.
- the negative pressure tank 4111 has a relatively small coverage area, thereby improving the suction and release efficiency of the negative pressure tank 4111, enabling it to quickly generate negative pressure to absorb the skin and quickly inflate the negative pressure tank 4111 to release the skin's suction.
- the housing 411 is provided with a first mating post 4113 within the accommodating cavity 4112
- the cover 412 is provided with a first mating hole 4121.
- a bolt passes through the first mating hole 4121 and threadedly engages with the first mating post 4113, thereby connecting the housing 411 and the cover 412.
- the first mating hole 4121 may be a countersunk hole to accommodate the bolt head, thereby maintaining a substantially flat surface of the cover 412 facing away from the housing 411.
- the housing 411 has a second airflow connection portion 4114, and the cover 412 is provided with a negative pressure hole 4122.
- the second airflow connection portion 4114 is a negative pressure conduit provided on the negative pressure substrate 41101.
- the second airflow connection portion 4114 extends from the bottom of the negative pressure groove 4111 toward the cover 412 and connects to the negative pressure hole 4122, so as to be exposed from the second assembly surface 412a.
- the negative pressure duct has a second airway hole 411a.
- the second airflow connection portion 4114 is configured to be detachably connected to the first airflow connection portion 232, thereby communicating with the second airflow connection portion 4114.
- the mating orientation of the first and second airflow connection portions 232, 4114 can match the mating orientation of the beauty head 030 and the main body 010. That is, the first and second airflow connection portions 232, 4114 mate in the detachment direction, thereby communicating with each other when the beauty head 030 is connected to the main body 010.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 in the assembly slot 212a is inserted into the second airflow connection portion 4114 through the negative pressure hole 4122, thereby communicating with the second airflow connection portion 4114. That is, the first airflow connection portion 232 is provided at the bottom of the assembly groove 212a and protrudes from the first assembly surface 212b so as to be inserted into the second airflow connection portion 4114 and communicate with the second airflow connection portion 4114.
- the air in the negative pressure groove 4111 can be drawn away by the first airflow connection portion 232 through the second airflow connection portion 4114, thereby forming a negative pressure in the negative pressure groove 4111, so that the user's skin is drawn into the negative pressure groove 4111 under the action of the negative pressure.
- the RF electrode 420 of the beauty head 030 releases RF current to the skin drawn into the negative pressure tank 4111, allowing the RF electrode 420 to act deeper into the skin. Furthermore, the area of skin contacting the RF electrode 420 is increased, allowing the RF electrode 420 to deliver RF current to a wider area of skin, thereby improving the efficiency of the RF current beauty treatment.
- first airflow connection portion 232 can also be configured as a negative pressure conduit, where the first airflow connection portion 232 does not extend beyond the mounting slot 212a.
- the second airflow connection portion 4114 can also be configured as an airflow connection tube, where the second airflow connection portion 4114 extends beyond the housing 411.
- the grooming head 030 includes a breathable member 413 for preventing contamination and allowing ventilation.
- the breathable member 413 is disposed within the second airflow connection portion 4114. This allows air to pass through while preventing liquids, perspiration, gels, and other debris from entering and contaminating the air path within the main body 010.
- the first airflow connection part 232 is inserted into the second airflow connection part 4114 to form an airflow channel, so that the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 are connected.
- the first airflow connection part 232 is inserted into the second airflow connection part 4114, the first airway hole 232a is connected to the second airway hole 411a.
- the air permeable member 413 is located at the entrance of the first airflow connection part 232.
- the first airflow connection part 232 sucks the gas in the negative pressure tank 4111 through the second airflow connection part 4114, the negative pressure
- the gas within the groove 4111 first passes through the breathable member 413 before entering the first airflow connection portion 232.
- the breathable member 413 may include breathable cotton, which both facilitates gas circulation and filters the circulating gas. Furthermore, the breathable cotton is easy to replace at low cost.
- the breathable member 413 may further include a waterproof breathable membrane, which can reduce the probability of water vapor flowing through the breathable cotton and entering the main body 010.
- the waterproof breathable membrane can be made of Teflon and is provided on the surface of the breathable cotton, thereby reducing the probability of water vapor entering the breathable cotton through the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the ventilation area of the connection channel of the second airflow connection portion 4114 near the first airflow connection portion 232 is smaller than the notch area of the negative pressure groove 4111. This makes the air flow speed at the notch of the negative pressure groove 4111 slower, reducing the irritation of the airflow to the skin.
- the housing 411 is further provided with an anti-blocking groove 4115 on the bottom wall of the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the anti-blocking groove 4115 is located on the outside of the second airflow connection part 4114, and the anti-blocking groove 4115 is connected to the second airflow connection part 4114.
- the second airflow connection part 4114 may be blocked by the user's skin.
- the user's skin is tough and difficult to produce severe deformation locally, so it is difficult to completely block the anti-blocking groove 4115, which is smaller than the second airflow connection part 4114.
- the second airflow connection part 4114 can continue to generate negative pressure in the negative pressure groove 4111 through the anti-blocking groove 4115.
- the airflow duct further includes a filter tank disposed at the bottom of the negative pressure tank 4111 and connected thereto.
- the filter tank is connected to the inlet of the first airflow connection portion 232.
- a breathable member 413 is disposed within the filter tank to restrict the entry of impurities into the airflow duct; the filter tank is connected to the anti-blocking slot 4115. Placing the filter tank at the bottom of the negative pressure tank 4111 facilitates full utilization of the notch of the negative pressure tank 4111 during air suction, thereby improving suction efficiency.
- the breathable member 413 disposed within the filter tank reduces the possibility of impurities entering the airflow duct, thereby reducing the chance of duct blockage or bacterial growth.
- Figure 17 shows a schematic structural diagram of a beauty head 030 in one embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 18 shows a schematic structural diagram of a housing 411 of a beauty head 030 in one embodiment of the present application.
- the cover 412 is provided with a latching portion 4123.
- the latching portion 4123 protrudes from the side of the cover 412 facing away from the housing 411.
- a latching slot 41231 is provided on one side of the latching portion 4123.
- the beauty head 030 also includes a radio frequency electrode 420.
- the mounting shell 410 has a skin-contacting surface 410c for contacting the user's face.
- the radio frequency electrode 420 is exposed on the skin-contacting surface 410c.
- a negative pressure groove 4111 is provided on the skin-contacting surface 410c.
- Multiple radio frequency electrodes 420 are provided around the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the skin-contacting surface 410c is provided at the negative pressure end 410a.
- the radio frequency electrode 420 is connected to the shell 411. When the beauty head 030 contacts the user's skin, the radio frequency electrode 420 can emit radio frequency current to the user's skin, thereby achieving a beauty effect.
- the radio frequency electrode 420 is provided on the inner wall of the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the negative pressure generated in the negative pressure groove 4111 causes the user's skin to deform and contact the radio frequency electrode 420.
- the radio frequency current is then emitted by the radio frequency electrode 420 to beautify the user's skin.
- the radio frequency current can penetrate the skin absorbed into the negative pressure groove 4111, thereby increasing the injection depth of the radio frequency energy and improving the cosmetic effect.
- the notch of the negative pressure groove 4111 forms an adsorption port, which is used to fit the skin so that the negative pressure groove 4111 negatively adsorbs the skin; the direction of the adsorption port is inclined to the extension direction of the shell 100, and the radio frequency electrode 420 is arranged at the adsorption port.
- the radio frequency electrode 420 is arranged at the adsorption port, including the radio frequency electrode 420 being arranged inside the negative pressure groove 4111 and close to the notch, and the radio frequency electrode 420 being arranged outside the negative pressure groove 4111 and close to the notch. In this way, by making the radio frequency electrode 420 is located at the adsorption port, which can reduce the radio frequency path and improve the beauty effect.
- the RF electrode 420 can also be set at a distance outside the adsorption port to release RF current to the skin that is not adsorbed, so that the RF current can flow deeper under the skin and improve the cosmetic effect.
- the housing 411 is provided with a mounting notch 4101 within the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the RF electrode 420 is disposed within the mounting notch 4101 so that, after the RF electrode 420 and the housing 411 are connected, a smooth transition occurs between the surface of the RF electrode 420 and the inner wall of the negative pressure groove 4111. It is understood that the RF electrode 420 can be at least partially disposed within the negative pressure groove 4111, allowing the RF electrode 420 to release RF current to the skin to which it is attached, or the RF electrode 420 can be completely disposed outside the negative pressure groove 4111, such that the RF electrode 420 is located on the outer periphery of the negative pressure groove 4111, thereby releasing RF current to the skin in contact.
- the RF electrode 420 can be partially disposed within the negative pressure groove 4111, so that the RF electrode 420 can release RF current to the skin absorbed by the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the RF electrode 420 can also be completely disposed outside the negative pressure groove 4111, so that the RF electrode 420 is located at the end of the housing 411. When the user's skin contacts the RF electrode 420, the RF current is released to the skin between the paired RF electrodes 420.
- the RF electrode 420 has opposing bottom ends 421, top ends 422, and a skin-contacting side surface connecting the top ends 422 and bottom ends 421.
- the bottom end 421 of the RF electrode 420 faces the bottom wall of the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the top end 422 of the RF electrode 420 abuts the user's skin.
- the top end 422 of the RF electrode 420 has a working curved surface 423, and/or the connection between the skin-contacting side surface and the top end 422 forms the working curved surface 423.
- the working curved surface 423 has a bending axis that is substantially perpendicular to the first inclination direction U.
- the skin When the user's skin is subjected to negative pressure, the skin, which is sucked into the negative pressure groove 4111 by the negative pressure, deforms due to the support of the working curved surface 423. This allows the skin to deform in accordance with its deformation characteristics, thereby improving user comfort and increasing the contact area between the RF electrode 420 and the user's skin, thereby improving beauty treatment efficiency and enhancing beauty results.
- the RF electrode 420 has a thickness.
- the thickness of the RF electrode 420 is the dimension from the side of the RF electrode 420 facing the center of the negative pressure groove 4111 to the side of the RF electrode 420 away from the center of the negative pressure groove 4111.
- the thickness of the RF electrode 420 can be 2 to 5 mm.
- the arc diameter of the working arc surface 423 can be 2 to 5 mm.
- Increasing the thickness of the RF electrode 420 can reduce the power loss of the RF electrode 420 from the bottom end 421 to the top end 422, while increasing the curvature of the working arc surface 423, thereby increasing the contact area between the RF electrode 420 and the user's skin. Reducing the thickness of the RF electrode 420 can reduce the cost of the RF electrode 420 and improve the energy concentration of the RF current of the RF electrode 420.
- the beauty head 030 also includes a first temperature sensor 430.
- the first temperature sensor 430 is used to sense the temperature of the RF electrode 420.
- the first temperature sensor 430 contacts the RF electrode 420 to sense its temperature.
- the beauty device 001 can alert the user, reduce the RF current energy, or even directly terminate the RF current flowing through the RF electrode 420, thereby reducing the risk of burns from the RF electrode 420.
- heat transfer occurs between the skin and the electrode, causing the temperature of the skin to roughly match that of the electrode.
- the first temperature sensor 430 can also reflect the current temperature of the skin in contact with the RF electrode 420, serving as a reference for adjusting the RF power of the RF electrode 420.
- the first temperature sensor 430 can be an NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient) sensor.
- the resistance of an NTC thermistor decreases rapidly as the temperature rises under a limited measurement power.
- the corresponding temperature can be determined by measuring the resistance of the NTC thermistor, thereby achieving the purpose of temperature detection.
- the two RF electrodes 420 there are two RF electrodes 420.
- the two RF electrodes 420 are arranged opposite to each other, and the second airflow connection portion 4114 is located between the two RF electrodes 420.
- the inner wall of the negative pressure tank 4111 between the two RF electrodes 420 is curved, giving the negative pressure tank 4111, which houses the two RF electrodes 420, a roughly runway-shaped configuration.
- the inner wall of the negative pressure tank 4111 between the two RF electrodes 420 also has an inner chamfer.
- the skin drawn into the negative pressure tank 4111, deforms due to the support provided by the inner chamfer. This ensures that the skin deformation conforms to its own characteristics, thereby enhancing user comfort.
- the distance between the two RF electrodes 420 is greater than or equal to 8 mm and less than or equal to 20 mm. This not only helps to take into account the size of the negative pressure tank 4111, so that an appropriate area of skin can be drawn into the negative pressure tank 4111, but also ensures sufficient RF distance, thereby improving the efficiency of RF current stimulation of the skin while reducing the possibility of excessive skin temperature caused by excessive concentration of RF energy, thereby reducing the risk of burns to the user.
- the distance between the two RF electrodes 420 is any one of 9 mm, 10 mm, 11 mm, 12 mm, 13 mm, 14 mm, 15 mm, 16 mm, 17 mm, 18 mm, and 19 mm. This not only helps to take into account the size of the negative pressure tank 4111, so that an appropriate area of skin can be drawn into the negative pressure tank 4111, but also ensures sufficient RF distance, thereby improving the efficiency of RF current stimulation of the skin while reducing the possibility of excessive skin temperature caused by excessive concentration of RF energy, thereby reducing the risk of burns to the user.
- the distance between the two RF electrodes 420 is greater than or equal to 10 mm and less than or equal to 15 mm.
- FIG19 shows a schematic structural diagram of a beauty head 030 in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the number of radio frequency electrodes 420 is four.
- the negative pressure groove 4111 has four sidewalls, each corresponding to one of the four RF electrodes 420.
- a partition surface 41111 is formed between two adjacent sidewalls.
- the partition surface 41111 is also located between two adjacent RF electrodes 420.
- the partition surface 41111 can be flat or curved. When the partition surface 41111 is flat, the angle between the partition surface 41111 and any adjacent RF electrode 420 is greater than 100°.
- the negative pressure groove 4111 has a first dimension along the second inclined direction V and a second dimension along the third direction Z. The first dimension is greater than the second dimension.
- the angle between two RF electrodes 420 spaced apart along the second inclined direction V and the adjacent partition surface 41111 is between 100 and 120°.
- the angle between the two RF electrodes 420 spaced apart along the second inclined direction V and the adjacent spacing surfaces 41111 is 105°, 110°, or 115°.
- the angle between the two RF electrodes 420 spaced apart along the second direction Y and the adjacent spacing surfaces 41111 is between 150 and 170°.
- the angle between the two RF electrodes 420 spaced apart along the second direction Y and the adjacent spacing surfaces 41111 is 155°, 160°, or 165°.
- the spacing surface 41111 can also be a curved surface, with the angle between the section of the curved surface approximately adjacent to one end of any RF electrode 420 and the corresponding RF electrode 420 being greater than 100°. This ensures that the transition between the spacing surface 41111 and any RF electrode 420 is substantially flat.
- the contour of the portion deformed by the negative pressure roughly matches the contour of the negative pressure groove 4111, thereby improving user comfort.
- the RF electrode 420 is at least partially arranged on the side wall of the negative pressure groove 4111, and the RF electrode 420 forms a plurality of RF zones in the circumferential direction of the negative pressure groove 4111. Adjacent RF zones have a spacing surface 41111, and the spacing surface 41111 is inclined to the bottom of the negative pressure groove 4111, and/or adjacent RF zones are smoothly transitioned through the spacing surface 41111.
- the RF electrode 420 can be entirely disposed on the side wall of the negative pressure groove 4111, or part of the RF electrode 420 can be disposed on the side surface of the periphery of the negative pressure groove 4111 (i.e., the skin-contacting surface 410c) and part of the RF electrode 420 can be disposed on the side wall of the negative pressure groove 4111. This allows the RF electrode 420 to emit more energy into the skin sucked into the negative pressure groove 4111, and can make the RF path shorter.
- Multiple RF electrodes 420 are provided, forming multiple RF zones around the negative pressure tank 4111. It is understood that the RF electrodes 420 can be arranged in a sheet-like configuration, distributed in a dotted pattern, or configured in other configurations. When the RF electrodes 420 are arranged in a sheet-like configuration, each RF electrode 420 forms a RF zone; when the RF electrodes 420 are arranged in a dotted pattern, several dotted RF electrodes 420 distributed together form a RF zone. The RF zone has a RF surface.
- the side walls of the negative pressure groove 4111 between adjacent radio frequency zones form a partition surface 41111.
- the partition surface 41111 Through the inclined setting of the partition surface 41111 and the bottom of the negative pressure groove 4111, when the user's skin is subjected to negative pressure adsorption, the skin adsorbed into the negative pressure groove 4111 by the negative pressure is deformed according to the support of the partition surface 41111, so that the deformation of the skin can conform to the skin deformation characteristics, thereby improving the user's comfort.
- the bottom of the negative pressure groove 4111 of the RF surface of the RF zone can also be set at an angle, and the adjacent RF zones can be smoothly transitioned through the spacing surface 41111.
- this type of negative pressure groove 4111 has multiple side walls, and some of the side walls can be set as RF side walls, that is, the negative pressure groove 4111 has multiple RF side walls, and each RF side wall is provided with an RF electrode 420, and the RF electrode 420 and the side wall where it is located form a RF surface; it can be understood that when the RF electrode 420 is installed on the RF side wall, the side of the RF electrode 420 or the side of the RF electrode 420 and the RF side wall together can form a RF surface.
- the side wall located between two adjacent RF side walls forms a partition surface 41111 that divides the two RF surfaces.
- the negative pressure groove 4111 also has a partition surface 41111 located between two adjacent side walls.
- the angle between the RF surface and the partition surface is greater than 100°; and/or the partition surface 41111 and the bottom of the negative pressure groove 4111 are arranged in an inclined shape; and/or the RF surface and the bottom of the negative pressure groove 4111 are arranged in an inclined shape.
- the negative pressure tank 4111 is designed to be roughly square, allowing for four RF electrodes 420 to be distributed along the four sides of the negative pressure tank 4111, with spacing surfaces 41111 formed at the four corners. In another embodiment, the negative pressure tank 4111 is designed to be roughly square, allowing for two RF electrodes 420 to be distributed along two opposing sides of the negative pressure tank 4111, with the other two sides forming spacing surfaces 41111.
- multiple RF electrodes 420 can be arranged in a ring shape, and multiple RF electrodes 420 arranged in a ring shape form multiple electrode groups.
- the main control board 310 is used to control the multiple electrode groups to work in sequence according to a preset working order, and the stimulation ranges of the multiple electrode groups are cross-distributed.
- electrode group refers to an electrode combination comprising at least one positive electrode and one negative electrode.
- this may include one positive electrode and one negative electrode, one positive electrode and multiple negative electrodes, or multiple positive electrodes and one negative electrode.
- radiofrequency energy is emitted from the positive electrode and passes through the skin toward the negative electrode.
- the area through which the radiofrequency energy flows is the stimulation range of the electrode group.
- the multiple electrode groups working in sequence according to the preset working order can include the following three forms: 1 The working time of the two pairs of electrodes working adjacently overlaps partially, that is, the previous electrode group starts working first, and when its work is not completed, the next electrode group starts working, and it continues to work for a period of time after the previous electrode group finishes working, such as the previous electrode group works in the 0-3 seconds, and the next pair of electrodes works in the 2.5-6 seconds; 2 The working time of the two pairs of electrodes working adjacently is postponed, that is, the main control board 310 is used to control the multiple electrode groups to work alternately in the preset working order.
- the previous electrode group starts working first, and when its work is completed, the next electrode group starts working immediately and works for a period of time, such as the previous electrode group works from 0 to 3 seconds, and the next pair of electrodes works from 3 to 6 seconds; 3
- There is an interval in the working time of the two adjacent pairs of electrodes that is to say, the previous electrode group starts working first, and after its work is completed, the next electrode group starts working a short time later and works for a period of time, such as the previous electrode group works from 0 to 3 seconds, and the next pair of electrodes works from 4 to 7 seconds.
- the starting time of the two pairs of electrode groups working adjacently is different, and the electrode group that starts working first stops working first, so that the working time of each pair of electrode groups can be shorter than the working time in the intersection area.
- the stimulation ranges of the multiple electrode groups are cross-distributed, which means that the stimulation ranges of different electrode groups overlap.
- four electrodes form two electrode groups, and the enclosed portion in the middle is the overlapping portion.
- the skin corresponding to the area where the stimulation ranges of multiple electrode groups overlap can be continuously electrically stimulated within one cycle, so that the skin in this area is always heated, making it equivalent to the skin temperature corresponding to the radio frequency electrode 420, thereby improving the balance of beauty and enhancing the user experience.
- the skin can be first sucked into the negative pressure tank 4111, and then the multiple electrode pairs can be controlled to work in sequence according to a preset working order, so as to emit radio frequency current to the skin after suction through the radio frequency electrode 420, so that the radio frequency current can penetrate the skin sucked into the negative pressure tank 4111, thereby increasing the injection depth of the radio frequency energy, thereby improving the beauty effect; and the skin sucked into the negative pressure tank 4111 can be continuously electrically stimulated, so as to achieve both increased radio frequency depth and improved radio frequency uniformity.
- every two opposing RF electrodes 420 form an electrode group.
- two RF electrodes 420 spaced apart along the second oblique direction V form a first electrode group.
- Two RF electrodes 420 spaced apart along the second direction Y form a second electrode group.
- the main body 010 and the beauty head 030 are electrically connected by connecting the main circuit board 250 and the head circuit board 460, enabling the main control board 310 to control the cross-RF transmission between the first and second electrode groups.
- the cross-RF of the first electrode group and the second electrode group may include three RF stages.
- the first RF stage is as follows: the first electrode group emits RF current for 0.5 seconds, the second electrode group does not emit RF current, and then enters the second RF stage.
- the second RF stage is as follows: the second electrode group emits RF current for 0.5 seconds, the first electrode group does not emit RF current, and then enters the third RF stage.
- the third RF stage is as follows: the first electrode group and the second electrode group uniformly stop emitting RF current for 0.5 seconds, and then return to the first RF stage.
- the cross-RF of the first electrode group and the second electrode group can include five RF stages.
- the first RF stage is: the first electrode group emits a RF current with gradually increasing energy for 0.5s, the second electrode group does not emit a RF current, and then enters the second RF stage.
- the second RF stage is: the first electrode group emits a RF current with gradually decreasing energy for 0.5s, the second electrode group does not emit a RF current, and then enters the third RF stage.
- the third RF stage is: the second electrode group emits a RF current with gradually increasing energy for 0.5s, the first electrode group does not emit a RF current, and then enters the fourth RF stage.
- the fourth RF stage is: the second electrode group emits a RF current with gradually decreasing energy for 0.5s, the first electrode group does not emit a RF current, and then enters the fifth RF stage.
- the fifth RF stage is: the first electrode group and the second electrode group evenly stop emitting RF current for 0.5s, and then return to the first RF stage.
- the number of RF electrodes 420 can also be other. For example, when the number of RF electrodes 420 is six, each two opposing RF electrodes 420 form an electrode group.
- the main control board 310 can control the cross-RF of each electrode group through the main circuit board 250 and the head circuit board 460 (as shown in Figure 18).
- the main control board 310 can control the periodic operation of multiple electrode groups and the periodic operation of the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the electrode groups adhere to the user's skin, and the operating cycle of the electrode groups is synchronized with the adsorption cycle of the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the main control board 310 controls the air pump 510 to draw the skin into the negative pressure tank 4111, and then controls the multiple electrode groups to operate in a preset sequence. After the multiple electrode groups have completed their operation, the skin is released. This combination of the negative pressure adsorption process and the radio frequency operation can enhance the beauty effect.
- the negative pressure tank 4111 under the regulation of the air source assembly 500, can periodically absorb and release the skin.
- the RF electrode 420 by forming different electrode groups, implements multiple RF phases.
- the interval between two adjacent RF phases can correspond exactly to the time it takes for the negative pressure tank 4111 to release the skin. This can reduce the chance that the RF electrode 420 will only act on unabsorbed skin, thereby reducing the cosmetic efficacy of the RF electrode 420.
- a time gap can exist between the skin absorption phase and the release of RF current, providing sufficient cushioning for the skin and reducing pain for the user.
- the beauty head 030 also includes a second temperature sensor 450.
- a working hole 4116 is provided on the bottom wall of the negative pressure tank 4111 in the housing 411.
- the second temperature sensor 450 is disposed within the working hole 4116.
- the second temperature sensor 450 is positioned facing the negative pressure tank 4111 and is capable of measuring the temperature of the skin installed in the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the second temperature sensor 450 is an infrared sensor that determines skin temperature by measuring infrared radiation emitted by the skin.
- the beauty head 030 includes a protective plate 451, which is a light-transmitting plate.
- the protective plate 451 is positioned on the end surface of the working hole 4116 facing the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the protective plate 451 protects the second temperature sensor 450.
- the protective plate 451 transmits infrared light, allowing the second temperature sensor 450 to detect infrared radiation from the skin.
- the protective plate 451 also restricts the flow of gas through the working hole 4116, reducing the effect of the working hole 4116 on the negative pressure within the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the protective plate 451 may be a silicon wafer, which is transparent in the infrared band, allowing infrared light to pass through the wafer. Furthermore, the silicon wafer is stable and does not react with air, which would cause it to lose its infrared transparency.
- Figure 20 shows a schematic structural diagram of the beauty head 030 in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the cover 412 is detached.
- Figure 21 shows a cross-sectional view of the beauty head 030 in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the cross-sectional view is at the location of a set of second electrical connectors 470.
- the beauty head 030 also includes a head circuit board 460, which is electrically connected to the RF electrode 420.
- the head circuit board 460 is disposed within the accommodating cavity 4112.
- the head circuit board 460 has a clearance hole 4602.
- the second airflow connection portion 4114 extends toward the cover 412, passes through the clearance hole 4602, and connects to the negative pressure port 4122.
- the head circuit board 460 also has an escape groove 461, which clears the first mating column 4113.
- the housing 411 is further provided with a second mating column 4117 in the accommodating cavity 4112, and the head circuit board 460 is provided with a second mating hole 4601.
- a bolt passes through the second mating hole 4601 and is threadedly engaged with the second mating column 4117 to connect the head circuit board 460 to the housing 411.
- connection contacts 464 are also provided with connection contacts 464 .
- connection contacts 464 may include first-type electrical contacts 462.
- the first-type electrical contacts 462 are electrically connected to the first temperature sensor 430.
- the header circuit board 460 can provide power to the first temperature sensor 430 and collect electrical signals from the first temperature sensor 430.
- the electrical connection between the first temperature sensor 430 and the first-type electrical contacts 462 can be achieved by soldering wires or by providing a flat cable.
- the connection contacts 464 may include a second type electrical contact 463.
- the second type electrical contact 463 is electrically connected to the second temperature sensor 450.
- the head circuit board 460 can provide power to the second temperature sensor 450 and can also collect electrical signals from the second temperature sensor 450.
- the electrical connection between the second temperature sensor 450 and the second type electrical contact 463 is as follows: The connection can be achieved by soldering wires or by setting up flat cables.
- connection contacts 464 may include third-type electrical contacts, and the third-type electrical contacts are electrically connected to the RF electrodes 420 by welding wires or wiring.
- connection contacts 464 may include fourth-type electrical contacts, which are used to cooperate with the internal circuit of the head circuit board 460 to identify the type of the beauty head 030 .
- the cover body 412 is provided with a connecting through hole 4126 , and the connecting through hole 4126 can be provided corresponding to the connecting contact 464 .
- the beauty head 030 also includes a head electrical connector.
- the head electrical connector is the second electrical connector 470.
- the second electrical connector 470 is a pin, which can be called an electrically controlled pin.
- One end of the second electrical connector 470 is mounted on the cover 412 and exposed from the cover 412 to form a pin point for electrical connection with the first electrical connector 240.
- the other end of the second electrical connector 470 elastically contacts or abuts the head circuit board 460 to electrically connect with the head circuit board 460.
- the second electrical connector 470 can be fixed on the one hand, and a pin point can be formed on the other hand.
- the head circuit board 460 and the other end of the second electrical connector 470 can also be elastically contacted or abutted to achieve electrical connection.
- the second electrical connector 470 includes a first needle segment 471 and a second needle segment 472, which are slidably connected.
- the first needle segment 471 contacts and mates with the connection contact 464.
- the second needle segment 472 passes through the connection through-hole 4126 to be exposed from the second assembly surface 412a through the connection through-hole 4126 to form a pin point.
- the second needle segment 472 includes a small-diameter segment 4721 and a large-diameter segment 4722.
- the small-diameter segment 4721 has a profile similar to that of the connecting hole 4126, allowing it to be installed within the connecting hole 4126 and exposed from the end of the cover 412 facing away from the housing 411.
- the large-diameter segment 4722 can abut against the cover 412, thereby limiting the second needle segment 472 from extending further through the connecting hole 4126.
- the large-diameter segment 4722 is at least partially located outside the projection of the connecting hole 4126, allowing the large-diameter segment 4722 to abut against the cover 412.
- the first needle segment 471 and the second needle segment 472 have relative elasticity. Applying an external force to the first and second needle segments 471, 472 can cause the first and second needle segments 471, 472 to slide relative to each other, thereby reducing the size of the second electrical connector 470. When the external force is removed, the first needle segment 471 and the second needle segment 472 can be moved away from each other by elastic force, thereby extending the size of the second electrical connector 470.
- the second needle segment 472 is connected to the mounting housing 410 to limit the relative position of the electrical control PIN and the mounting housing 410; for example, the second needle segment 472 is fixedly connected to the cover 412, and the fixed connection can be formed by bonding, welding, etc.
- the second electrical connector 470 may also be other structures.
- the second electrical connector 470 is a metal rod, one end of which is electrically connected to the head circuit board 460 and the other end is exposed from the cover 412 .
- the first needle segment 471 elastically abuts against the connection contacts 464 of the head circuit board 460. Even if there is a distance deviation between each connection contact 464 and the corresponding connection through-hole 4126, the second electrical connector 470 corresponding to each connection contact 464 can accommodate the deviation by automatically expanding and contracting.
- the end of the second needle segment 472 facing away from the first needle segment 471 forms a second electrical contact. This second electrical contact mates with the first electrical contact of the first electrical connector 240 to establish an electrical connection between the beauty head 030 and the connection module 200.
- the surface of the first needle segment 471 facing away from the second needle segment 472 is spherical.
- the spherical surface contacts the connection contact 464, it can be positioned approximately at the center of the connection contact 464.
- the header circuit board 460 is less likely to generate torque on the first electrical connector 240, which could cause relative sliding jamming between the first and second needle segments 471, 472.
- the ball head maintains stable contact with the connection contact 464.
- second electrical connectors 470 there are multiple second electrical connectors 470, such as being divided into two groups, e.g., ten. Each group comprises five second electrical connectors 470, with the two groups of second electrical connectors 470 being located on either side of the mounting housing 410.
- the negative pressure port 4122 is located between the two groups of second electrical connectors 470.
- the plurality of second electrical connectors 470 correspond one-to-one with the plurality of first electrical connectors 240. That is, ten second electrical connectors 470 correspond one-to-one with ten first electrical connectors 240. If each second electrical connector 470 is electrically connected to the head circuit board 460, then each first electrical connector 240 is also electrically connected to the head circuit board 460.
- the main body circuit board 250 is electrically connected to the main control board 310, thereby electrically connecting the head circuit boards 460 and the main control board 310.
- multiple second electrical connectors 470 are typically provided.
- one end of the second electrical connector 470 can be first mounted to a portion of the mounting housing 410, such as the cover 412 of the mounting housing 410.
- the second electrical connector 470 is exposed from the cover 412 to form a pin point for electrical contact with the first electrical connector 240.
- the multiple second electrical connectors 470 are electrically connected to the header circuit board 460, thereby enabling quick and accurate assembly.
- one end of the second electrical connector 470 can be integrally injection-molded with the cover 412 of the mounting housing 410, such that one end of the second electrical connector 470 is mounted to a portion of the mounting housing 410.
- the second electrical connector 470 forms a pin point electrically connected to the first electrical connector 240 exposed from the first assembly surface 212b, which can simplify the connection form and facilitate electrical connection between the first electrical connector 240 and the second electrical connector 470 during the docking process of the beauty head 030 and the main body 010.
- FIG22 shows a partial cross-sectional view of the beauty device 001 in one embodiment of the present application.
- the cover 412 may optionally be further provided with an air guide 4124 and an exhaust groove 4125.
- the air guide 4124 and exhaust groove 4125 are disposed on a surface of the cover 412 facing away from the housing 411 (i.e., the second assembly surface 412a).
- the air guide 4124 is located in the center of the cover 412, and the exhaust groove 4125 extends from the air guide 4124 toward the edge of the cover 412.
- the air guide 4124 and exhaust groove 4125 are located between the two sets of second electrical connectors 470.
- the air guide member 4124 is provided with an air guide hole 41241 on one side thereof facing the exhaust slot 4125.
- the air guide member 4124 is provided with an air guide notch on one side thereof, and the air guide notch forms the air guide hole 41241.
- the air guide member 4124 is integrally formed with the main body of the cover 412 , and the air guide notch can be formed when the air guide member 4124 is formed, which simplifies manufacturing.
- the gas guide 4124 is configured to be inserted into the exhaust port 216 and guide the gas from the exhaust port 216 into the exhaust groove 4125 .
- the air guide 4124 is inserted into the exhaust port 216.
- the side of the cover 412 facing away from the housing 411 is tightly fitted with the first assembly surface 212b, forming an exhaust channel between the exhaust groove 4125 and the first assembly surface 212b.
- the air exhausted from the exhaust port 216 is guided by the air guide 4124 into the exhaust groove 4125.
- exhaust groove 4125 The gas within exhaust groove 4125 is guided through the inner wall of exhaust groove 4125 and first assembly surface 212b, flowing to the edge of cover 412 and further out of assembly groove 212a through the gap between the side wall of housing 411 and the side wall of assembly groove 212a.
- Air guide 4124 is separated between exhaust groove 4125 and first airflow connection portion 232, reducing the risk of airflow flowing through first airflow connection portion 232 and preventing the airflow from affecting the negative pressure effect of negative pressure groove 4111.
- the air guide hole 41241 can also be a through hole opened separately on one side of the air guide member 4124.
- the air guide member 4124 is cylindrical, and a through hole is turned on one side of the cylindrical air guide member 4124 to form the air guide hole. 41241.
- the provision of the air guide 4124 allows the gas to flow more smoothly into the exhaust groove 4125, which is beneficial to the circulation of the gas.
- the exhaust groove 4125 may also be provided on the first assembly surface 212b. When the first assembly surface 212b and the second assembly surface 412a are close to each other, the exhaust groove 4125 and the second assembly surface 412a form an exhaust channel.
- the size of the beauty head 030 is larger than the size of the mounting slot 212a.
- the end of the beauty head 030 facing away from the main body 010 is located outside the mounting slot 212a.
- the user's skin contacts the end of the beauty head 030 facing away from the main body 010, maintaining a distance from the head.
- the airflow drawn through the negative pressure groove 4111 can be dissipated into the environment through the gap between the head shell 110 and the skin.
- the outer shell 100 and the mounting shell 410 are assembled to form a protective shell of the beauty instrument 001.
- the outer shell 100 and the mounting shell 410 can also be integrally formed, so that the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 of the beauty device 001 are non-detachable.
- the outer shell 100 and the mounting shell 410 are integrally formed, the outer shell 100 and the mounting shell 410 together form a protective shell for the beauty device 001.
- Figure 23 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of the beauty instrument 001 in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the rear housing 120 is detached.
- Figure 24 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of the air source assembly 500 in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the gas in the negative pressure tank 4111 is sucked by the air pump 510.
- Figure 25 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of the air source assembly 500 in one embodiment of the present application, wherein the negative pressure tank 4111 is sucked through the air vent 5213.
- the main body 010 further includes an air source assembly 500.
- the air source assembly 500 connects the exhaust passage and the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the air source assembly 500 is used to draw air from the negative pressure tank 4111 to allow the negative pressure tank 4111 to adhere to the skin, or to allow air to enter the negative pressure tank 4111 to release the adhered skin.
- the control assembly is electrically connected to the air source assembly 500 for controlling the air source assembly 500.
- the air source assembly 500 includes an airflow driver.
- the airflow driver is connected to the first airflow connection portion 232 and is configured to drive airflow through the first airflow connection portion 232.
- the airflow driver is an air pump 510.
- the control assembly includes a main control board 310.
- the air pump 510 is electrically connected to the main control board 310 to be turned on and off under the control of the main control board 310.
- the air pump 510 and the air path switching module 520 are disposed within the accommodating chamber 100a.
- the air pump 510 has a pump outlet 511 and a pump inlet 512.
- the air pump 510 can inhale air through the pump inlet 512 and discharge air through the pump outlet 511.
- the pump outlet 511 is connected to the exhaust port 216.
- the pump air inlet 512 is connected to the first airflow connection portion 232 via the air path switching module 520, and further to the negative pressure tank 4111 via the second airflow connection portion 4114.
- the air pump 510 operates, drawing air from the beauty head 030 through the first airflow connection portion 232, thereby creating a negative pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111 of the beauty head 030.
- the airflow drive member may also have other structures, such as a manual pump.
- the airflow driving member has a forward air extraction mode and a reverse air supply mode.
- the airflow driving member is used to extract air from the negative pressure tank 4111 to absorb the skin into the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the airflow driving member is used to supply air into the negative pressure tank 4111 or to stop extracting air from the negative pressure tank 4111 to remove the skin from the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the user's skin can be absorbed and released by a single airflow driving member, which is simple in structure, helps simplify the structure, saves internal space of the accommodating chamber 100a, and reduces assembly difficulty.
- the main body 010 By placing the air source assembly 500 within the accommodating chamber 100a, the main body 010 itself has the structural foundation for generating negative pressure.
- the main body 010 and the beauty head 030 can be assembled and used immediately, offering greater portability compared to external, floor-standing vacuum devices.
- the air source assembly 500 can also be externally connected, fixedly connected to the housing 100 and located outside the housing 100, allowing for quick replacement.
- the air source assembly 500 also includes an air circuit switching module 520.
- the main control board 310 is connected to the air circuit switching module 520.
- the air circuit switching module 520 has an air release port 5213.
- the air circuit switching module 520 is connected between the air flow driving member and the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the air circuit switching module 520 is configured to have a negative pressure mode. In the negative pressure mode, the air circuit switching module 520 connects the air flow driving member with the negative pressure tank 4111, so that the air flow driving member extracts gas from the negative pressure tank 4111, thereby sucking the user's skin into the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the air circuit switching module 520 is also configured to have a degassing mode that connects the air release port 5213 with the negative pressure tank 4111, so that gas is delivered to the negative pressure tank 4111 through the air release port 5213 to relieve the skin.
- the main control board 310 controls the air circuit switching module 520 to switch between the negative pressure mode and the degassing mode. In this way, the skin can be sucked and released by the negative pressure tank 4111 by controlling the air circuit switching module 520 to switch between the deflation mode and the negative pressure mode.
- the air path switching module 520 includes an air valve.
- the air valve controls the flow of air through the beauty device 001.
- the air valve is used to control the connection between the negative pressure tank 4111 and the air pump 510, allowing the air pump 510 to draw air from the negative pressure tank 4111 to adhere to the skin, or to allow air to flow into the negative pressure tank 4111 to release the adhered skin.
- the air valve is a three-way valve 521.
- the three-way valve 521 can control the pump inlet 512 of the air pump 510 to communicate with the first air flow connection portion 232 and the exhaust port 216, allowing the air pump 510 to draw gas from the negative pressure tank 4111 through the first air flow connection portion 232, thereby forming a negative pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111, and exhausting the drawn gas through the exhaust port 216.
- the three-way valve 521 can also control the first air flow connection portion 232 to communicate with the deflation port 5213, and the deflation port 5213 can supply gas to the first air flow connection portion 232, thereby relieving the negative pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111 and releasing the skin that is sucked into the negative pressure tank 4111.
- gas circuit switching module 520 may also be other components, for example, the gas circuit switching module 520 is a component formed by combining a one-way valve and a two-way valve.
- the beauty device 001 When the beauty device 001 is in operation, it can cyclically generate negative pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111 to absorb the skin, and release the negative pressure to release the skin. This allows the skin to be absorbed and released intermittently, reducing the discomfort caused by long-term negative pressure absorption of the skin and improving the user experience.
- the vent 5213 can be connected to the exhaust port 216.
- ambient air can be introduced through the exhaust slot 4125.
- the vent 5213 can also be directly connected to the accommodating chamber 100a. Since the accommodating chamber 100a is not completely sealed, ambient air can also be introduced into the vent 5213 through the accommodating chamber 100a.
- the air pump 510 can be in the form of a piston pump, or a turbine pump, a vacuum pump, a vane pump, a plunger pump, a diaphragm pump, a screw pump, a peristaltic pump, etc.
- FIG26 shows a schematic structural diagram of the gas path switching module 520 in one embodiment of the present application.
- the three-way valve 521 has a first valve port 5211, a second valve port 5212 and a third valve port.
- the third valve port is an air vent 5213.
- the three-way valve 521 can control the communication between the first valve port 5211 and the second valve port 5212, or the communication between the first valve port 5211 and the air vent 5213.
- the first valve port 5211 is connected to the first airflow connection part 232.
- the second valve port 5212 is connected to the pump air inlet 512.
- the first valve port 5211 is connected to the first airflow connection part 232 via a hose or a split air duct
- the second valve port 5212 is connected to the pump air inlet 512 via a hose or a split air duct.
- the three-way valve 521 is a solenoid valve.
- the three-way valve 521 controls the first valve port 5211 to communicate with the second valve port 5212.
- the gas is discharged to the environment through the path of the negative pressure tank 4111, the first airflow connection part 232, the first valve port 5211, the second valve port 5212, the pump air inlet 512, the pump air outlet 511, the exhaust port 216, and the exhaust tank 4125, so that the negative pressure tank 4111 is Negative pressure is formed inside.
- the three-way valve 521 controls the first valve port 5211 to communicate with the air release port 5213. Gas enters the negative pressure tank 4111 through the air release port 5213, the first valve port 5211, and the first air flow connection portion 232, causing the pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111 to rise, thereby releasing or reducing the suction on the skin.
- the air circuit switching module 520 is located between the head shell 110 and the air pump 510.
- the pump inlet 512 and the pump outlet 511 of the air pump 510 are both located on the side facing the air circuit switching module 520, which facilitates the connection between the air pump 510 and the air circuit switching module 520.
- the air path switching module 520 also includes an air pressure detection element 522.
- the air pressure detection element 522 is used to detect the air pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111. Whether extracting gas from the negative pressure tank 4111 or removing the negative pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111, the negative pressure tank 4111 is connected to the first valve port 5211. By disposing the air pressure detection element 522 between the negative pressure tank 4111 and the first valve port 5211, the air pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111 can be detected. In this way, by detecting the air pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111 through the air pressure detection element 522, excessive extraction can be prevented to avoid excessive inhalation of the skin and causing pain to the user.
- the gas circuit switching module 520 also includes a mounting bracket 523.
- the mounting bracket 523 is connected to the housing 100, and the three-way valve 521 and the air pressure detector 522 are both mounted on the mounting bracket 523.
- the gas valve and other components can be first installed on the mounting bracket 523, and then installed into the accommodating cavity 4112 through the mounting bracket 523, thereby improving installation efficiency and facilitating the fixing of the gas valve and other components.
- a limiting hole 5231 is provided on the mounting bracket 523.
- the housing 100 is provided with a first pre-fixing portion within the accommodating cavity 100a.
- the first pre-fixing portion includes a limiting post 1303.
- the mounting bracket 523 also includes a limiting bolt (not shown). After the limiting bolt passes through the limiting hole 5231, it is threadedly connected to the limiting post 1303, thereby connecting the mounting bracket 523 to the housing 100.
- the limiting post 1303 is provided on the front shell 130.
- the mounting frame 523 is provided with a valve installation cavity, wherein the valve installation cavity includes a first groove body 5232 , and the three-way valve 521 is accommodated in the first groove body 5232 .
- the opening of the first groove body 5232 is set toward the front shell 130.
- the front shell 130 blocks the opening of the first groove body 5232, so that the front shell 130 abuts the three-way valve 521 to limit the three-way valve 521 from moving away from the first groove body 5232.
- the mounting frame 523 is provided with a first escape notch 5233 on the sidewall of the first trough 5232.
- the first escape notch 5233 forms a gas relief opening, through which the gas relief port 5213 of the three-way valve 521 is led out of the first trough 5232.
- gas inside or outside the housing 411 can be easily drawn into the gas relief port 5213.
- the volume of the first trough 5232 can be reduced, thereby reducing the size of the mounting frame 523.
- a side wall of the first avoidance gap 5233 provided in the first groove body 5232 abuts against the three-way valve 521 to limit the movement of the three-way valve 521 along the first direction X relative to the mounting bracket 523 .
- first avoidance gap 5233 is communicated with the opening of the first groove body 5232 to facilitate the installation of the air valve.
- the mounting bracket 523 is provided with a second pre-fixing portion.
- the second pre-fixing portion includes a positioning groove 5234.
- the limiting hole 5231 is provided on the bottom wall of the positioning groove 5234.
- the limiting column 1303 can be installed into the positioning groove 5234 and abut against the side wall of the positioning groove 5234.
- the front shell 130 is provided with two limiting columns 1303. When the mounting bracket 523 is assembled with the outer shell 100, the mounting bracket 523 is arranged between the two limiting columns 1303. When assembling the mounting bracket 523 to the outer shell 100, the front shell 130 and the mounting bracket 523 can be relatively close to each other so that the limiting column 1303 is inserted into the positioning groove 5234.
- the two limiting columns 1303 are both abutted against the side walls of the corresponding positioning groove 5234, preliminarily limiting the relative position of the mounting bracket 523 and the front shell 130. Then pass the limiting bolt through the limiting hole 5231 and match it with the limiting column 1303 thread to strengthen the mounting bracket. The connection strength between 523 and the front shell 130.
- first pre-fixing portion and the second pre-fixing portion can also be configured as follows: the first pre-fixing portion includes a positioning groove 5234, and the second pre-fixing portion includes a limiting column 1303. The second pre-fixing portion is inserted into the first pre-fixing portion to preliminarily limit the relative position of the mounting bracket 523 and the front housing 130.
- a second slot 5235 is provided on the mounting bracket 523 at one end opposite the first slot 5232.
- the opening of the second slot 5235 faces the rear housing 120.
- the second slot 5235 is used to accommodate the air pressure detector 522.
- the air pressure detection component 522 includes an airway component 522a and an air pressure sensor 5222.
- the air pressure sensor 5222 is disposed between the air pump 510 and the negative pressure tank 4111 and is used to detect the air pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the air pressure sensor 5222 is mounted on the airway component 522a and is disposed within the detection channel 5221d to detect the air pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111 through the detection channel 5221d.
- the air pressure sensor 5222 can be conveniently disposed between the air pump 510 and the negative pressure tank 4111 and can be conveniently fixed to improve detection accuracy.
- the airway component 522a includes an airway body 5221, a detection channel 5221d is provided inside the airway body 5221, and an air pressure sensor 5222 is provided in the detection channel 5221d to detect the air pressure of the negative pressure tank 4111 through the detection channel 5221d.
- the airway body 5221 is formed with a first port 52211, a second port 52212, and a third port 52213, which are connected to the detection channel 5221d.
- the third port 52213 is also referred to as the detection port.
- the first port 52211 is used to communicate with the negative pressure tank 4111
- the second port 52212 is used to communicate with the air pump 510.
- the third port 52213 is located between the first port 52211 and the second port 52212, and the air pressure sensor 5222 is disposed at the third port 52213.
- first valve port 5211 of the three-way valve 521 extends into the second groove body 5235 to connect with the second port 52212 in the second groove body 5235, so that the first valve port 5211 is in communication with the detection channel 5221d.
- the air duct member 522a is mounted on the mounting bracket 523, and the mounting bracket 523 is mounted on the protective shell, so that the air duct member 522a and the mounting bracket 523 are integrally mounted on the protective shell.
- the airway body 5221 is fixedly mounted in the second slot 5235.
- the mounting bracket 523 is provided with two mounting threaded holes 5236 at the opening of the second slot 5235
- the airway body 5221 is provided with two locking grooves 52214.
- the locking grooves 52214 correspond to the mounting threaded holes 5236.
- the air source assembly 500 includes mounting bolts, which are partially disposed in the locking grooves 52214 and threadedly engaged with the mounting threaded holes 5236.
- the airway body 5221 is clamped by the two mounting threaded holes 5236, thereby limiting the relative positions of the mounting bolts, the airway body 5221, and the mounting bracket 523.
- the airway body 5221 can be limited to be relatively away from the mounting bracket 523, thereby fixing the relative positions of the airway body 5221 and the mounting bracket 523.
- the front housing 130 blocks the opening of the second slot 5235, thereby shielding and protecting the airway body 5221.
- the front housing 130 and the mounting bracket 523 are released, exposing the air pressure sensor 522 for direct inspection.
- the air source assembly 500 may not include the air pressure sensor 5222, and the air pressure sensor 5222 may be located elsewhere.
- the air pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111 can be derived, for example, the air pressure sensor 5222 is located in the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the airway body 5221 includes an airway substrate 5221a for forming a detection channel 5221d, a first airway column 5221b and a second airway column 5221c, the first airway column 5221b is convexly arranged on one side of the airway substrate 5221a, the second airway column 5221c is convexly arranged on one side of the first airway column 5221b, and the other side of the airway substrate 5221a is formed with
- the first airway column 5221b is connected to the third port 52213, the free end of the first airway column 5221b forms the second port 52212, the second airway column 5221c is connected to the first airway column 5221b, and the free end of the second airway column 5221c forms the first port 52211.
- the first port 52211 of the detection channel 5221d is in communication with the first airflow connection portion 232.
- the gas flows between the first valve port 5211 and the first airflow connection portion 232, the gas flows through the detection channel 5221d via the first port 52211 and the second port 52212.
- the three-way valve 521 is controlled to connect the first valve port 5211 with the second valve port 5212.
- the gas is discharged into the environment through a path including the negative pressure tank 4111, the detection channel 5221d, the first airflow connection portion 232, the first valve port 5211, the second valve port 5212, the pump air inlet 512, the pump air outlet 511, the exhaust port 216, and the exhaust tank 4125, thereby forming a negative pressure in the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the three-way valve 521 is controlled to connect the first valve port 5211 with the air release port 5213. Gas enters the negative pressure tank 4111 through the air release port 5213, the first valve port 5211, the detection channel 5221d, and the first air flow connection portion 232, causing the pressure inside the negative pressure tank 4111 to rise, thereby releasing or reducing the suction on the skin.
- the mounting frame 523 is provided with an observation window 5237 on one side of the second trough 5235. Through the observation window 5237, the fit between the first valve port 5211 and the first port 52211 within the second trough 5235 can be observed. This also facilitates adjustment of the relative positions of the first valve port 5211 and the first port 52211, ensuring a tight fit between the first valve port 5211 and the first port 52211 and preventing air from leaking easily.
- the mounting frame 523 is provided with a second relief notch 52351 on a side of the second trough 5235 opposite the observation window 5237.
- the second relief notch 52351 forms a detection relief hole.
- a ventilation duct is provided through the second relief notch 52351 to connect the first port 52211 and the first airflow connection portion 232.
- the air pressure detection component 522 further includes an airway sealing component 5223.
- the airway sealing component 5223 is connected to the airway body 5221 to seal the third port 52213. In this way, the air pressure sensor 5222 can be easily installed and removed.
- the airway body 5221 is provided with a first connection hole 52215, and the airway seal 5223 is provided with a second connection hole 52231.
- the airway seal 5223 and the airway body 5221 are tightly fitted, and the airway seal 5223 is closely attached to the surface of the airway body 5221, thereby sealing the third port 52213.
- the airway seal 5223 is installed on the other side of the airway substrate 5221 a to seal the detection port, and the air pressure sensor 5222 is installed on the airway seal 5223 .
- an airway annular protrusion 5223a is provided on the side of the airway seal 5223 and is installed in the detection port.
- the airway annular protrusion 5223a is sealed and connected to the detection port, and the air pressure sensor 5222 is installed in the airway annular protrusion 5223a.
- the third port 52213 is set as a countersunk hole.
- the air pressure sensor 5222 can be fixed within the airway annular protrusion 5223a by bonding or other means. In other embodiments, the air pressure sensor 5222 can be disposed at the third port 52213, abutting the bottom wall of the countersunk hole. Specifically, when the airway seal 5223 is connected to the airway body 5221, the bottom wall of the countersunk hole and the airway seal 5223 jointly clamp the air pressure sensor 5222, and the airway annular protrusion 5223a abuts the inner wall of the countersunk hole, thereby limiting the relative position of the air pressure sensor 5222 and the airway body 5221.
- the gas circuit switching module 520 also includes a limiting plate 524 , and the valve installation cavity also includes an extended limiting cavity 5238 .
- the first groove body 5232 and the extended limiting cavity 5238 are arranged in parallel.
- the second valve port 5212 of the three-way valve 521 extends into the extended limiting cavity 5238, and a cavity connecting port 5239 is provided on the side wall of the extended limiting cavity 5238 facing the air pump 510.
- a ventilation pipe is provided through the cavity connecting port 5239 to connect the second valve port 5212 and the pump air inlet 512.
- the extended limiting cavity 5238 also has an opening.
- the limiting plate 524 is installed at the end of the extended limiting cavity 5238 away from the second groove 5235, that is, at the opening of the extended limiting cavity 5238. In this way, the limiting plate 524 can achieve anti-drop and protection.
- the position of the limiting plate 524 is limited by the mounting bracket 523 and/or the front housing 130, for example, the limiting plate 524 is snap-fitted to the mounting bracket 523.
- the limiting plate 524 can abut against the second valve port 5212 to limit the movement of the three-way valve 521, thereby preventing the second valve port 5212 from disengaging from the expansion limiting cavity 5238.
- a valve partition plate 523c is provided between the first groove body 5232 and the extended limiting cavity 5238, and a communication gap is provided on the valve partition plate 523c to connect the two, so as to facilitate the installation of the air valve.
- the mounting frame 523 includes a pump mounting base plate 523a and a valve enclosure plate 523b.
- the valve enclosure plate 523b is positioned on one side of the pump mounting base plate 523a.
- the valve enclosure plate 523b surrounds the outer periphery of the pump mounting base plate 523a and, together with the pump mounting base plate 523a, forms a valve mounting cavity.
- a valve diaphragm 523c is also projected from the inner wall of the valve enclosure plate 523b, defining a first slot 5232 and an extended limit cavity 5238 within the valve mounting cavity, both of which have openings (i.e., openings), for mounting the three-way valve 521.
- the valve enclosure plate 523b includes a first valve side plate 523b1 positioned near the air pump 510 and a second valve side plate 523b2 positioned opposite the first valve side plate 523b1.
- the first valve side plate 523b1 is provided with a cavity communication port 5239, while the second valve side plate 523b2 is provided with a first relief notch 5233 that exposes and avoids the air vent 5213.
- the mounting frame 523 also includes an airway enclosure 523d located on the other side of the pump mounting base plate 523a.
- the airway enclosure 523d and the pump mounting base plate 523a together form an open second trough 5235.
- the airway enclosure 523d includes an airway side plate 523d1 positioned adjacent to the negative pressure tank 4111.
- the airway side plate 523d1 is provided with a second relief notch 52351 to allow communication between the airway component 522a and the negative pressure tank 4111.
- Fig. 27 is an exploded view of the rear housing 120 and the display module 600 in one embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 28 is a schematic structural view of the pressing member 710 in one embodiment of the present application.
- the main body 010 also includes a display and control component.
- the shell 100 has a display and control installation port 1203 that is connected to the accommodating cavity 100a.
- the display and control component is installed as a whole at the display and control installation port 1203. In this way, the display and control component can be assembled outside the shell 100 in advance and then installed as a whole on the shell 100. This can reduce the impact of the shell 100 on the assembly, thereby reducing the assembly difficulty and improving the assembly efficiency.
- the display and control assembly includes a display module 600 and a button module 700.
- the display module 600 is used to display information about the beauty device 001. This information can include operating information of the beauty device 001, such as the RF current intensity of the RF electrode 420 and the fault status of the main body 010. It can also include the assembly status of the beauty device 001, such as the type of beauty head 030 currently connected to the main body 010.
- the display module 600 is disposed in the display area of the rear housing 120.
- the display area is located in the region where the housing 100 transitions from the first direction X to the first tilted direction U. Specifically, the display area is the region of the housing 100 where the grip portion 101 transitions to the bent portion 121. This prevents the display area from being obstructed when the user grips the device and facilitates increasing the display area.
- the display module 600 includes a display circuit board 620 and a light guide assembly 630 .
- the display circuit board 620 is used to emit light to the display area.
- the display and control module also includes a display and control board 610.
- the housing 100 has a display window in the display area; the display and control board 610 is connected to the housing 100 at the display window; and a display circuit board 620 is used to emit light toward the display and control board 610.
- the key module 700 is mounted on the display and control board 610, which is then mounted on the housing 100, so that the key module 700 is integrally mounted to the housing 100 via the display and control board 610. This improves installation efficiency by pre-installing the key module 700 on the display and control board 610 and then integrally mounting the display and control board 610 on the housing 100.
- the display and control installation opening 1203 is provided on the rear housing 120, and the display and control board 610 is connected to the rear housing 120 at the display and control installation opening 1203.
- the display and control board 610 covers the display and control installation opening 1203 to prevent debris from entering the accommodating cavity 100a through the display and control installation opening 1203.
- the display and control mounting port 1203 is located on the side of the rear housing 120 facing away from the front housing 130, and is located at the end of the rear housing 120 that is closest to the head housing 110. Specifically, the display and control mounting port 1203 is located in the area where the housing 100 transitions from the first direction X to the first inclined direction U; the display and control panel 610 also has an arcuate surface.
- the display and control panel 610 bends from extending along the first direction X to extending along the first inclined direction U from the end away from the head housing 110 to the end close to the head housing 110, and is connected to the head housing 110.
- the size of the display and control panel 610 is smaller than that of the rear housing 120.
- the first half shell has a U-shaped cross-section perpendicular to the first direction X, forming an opening toward the second half shell.
- the impact of the first half shell on assembly is reduced, thereby improving assembly efficiency.
- the rear shell 120 is provided with a limiting groove 1204 on the periphery of the display and control installation opening 1203. That is, the display and control installation opening 1203 is located at the bottom of the limiting groove 1204, and the display and control board 610 is accommodated in the limiting groove 1204. Specifically, the display and control board 610 is arranged in contact with the bottom wall of the limiting groove 1204. In this way, by providing the limiting groove 1204 to accommodate the display and control board 610, it can be pre-positioned during assembly, and the display and control board 610 can be prevented from protruding too high after assembly is completed. Among them, the limiting groove 1204 is provided on the outer surface of the rear shell 120, thereby further reducing the difficulty of assembly. The inner wall of the limiting groove 1204 limits the movement of the display and control board 610 relative to the rear shell 120 along the first direction X and the third direction Z.
- the rear housing 120 is provided with a limiting through-hole 1205 within the limiting groove 1204.
- the limiting through-hole 1205 extends through the rear housing 120 in the second direction Y.
- Bolts passing through the limiting through-hole 1205 and threadedly engaging with the display and control board 610 secure the display and control board 610 to the rear housing 120 in the second direction Y.
- the display and control assembly further includes a display and control mounting bolt.
- the display and control board 610 is provided with a display and control threaded hole.
- the display and control mounting bolt passes through the limiting through-hole 1205 and threadably engages with the display and control threaded hole to secure the housing 100 and the display and control board 610.
- the limiting through hole 1205 is arranged in an area within the limiting groove 1204 and outside the display and control installation opening 1203 .
- the end of the display and control board 610 facing away from the head shell 110 has a first curved edge 611 and a second curved edge 612.
- the first curved edge 611 and the second curved edge 612 are symmetrical along a symmetry plane, which is perpendicular to the third direction Z, and the rear shell 120 is also roughly symmetrical along the symmetry plane.
- a convex angle is formed between the first curved edge 611 and the second curved edge 612.
- a convex angle is an angle less than 180°, that is, an angle that protrudes outward.
- the first curved edge 611 and the second curved edge 612 both abut against the inner wall of the limiting groove 1204. Through the abutment between the first curved edge 611, the second curved edge 612 and the inner wall of the limiting groove 1204, the display and control board 610 can be aligned with the middle of the limiting groove 1204.
- the display circuit board 620 of the display module 600 is detachably connected to the display control board 610.
- the display control board 610 is generally plate-shaped.
- the display circuit board 620 includes a plurality of lighting elements 621, which are arranged toward the display control board 610 and can emit visible light toward the display control board 610.
- the display control panel 610 is provided with a limit buckle 613 extending into the accommodating cavity 100a. On a side of the display circuit board 620 facing away from the display control board 610 , the display circuit board 620 is restricted from being separated from the display control board 610 .
- the display circuit board 620 can be electrically connected to the main control board 310 , and the main control board 310 controls the lighting component 621 on the display circuit board 620 to emit visible light.
- the display module 600 may not include the display circuit board 620, but integrate the functions of the display circuit board 620 into other circuit boards, for example, integrated into the main control board 310, the main control board 310 is connected to the lighting component 621, and the lighting component 621 can be integrated into the display control board 610.
- the light guide assembly 630 is positioned between the display control board 610 and the display circuit board 620. It is used to conduct light from the display circuit board 620 to the display control board 610.
- the end of the light guide assembly 630 facing the display control board 610 is bonded to the display control board 610, while the end of the light guide assembly 630 facing the display circuit board 620 is bonded to the display circuit board 620.
- This helps to improve the overall compactness of the display control assembly structure, reducing the space occupied by the accommodating cavity 100a and facilitating the installation of other components.
- this bonding arrangement improves light guidance efficiency, allowing users to observe higher brightness and facilitate access to information about the beauty device 001.
- the light guide assembly 630 matches the flat display circuit board 620 with the curved display control board 610.
- the light guide assembly 630 passes through the display control mounting opening 1203 to conduct visible light from the display circuit board 620 within the accommodating cavity 100a to the display control board 610.
- the light guide assembly 630 includes a light guide member 631 and a light isolation member 632.
- the light guide member 631 includes at least two light guide plates 6311, and the multiple light guide plates 6311 are spaced apart along the first direction X.
- the size of the light guide plate 6311 along the second direction Y is adapted to the curved surface of the display control board 610, so that one end of the light guide plate 6311 is close to the display circuit board 620 while the other end is as close to the display control board 610 as possible.
- Each light guide plate 6311 corresponds to at least one lighting component 621 on the display circuit board 620.
- the light guide member 631 transmits the visible light emitted by the lighting component 621 to the display control board 610.
- the area corresponding to the display control board 610 and the light guide member 631 is a light-transmitting area. The user can observe the visible light transmitted by the light guide member 631 through the display control board 610.
- the light isolation member 632 includes a plurality of light isolation plates 6321, and the plurality of light isolation plates 6321 are spaced apart along the first direction X.
- the size of the light isolation plate 6321 along the second direction Y is adapted to the curved surface of the display control board 610, so that one end of the light isolation plate 6321 is close to the display circuit board 620 while the other end is as close to the display control board 610 as possible.
- a light isolation plate 6321 is provided between each two adjacent light guide plates 6311, and the light isolation plate 6321 limits the transmission of visible light between the two adjacent light guide plates 6311.
- the light isolation plate 6321 can, on the one hand, enable each light guide plate 6311 to independently guide light, thereby reducing color crosstalk between adjacent light guide plates 6311, and on the other hand, it can reduce the dispersion of light within the light guide plate 6311, thereby improving the light guiding effect of the light guide plate 6311.
- the light isolating member 632 is connected to the light guide member 631, and the light guide member 631 is connected to the display circuit board 620.
- the light isolating member 632 and the light guide member 631 can be connected outside the housing 100, and the light guide member 631 can be connected to the display circuit board 620, and then the entire connected structure can be connected to the housing 100, thereby reducing the difficulty of assembly.
- each light guide plate 6311 has a first end surface 63111 and a second end surface 63112.
- the first end surface 63111 and the second end surface 63112 are substantially symmetrical along a plane of symmetry.
- a convex angle is formed between the first end surface 63111 and the second end surface 63112.
- a convex angle is an angle less than 180°, i.e., an angle that bulges outward.
- the first end surface 63111 and the second end surface 63112 abut against the same light isolation plate 6321, allowing the light guide plate 6311 to align with the center of the rear housing 120.
- the light guide 631 further includes a first base plate 6312.
- the plurality of light guide plates 6311 are connected via the first base plate 6312.
- the light isolation member 632 further includes a second base plate 6322.
- the plurality of light isolation plates 6321 are connected via the second base plate 6322.
- a base plate mounting groove 63121 is provided on a side of the first base plate 6312 facing the display circuit board 620.
- the second base plate 6322 is clamped in the base plate mounting groove 63121 to limit the relative displacement of the light guide 631 and the light isolation member 632 along the third direction Z.
- the light guide plate 6311 and the light isolation plate 6321 abut against each other to limit the relative movement of the light guide 631 and the light isolation member 632 along the first direction X.
- the first bottom plate 6312 is further provided with a plug-in column 63122 on the side facing the display circuit board 620.
- the plug-in column 63122 is plugged into the display circuit board 620, so that the light guide 631 and the display circuit board 620 are relatively fixedly connected. It is sandwiched between the first bottom plate 6312 and the display circuit board 620 to limit the relative movement of the light guide 631 , the light isolation member 632 and the display circuit board 620 along the second direction Y.
- the button module 700 is used to receive a pressing signal from the user in order to operate the beauty instrument 001.
- the display control panel 610 is provided with a pressing window 6101, and the button module 700 is installed at the pressing window 6101 of the display control panel 610. In this way, the button module 700 can be observed and controlled through the pressing window 6101.
- the key module 700 is electrically connected to the control component so that the control component controls the RF electrode 420 to release RF current according to the signal of the key module 700 and/or controls the gas source component 500 according to the signal of the key module 700.
- the key module 700 includes a pressing member 710 and a key circuit board 720.
- the pressing member 710 can move relative to the display and control board 610 along the second direction Y.
- the key circuit board 720 is arranged in the accommodating cavity 100a.
- the display and control board 610 is provided with an assembly column 6102.
- the bolt passes through the key circuit board 720 and is threadedly connected to the assembly column 6102, so that the key circuit board 720 can be connected to the display and control board 610.
- the key circuit board 720 includes a key block 721.
- the pressing member 710 has a flexible portion 711. When the user presses the flexible portion 711, the flexible portion 711 can be flexibly deformed and move toward the key block 721.
- the flexible portion 711 acts on the key block 721, which can trigger an electrical signal, so that the key circuit board 720 generates an electrical signal to control the operation of the beauty instrument 001.
- the button module 700 can also adopt a non-contact form, for example, a gesture sensing form, which can convert the user's gesture into an electrical signal to control the beauty instrument 001.
- a non-contact form for example, a gesture sensing form, which can convert the user's gesture into an electrical signal to control the beauty instrument 001.
- the display and control assembly comprises a display and control board 610, a display module 600, and a key module 700.
- the display module 600 and the key module 700 are mounted on the display and control board 610, which is then mounted on the housing 100. This allows the display module 600 and the key module 700 to be integrally mounted on the housing 100 via the display and control board 610.
- This display and control assembly can be pre-assembled before being mounted on the housing 100, reducing the difficulty of assembling the beauty device 001.
- the pressing member 710 has a limiting outer edge 712.
- the limiting outer edge 712 is disposed within the accommodating cavity 100a.
- the size of the limiting outer edge 712 is larger than the size of the pressing window 6101.
- the limiting outer edge 712 can abut the display and control board 610 to prevent the pressing member 710 from separating from the pressing window 6101 in the second direction Y.
- the flexible portion 711 is disposed in the middle of the limiting outer edge 712.
- the limiting outer edge 712 of the pressing member 710 and the flexible portion 711 can also be formed integrally.
- the limiting outer edge 712 and the flexible portion 711 are made of the same material.
- the volume of the limiting outer edge 712 is large enough so that after being deformed by an external force, the limiting outer edge 712 is not easily contracted to the point where it can pass through the narrow area of the pressing window 6101, so that it can still abut the display control board 610 to prevent the pressing member 710 from separating from the pressing window 6101 along the second direction Y.
- the area of the flexible portion 711 is large enough, so that the flexible portion 711 can produce a large enough deformation to contact the key block 721 and drive the key block 721. Please refer to Figures 27 and 28.
- the flexible portion 711 also includes a pressing protrusion 713. The pressing protrusion 713 extends toward the pressing member 710 so that the flexible portion 711 can contact the key block 721 after deformation.
- the information on the display control panel 610 can be observed to determine the status of the beauty instrument 001.
- the user applies force to the pressing member 710 with a finger to drive the button block 721.
- the main control board 310 can receive an electrical signal and change the working mode of the beauty instrument 001.
- the display circuit board 620 matches the working mode to control the lighting member 621 to emit visible light.
- the user can determine the current working mode of the beauty instrument 001 from the information displayed on the display control panel 610, and apply force to the pressing member 710 as needed to select the corresponding working mode. For example, the user needs to turn on the beauty instrument 001.
- the display control panel 610 does not emit visible light, the user can press and hold the pressing member 710 so that the button block 721 is pressed and held.
- the main control board 310 receives a continuous electrical signal and determines that the user needs to turn on the beauty instrument 001. After turning on the beauty instrument 001, the display control panel 610 emits visible light, and the user can determine whether the beauty instrument 001 is currently in operation. When the user needs to switch from the first operating mode to the third operating mode, the display panel 610 emits the first color corresponding to the first operating mode. The user briefly presses the push button 710, causing the button block 721 to be pressed.
- the main control panel 310 receives an electrical signal and determines that the user needs to switch the operating mode of the beauty device 001, and switches the first operating mode to the second operating mode.
- the user observes the display panel 610 again.
- the display panel 610 emits the second color corresponding to the second operating mode, but not the third color corresponding to the third operating mode.
- the user briefly presses the push button 710 again, causing the button block 721 to be pressed.
- the main control panel 310 receives an electrical signal and determines that the user needs to switch the operating mode of the beauty device 001, and switches the second operating mode to the third operating mode.
- the user observes the display panel 610 again.
- the display panel 610 emits the third color corresponding to the third operating mode, and determines that the beauty device 001 is in the required third operating mode.
- the key module 700, display module 600, and display control board 610 together form a display control assembly.
- the key module 700, display module 600, and display control board 610 can be pre-assembled to form a display control assembly and then installed together at the display control installation port 1203 of the housing 100, making the beauty instrument 001 easier to assemble.
- control assembly includes an RF circuit board 810.
- the RF circuit board 810 is electrically connected to the main control board 310 and is used to control the release of RF current by the RF electrodes 420.
- the RF circuit board 810 can be connected to the power cord 050 to receive power and is electrically connected to the main control board 310 to supply power to the main control board 310.
- the RF circuit board 810 is connected to the display and control board 610, which in turn is connected to the rear housing 120, thereby limiting the relative position of the RF circuit board 810 and the rear housing 120.
- the main control board 310 and the radio frequency circuit board 810 are arranged around the airflow driving component.
- the beauty device 001 may further include an adapter connected to the power cord 050.
- the adapter connects to a household electrical grid or portable power source, converting the voltage from the household electrical grid or portable power source to the voltage required by the beauty device 001 before supplying power to the RF circuit board 810.
- the adapter is electrically connected to the control assembly and is used to power the control assembly and/or the gas source assembly 500.
- the adapter is detachably connected to the housing 100.
- the user can remove the adapter from the housing 100 to store the beauty device 001 and the adapter.
- the adapter is easy to repair and replace, which helps reduce the maintenance cost of the beauty device 001.
- the beauty device 001 may further include a battery.
- the battery is disposed within the accommodating cavity 100a.
- the battery is electrically connected to the RF circuit board 810, which in turn supplies power to the main control board 310.
- the main control board 310 supplies power to the head circuit board 460 via the main circuit board 250, thereby enabling the RF electrodes 420 to output RF current.
- the main control board 310 can also supply power to the air source assembly 500.
- main control board 310 is also electrically connected to the gas source assembly 500 , so that the air pump 510 can suck the gas from the negative pressure tank 4111 through the three-way valve 521 .
- the battery or the adapter can be selected, so that the beauty instrument 001 only obtains power from the battery or the adapter.
- the beauty instrument 001 can also include both the battery and the adapter to increase the user's freedom of choice.
- the RF circuit board 810 may also be directly connected to the housing 100 , thereby limiting the relative position of the RF circuit board 810 and the housing 100 , so that the RF circuit board 810 can be stably disposed in the accommodating cavity 100 a .
- the RF circuit board 810 extends along the first direction X, and the RF circuit board 810 and the main control board 310 are located on both sides of the gas source assembly 500, so that the angle between the RF circuit board 810 and the main control board 310 is between 70° and 110°.
- the RF circuit board 810 can be approximately perpendicular to the main control board 310. This can improve space utilization.
- the beauty instrument 001 provided in this application is used to connect the beauty head 030 to the main body 010.
- the hook 22111 cooperates with the groove 41231 to limit the connection between the beauty head 030 and the main body 010.
- the first airflow connection portion 232 is inserted into the second airflow connection portion 4114 through the negative pressure hole 4122, establishing communication between the first airflow connection portion 232 and the negative pressure slot 4111.
- the air pump 510 draws air from the negative pressure slot 4111, creating a negative pressure within the negative pressure slot 4111 to absorb the skin.
- the air guide 4124 is inserted into the exhaust port 216, forming an exhaust channel between the exhaust slot 4125 and the first assembly surface 212b. Exhaust from the air pump 510 can exit the beauty device 001 through the exhaust port 216 and the exhaust slot 4125. Therefore, when the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 are assembled, both the outlet and inlet of the air pump 510 are connected to the beauty head 030.
- the exhaust groove 4125 guides the gas out through the gap between the beauty head 030 and the inner wall of the assembly groove 212a, making it easier for the user to check whether the exhaust groove 4125 of the beauty device 001 is blocked, thus maintaining the normal operation of the beauty device 001.
- the first electrical connector 240 of the main body 010 also connects to the second electrical connector 470 of the beauty head 030, thereby establishing an electrical connection between the beauty head 030 and the main body 010.
- the RF electrode 420 is electrically connected to the second electrical connector 470 via the head circuit board 460.
- the main body 010 can provide power to the beauty head 030 and control the RF current output of the RF electrode 420.
- the beauty instrument 001 provided in this application is installed into the assembly groove 212a through the beauty head 030, which can not only connect the air pump outlet and air pump inlet with the beauty head 030, but also realize the electrical connection between the beauty head 030 and the main body 010, which is convenient for user operation.
- the main body 010 can also identify the type of the beauty head 030.
- the beauty head 030 includes various types.
- the beauty head 030 can be a first-type module comprising two RF electrodes 420, or a second-type module comprising four RF electrodes 420.
- the main body 010 can identify the type of the beauty head 030, such as whether it is a first-type module or a second-type module, facilitating the main body 010 to control the beauty head 030 in a targeted manner.
- the number of RF electrodes 420 on the beauty head 030 can also vary, for example, five RF electrodes 420 located at the five corners of a pentagon, with each alternate pair of RF electrodes 420 activated to generate RF current.
- the present application provides multiple beauty heads 030 that are selectively installed on the main body 010, allowing users to choose different beauty heads 030 for use according to their needs; and the present application can also perform corresponding control by identifying different types of beauty heads 030, thereby improving the flexibility of use of the beauty instrument 001.
- the main body 010 includes a sensor
- the beauty head 030 includes a sensing element.
- the sensor is used to identify the type of beauty head 030.
- the sensor can be a Hall effect sensor, and the sensing element can be a magnetic element. Different types of beauty heads 030 are equipped with different types of magnetic elements.
- the Hall effect sensor can sense the magnetic element of the beauty head 030 to determine the type of beauty head 030.
- the sensor can also be an identification circuit embedded or integrated into the main control board 310 or the main circuit board 250, and can determine the type of beauty head 030 by identifying the type of the second electrical connector 470.
- the sensor can also be an NFC sensor, and the sensing element can be an NFC coil. The NFC sensor can sense the type of the NFC coil and thus determine the type of beauty head 030.
- FIG29 shows a schematic structural diagram of the gas path switching module 520 in one embodiment of the present application.
- the senor includes at least three sensing points.
- the sensing element electrically contacts at least two of these sensing points, thereby conducting current between the two sensing points. This allows different types of beauty heads 030 to be identified based on the different locations or numbers of sensing points detected. This approach is cost-effective and space-saving.
- first electrical connectors 240 can form a sensing point, and each first electrical connector 240 can form a sensing point.
- At least two second electrical connectors 470 are configured as part of the sensing element, that is, the sensing element includes at least part of the second electrical connectors 470, where "at least part of the second electrical connectors 470" indicates a part in terms of quantity, that is, only a few of the multiple second electrical connectors 470 may be used to form the sensing element.
- first and second electrical connectors 240, 470 can be categorized, with some first and second electrical connectors 240 and their corresponding second electrical connectors 470 used to electrically connect and control the RF electrode 420, the first temperature sensor 430, or the second temperature sensor 450, while others can be used to identify the type of the beauty head 030.
- some first and second electrical connectors 240, 470 can have multiple functions, with the first and second electrical connectors 240, 470, and their corresponding second electrical connectors 470 used to electrically connect to the RF electrode 420, the first temperature sensor 430, or the second temperature sensor 450, also used to identify the type of the beauty head 030. Both approaches require only changing the number of first and second electrical connectors 240, 470, resulting in simple manufacturing and low cost.
- connection contacts 464 of the head circuit board 460 include conduction contacts and circuit-breaking contacts (i.e., fourth type electrical contacts). Some of the second electrical connectors 470 are in contact with the conduction contacts, and some of the second electrical connectors 470 are in contact with the circuit-breaking contacts. It can be understood that when one of the second electrical connectors 470 is in contact with the conduction contact, the second electrical connector 470 forms a conduction needle 470a and is electrically connected to the head circuit board 460, and at least two of the second electrical connectors 470 are configured as conduction needles 470a.
- the second electrical connector 470 When one of the second electrical connectors 470 is in contact with the circuit-breaking contact, the second electrical connector 470 is a false second electrical connector, which forms a circuit-breaking needle 470b and is non-electrically connected to the head circuit board 460.
- the first electrical connector 240 contacted by the circuit-breaking needle 470b is also non-electrically connected to the head circuit board 460.
- the disconnect pin 470 b does not transmit an electrical signal between the header circuit board 460 and the body circuit board 250 .
- an identification circuit connected to the first electrical connector 240 is provided in the main circuit board 250 or the main control board 310.
- Different types of beauty heads 030 include different numbers of and/or different positions of conduction pins 470a and disconnection pins 470b. When different types of beauty heads 030 are installed on the main body 010, the identification circuit will generate different electrical signals, thereby identifying different beauty heads 030.
- the main circuit board 250 when the main circuit board 250 applies a high level to all first electrical connectors 240, it receives feedback from the header circuit board 460, allowing the circuit board to determine whether the second electrical connector 470 is a conductive pin 470a or a disconnect pin 470b. After determining the type of all second electrical connectors 470, the circuit board can then determine the type of the grooming head 030. For example, if four second electrical connectors 470 in a first-type module are disconnect pins 470b, while the remaining second electrical connectors 470 are conductive pins 470a, the main circuit board 250 determines that there are four second electrical connectors 470 in the header circuit board 460, and the grooming head 030 is a first-type module.
- the main circuit board 250 determines that there are two second electrical connectors 470 in the header circuit board 460, and the grooming head 030 is a second-type module.
- the main circuit board 250 determines that the header circuit board 460 has only two disconnect pins 470b, and the two disconnect pins 470b are adjacent to each other, then the grooming head 030 is determined to be a first-type module.
- the main circuit board 250 determines that the header circuit board 460 has only two disconnect pins 470b, and a conductive pin 470a is located between the two disconnect pins 470b, then the grooming head 030 is determined to be a second-type module.
- the mounting shell 410 and the second electrical connector 470 are integrally injection-molded.
- the dummy second electrical connector i.e., the disconnect pin 470b
- the molds for the mounting housing 410 of different types of beauty heads 030 can be different.
- the molds for the mounting housing 410 of different types of beauty heads 030 can be made the same, thereby reducing production costs.
- the disconnect pin 470b can also be used in other ways to provide a non-electrical connection between the header circuit board 460 and the first electrical connector 240.
- the disconnect pin 470b can be coated with an insulating layer, while the conductive pin 470a can be left uncoated.
- the first needle segment 471 or the second needle segment 472 of the disconnect pin 470b can be coated with an insulating layer.
- different types of beauty heads 030 can have substantially the same arrangement of second electrical connectors 470.
- the number of second electrical connectors 470 can be the same for each type, allowing the same mold to be used for all types of beauty heads 030, thus saving production costs.
- the conduction pins 470a and disconnection pins 470b in the second electrical connector 470 can be placed in different raw material boxes during production, allowing production equipment to simply draw from the corresponding boxes.
- different types of head circuit boards 460 can be placed in different raw material boxes, and production equipment can remove head circuit boards 460 corresponding to different types of beauty heads 030 from different boxes to complete the production and assembly of different types of beauty heads 030.
- the second electrical connector 470 can be coated with an insulating layer to form the disconnection pins 470b in the corresponding second electrical connector 470.
- the identification circuit within the main body 010 can generate different electrical signals based on the different short-circuit conditions of the resistances, thereby identifying different beauty heads 030.
- the two conducting pins 470a connect to the sensing points formed by the two first electrical connectors 240, forming a circuit.
- the resistance between the two first electrical connectors 240 is short-circuited by the two conducting pins 470a and the wiring within the head circuit board 460.
- This allows the main body 010 to sense the current characteristics and thus determine the type of beauty head 030.
- the main body 010 can sense different current characteristics, thereby identifying different types of beauty heads 030.
- the sensing element or the conductive pin 470a formed by the second electrical connector 470, can also simultaneously conduct electricity to the three sensing points formed by the first electrical connector 240 to form a corresponding resistor component.
- Different current characteristics are sensed through the main body 010, thereby identifying different types of beauty heads 030.
- the current characteristic can be resistance, voltage, or current.
- the main body 010 identifies the type of the beauty head 030 and can provide a control mode corresponding to the type of the beauty head 030 for the user to choose, which can improve the user's usage experience.
- the beauty head 030 in the beauty device 001 provided herein can also be used with a straight-shaped body 010.
- the head shell 110 no longer tilts relative to the front shell 130 and the rear shell 120 along the first tilt direction U. This allows the entire housing 100 to extend along the first direction X.
- the user can tilt their wrist to adjust the angle between their skin and the beauty device 001.
- multiple RF electrodes 420, the mounting shell 410, etc. form a RF component, wherein the mounting shell 410 is the RF shell.
- the multiple RF electrodes 420 can be indirectly installed on the skin-facing plate 011a through the mounting shell 410, etc., and the RF shell can be detachably installed on the skin-facing plate 011a.
- FIG30 shows an exploded schematic diagram of a beauty instrument 001 in another embodiment of the present application.
- FIG31 shows an exploded schematic diagram of a beauty instrument 001 in another embodiment of the present application.
- this beauty instrument 001 includes a shell 100 and a radio frequency component.
- the shell 100 includes a first half shell, a second half shell and a head shell 110.
- the first half shell is the back shell 120
- the second half shell is the front shell 130.
- One end of the first half shell has a bending portion 121 that is bent and tilted toward the side close to the second half shell and is arranged in a first inclined direction U.
- the bending portion 121 can adapt to the head shell 110 so as to assemble the head shell 110, the front shell 130 and the back shell 120.
- the head shell 110, the front shell 130 and the back shell 120 are assembled to form the shell 100.
- the head shell 110 of the beauty instrument 001 faces the user's skin.
- the head shell 110 is used to form the beauty head 030
- the skin-facing plate 011a is a skin-contacting plate
- the plurality of radio frequency electrodes 420 are exposedly mounted on the skin-facing plate 011a.
- the beauty device 001 further includes a cold compress assembly 900, which is mounted on the head shell 110.
- the cold compress assembly 900 includes a cold compress 910 and a cooling plate 930.
- the cold compress 910 is exposed on the skin-facing plate 011a, and the cooling plate 930 is disposed within the head shell 110.
- the cooling plate 930 is thermally connected to the cold compress 910, allowing heat from the cold compress 910 to be transferred to the cooling plate 930.
- the cooling plate 930 absorbs the heat, thereby maintaining the temperature of the cold compress 910 at a relatively low level, thereby providing a cooling effect on the skin, and even achieving a freezing sensation.
- At least three RF electrodes 420 are optionally provided at intervals along a preset direction.
- the preset direction may be a second inclined direction V.
- At least one cold compress 910 is provided between any two adjacent RF electrodes 420.
- the skin between the two RF electrodes 420 is stimulated by current for beauty treatment, while the cold compress 910 can simultaneously provide a cold compress to the skin, thereby improving the user experience and reducing the burning sensation of the user. More importantly, when the RF electrode 420 releases RF energy, the skin covered by the RF electrode 420 has a higher temperature due to the energy provided by the RF electrode 420.
- the cold compress 910 is provided between the two RF electrodes 420, the area covered by the RF electrode 420 will be cooled, but it is obvious that the skin between the two RF electrodes 420 is better cooled. In this way, a cold compress effect of alternating hot and cold can be formed, thereby improving the beauty effect.
- This beauty device 001 can beautify the user's skin through the radio frequency electrode 420, and the tilted setting of the head shell 110 makes the radio frequency electrode 420 tilted in the first direction X.
- the radio frequency electrode 420 and the cold compress 910 can more easily fit the user's skin.
- the head shell 110 is provided with an assembly recess 11314, which can also facilitate the demolding of the head shell 110 after molding.
- the bent portion 121 generally protrudes from the rear shell 120, and the head shell 110 is connected to the bent portion 121 and the front shell 130.
- the assembly recess 11314 of the head shell 110 is mated with the bent portion 121.
- the bending portion 121 roughly protrudes from the rear shell 120, which means that the bending portion 121 extends from the rear shell 120 as a whole toward the head shell 110, and the front shell 130 does not directly cooperate with the bending portion 121, so that after the front shell 130 and the rear shell 120 are connected, the bending portion 121 roughly protrudes from the rear shell 120.
- the beauty device 001 with the beauty head 030 and main body 010 detachable, can be designed as a portable RF beauty device, combining the RF component and gas source assembly 500 into a handheld housing to achieve miniaturization and portability of RF beauty treatments.
- the mounting housing 410 of the beauty head 030, the outer housing 100 of the main body 010, and the connecting inner housing 210 together form the handheld housing, also known as the protective housing.
- the miniaturization and portability of the RF beauty instrument can be achieved, and by providing a negative pressure tank 4111 and an air source component 500 used in conjunction with the negative pressure tank 4111 on the handheld shell, when the RF beauty instrument is working, the skin can be sucked into the negative pressure tank 4111 through the negative pressure tank 4111, and then a RF current can be emitted to the skin after being sucked in through the RF electrode 420, so that the RF current can penetrate the skin sucked into the negative pressure tank 4111, thereby increasing the injection depth of the RF energy and improving the beauty effect.
- the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 are assembled. It is designed as a detachable structure, but in other embodiments, the beauty head 030 and the main body 010 of the portable radio frequency beauty instrument can also be designed as non-detachable or difficult to detach structures.
- the corresponding detachable related structures can be cancelled, such as canceling the first electrical connector 240 and the second electrical connector 470, canceling one of the first airflow connection part 232 and the second airflow connection part 4114, canceling at least one of the head circuit board 460 and the main body circuit board 250, canceling the connection inner shell 210, etc., which are all adaptively changed structures, such as designing the handheld shell to be in the form of the outer shell 100 in the embodiments shown in Figures 30 and 31, which will not be described one by one here.
- the handheld shell is the protective shell.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
- Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Electrotherapy Devices (AREA)
Abstract
本申请提供一种美容仪。这种美容仪包括主体和美容头。美容头包括负压槽和射频电极,负压槽用于负压吸附用户皮肤,以将皮肤吸附到负压槽内;射频电极用于对用户皮肤释放射频电流。美容头与主体可拆卸连接。当美容头与主体连接时,负压槽与主体连通以使主体通过负压槽负压吸附用户皮肤,射频电极与主体电性连接以使得主体向射频电极提供电能。如此,当使用美容仪时,将美容头可拆卸连接于主体,以实现射频电极与主体电性连接以及负压槽与主体连通,从而主体可通过负压槽将皮肤吸入负压槽内后,再通过射频电极对吸入后的皮肤发出射频电流,从而可使射频电流穿透被吸入负压槽内的皮肤,从而可增大射频能量的射入深度,从而可提高美容效果。
Description
本申请涉及美容器械领域,尤其涉及一种美容仪。
射频美容仪,主要是通过射频加热,刺激真皮层产生胶原蛋白,从而达到紧致皮肤、减少皱纹的效果。传统的射频美容仪主要为大型医用设备,主要在医院或美容院使用,已逐渐不能满足大部分人的需求。
相关技术中,为了提高用户的使用便捷性,降低使用成本,将射频美容仪小型化、便携化,从而转为家用。这种美容仪直接将射频电极设置在美容仪的朝肤面上,在使用时,朝肤面朝向甚至贴合面部皮肤,其上的射频电极向皮肤发射射频能量,以对皮肤进行刺激来实现美容。但是,这种射频美容仪,射频电极发出的射频电流射入皮下的深度有限,美容效果不佳。
在相关技术中,经过继续研究发现,可通过负压吸附技术提高美容仪的使用效果,一设计中,在美容头上设置负压槽和射频电极,在美容仪的主体壳内设置气泵,气泵与负压槽通过气道软管连通,组装时,先将气道软管的一端与主体壳内气泵连接,再将另一端与美容头连接,然后再将美容头安装在主体壳上。但是,因为在将美容头安装到主体壳的过程中,为防止气道软管与气泵或美容头分离,需要很小心,组装效率低。
需要说明的是,本申请以上公开的技术方案只是为了便于介绍本申请的发明目的和效果,但并不代表其为现有技术。
发明内容
本申请提供了一种美容仪,便于提升美容仪的组装效率。
本申请实施例提供一种美容仪。这种美容仪包括主体和美容头。美容头包括负压槽和射频电极,所述负压槽用于负压吸附用户皮肤,以将皮肤吸附到负压槽内;所述射频电极用于对用户皮肤释放射频电流。所述美容头与所述主体可拆卸连接。当所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述负压槽与所述主体连通以使所述主体通过所述负压槽负压吸附用户皮肤,所述射频电极与所述主体电性连接以使得所述主体向所述射频电极提供电能。
如此,当使用美容仪时,将美容头可拆卸连接于主体,以实现射频电极与主体电性连接以及负压槽与主体连通,从而主体可通过负压槽将皮肤吸入负压槽内后,再通过射频电极对吸入后的皮肤发出射频电流,从而可使射频电流穿透被吸入负压槽内的皮肤,从而可增大射频能量的射入深度,从而可提高美容效果。
且可以理解的是,本申请通过将美容头与主体分体设计,并使负压槽设于美容头,当美容头安装到主体上时,即可实现负压槽与主体的连通,从而不必考虑气道软管是否与美容头或气泵分离,从而可提高组装效率。
而且,可以理解,美容仪在使用的过程中,负压槽内部和射频电极上通常会染上汗渍或凝胶等污渍,本申请通过使主体和美容头可拆卸连接,从而可实现在需要时,将美容头拆卸下进行清洗,从而可便于对负压槽内部和射频电极进行清洗,且可避免清洗水进入主体模块内,以避免损坏美容仪。
而且,负压吸附系统较为复杂,不可拆卸的设置导致修理和安装困难,可拆卸的负压射频美容仪,使得组装方便,并且负压吸附系统的功能设计也多样性,如更为方便的负压连接、负压泄压等。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述主体包括第一电连接件,所述美容头包括第二电连接件,所述第二电连接件与所述射频电极电性连接,所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一电连接件与所述第二电连接件电性连接,以使得所述主体向所述射频电极提供电能;所述主体包括第一气流连接部,所述美容头包括与所述负压槽连通的第二气流连接部,所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通,以使得所述负压槽与所述主体连通。存在位置上的对应关系后,当将部件依次拆下清洗时,装配效率高。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述主体具有第一组装面,所述美容头具有第二组装面,当所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面对应设置;所述第一电连接件从所述第一组装面露出于所述主体,所述第二电连接件从第二组装面露出于所述美容头,以在所述美容头与所述主体连接时,使所述第一电连接件与所述第二电连接件电性连接;和/或,所述第一气流连接部从所述第一组装面露出于所述主体,所述第二气流连接部从第二组装面露出于所述美容头,以在所述美容头与所述主体连接时,使所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述主体还包括主控板,所述主控板电性连接所述第一电连接件,以通过所述第一电连接件和所述第二电连接件控制所述射频电极释放射频电流。和/或,当所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面拆卸方向上对应设置。和/或,当所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面接触或抵接。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述射频电极靠近所述负压槽设置,或者所述射频电极至少部分地延伸至所述负压槽的内壁,以使得所述射频电极对被所述负压槽负压吸附的皮肤释放射频电流。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述主体包括连接模块,所述连接模块包括所述第一电连接件和第一气流连接部,所述第一组装面设于所述连接模块,所述美容头可拆卸连接于所述连接模块,以使所述美容头与所述主体可拆卸连接。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述连接模块或所述美容头设置有装配槽,所述装配槽的底部形成所述第一组装面或所述第二组装面,以使得所述美容头装入所述连接模块的所述装配槽或所述连接模块装入所述美容头的所述装配槽,并限制所述连接模块和所述美容头的相对位置。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述连接模块还包括锁止组件,所述锁止组件用于在所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面接触或抵接时连接所述美容头,以限制所述美容头远离所述连接模块。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述锁止组件用于在所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面
接触或抵接时与所述美容头卡接配合,以限制所述美容头远离所述连接模块;或,所述锁止组件用于在所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面接触或抵接时磁性吸附所述美容头,以限制所述美容头远离所述连接模块。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述锁止组件包括卡合部,所述美容头设置有卡接部;所述卡合部设置于所述第一组装面,所述卡接部设置于所述第二组装面;所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面接触或抵接时,所述卡合部与所述卡接部配合,并限制所述美容头和所述主体的相对位置。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述连接模块还包括解锁组件;所述解锁组件用于解除所述锁止组件与所述美容头的配合。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述连接模块还包括解锁组件,所述解锁组件作用于所述锁止组件;所述解锁组件被配置为:按压所述解锁组件时,所述解锁组件驱动所述卡合部和/或所述卡接部滑动,以解除所述锁止组件和所述卡接部的配合。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述连接模块设置有装配槽,所述第一气流连接部设于所述装配槽的底部,所述装配槽的底部形成所述第一组装面,所述美容头安装入所述装配槽内,所述第一组装面与第二组装面接触或抵接;所述连接模块还包括活动限位件,所述活动限位件可滑动地设于所述装配槽的底部的内侧,所述装配槽的底部设有扣位活动孔,所述活动限位件具有设于所述扣位活动孔处的卡合部,所述第二组装面上设有卡接部,所述活动限位件具有使所述卡接部与卡合部通过所述扣位活动孔卡接配合的锁止位置、以及使所述卡接部与卡合部可分离的解锁位置。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述卡合部凸设于所述活动限位件的表面,所述卡合部在滑动方向可活动地设置在所述扣位活动孔内,以用于与卡接部配合;和/或,所述装配槽的底部的内侧面凸设有导向件,所述导向件限定有滑槽结构,所述活动限位件可滑动地设于所述滑槽结构内;和/或,所述主体还包括具有开口的外壳,所述外壳在开口处设置向内的内翻边,所述连接模块还包括连接内壳,所述连接内壳限定出所述装配槽,所述连接内壳安装在外壳内、并设于所述外壳的开口处,以使所述装配槽从所述外壳的开口处露出;所述连接内壳包括内基板和内围板,所述内围板与所述内基板围合形成所述装配槽,所述内基板形成所述装配槽的底部。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一电连接件为PIN针;和/或,所述第二电连接件为PIN针。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述美容头还包括安装壳和设于所述安装壳内的头部电路板,所述负压槽和第二组装面均设于所述安装壳,并位于所述安装壳的相对两侧,所述射频电极安装于所述安装壳,所述头部电路板电性连接所述射频电极;所述第二电连接件一端安装于所述安装壳,并露出所述安装壳而形成pin点,以与所述第一电连接件电连接;所述第二电连接件的另一端弹性接触或抵接于所述头部电路板,以与所述头部电路板电连接;和/或,所述主体还包括设于所述主体内的主体电路板,所述第一电连接件一端安装于所述主体电路板,另一端从所述第一组装面穿出,以弹性接触或抵接于所述第二电连接件;和/或,所述第一电连接件设有多个。
在本申请的一些实施例中,当所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一气流连接部插入第二气流连接部,或,所述第二气流连接部插入所述第二气流连接部,以使得所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述主体包括连接模块:所述连接模块设置有装配槽,所述装配槽的底壁形成所述第一组装面,所述第一气流连接部从所述第一组装面凸出,以插入第二气流连接部,以使得所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通;或,所述美容头设置有装配槽,所述装配槽的底壁形成所述第二组装面,所述第二气流连接部从所述第二组装面凸出,以插入第一气流连接部,以使得所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述美容头还包括安装壳,所述安装壳包括壳体和盖体,所述壳体包括负压基板、连接于所述负压基板并朝一侧凸设的负压围板、以及连接于所述负压围板并朝另一侧凸设的容纳围板,所述负压围板与所述负压基板形成所述负压槽,所述射频电极设于所述负压围板和/或所述负压基板;所述负压围板与所述容纳围板形成具有敞口的容纳腔,所述盖体安装于所述容纳腔的敞口处,所述第二组装面设于所述盖体的外侧面,所述第二电连接件安装于所述盖体,并从所述盖体露出;所述第二气流连接部从所述负压槽的底部朝所述盖体延伸,并从所述盖体露出,以与所述第一气流部连通。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二气流连接部为负压管道,盖体上设置有负压孔,所述第二气流连接部与负压孔连接,以从所述盖体露出;和/或,所述第二气流连接部内设有透气件;和/或,所述第二电连接件为PIN针,所述美容头还包括设于所述安装壳内的头部电路板,所述头部电路板电性连接所述射频电极;所述第二电连接件一端安装于所述盖体,并露出所述盖体而形成pin点,以与所述第一电连接件电连接;所述第二电连接件的另一端弹性接触或抵接于所述头部电路板,以与所述头部电路板电连接;和/或,所述主体还包括具有开口的外壳和连接模块,所述外壳在开口处设置向内的内翻边,所述连接模块包括所述第一电连接件、第一气流连接部和连接内壳,所述连接内壳限定出装配槽,所述连接内壳安装在外壳内、并设于所述外壳的开口处,以使所述装配槽从所述外壳的开口处露出;所述装配槽的底部形成所述第一组装面,所述美容头安装入所述装配槽内,所述第一组装面与第二组装面接触或抵接;所述第一气流连接部设于所述装配槽的底部,并凸出于所述第一组装面,以插入所述第二气流连接部内,以与所述第二气流连接部连通。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述外壳包括第一半壳、第二半壳和具有开口和所述内翻边的头壳,所述第一半壳连接于第二半壳的一侧,以形成拿持部,所述第一半壳的一端具有向靠近所述第二半壳的一侧折弯倾斜而在第一倾斜方向设置的弯折部,所述弯折部凸出于所述第二半壳,所述头壳连接于所述弯折部与所述第二半壳,所述头壳具有与所述弯折部配合连接的组装凹口,所述开口用于朝向用户面部设置;所述连接内壳设于所述头壳内。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一气流连接部为气流连接管,所述气流连接管凸出于所述第一组装面,以插入所述第二气流连接部内,以与所述第二气流连接部连通。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述主体还包括密封圈,所述密封圈套设于所述气流连接管外周,以密封所述气流连接管与第二气流连接部。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述主体还包括具有开口的外壳、连接模块和设于所述外壳内的主体电路板,所述外壳在开口处设置向内的内翻边,所述连接模块包括所述第一电连接件、第一气流连接部和连接内壳,所述连接内壳限定出装配槽,所述连接内壳
安装在外壳内、并设于所述外壳的开口处,以使所述装配槽从所述外壳的开口处露出;所述第一气流连接部设于所述装配槽的底部,所述装配槽的底部形成所述第一组装面,所述美容头安装入所述装配槽内,所述第一组装面与第二组装面接触或抵接;所述主体电路板设于所述装配槽的底部的内侧,所述第一电连接件为PIN针,所述第一电连接件一端安装于所述主体电路板,另一端从所述第一组装面穿出,以弹性接触或抵接于所述第二电连接件;所述连接模块还包括活动限位件,所述活动限位件可滑动地设于所述装配槽的底部的内侧,所述装配槽的底部设有扣位活动孔,所述活动限位件具有设于所述扣位活动孔处的卡合部,所述第二组装面上设有卡接部,所述活动限位件具有使所述卡接部与卡合部通过所述扣位活动孔卡接配合的锁止位置、以及使所述卡接部与卡合部可分离的解锁位置;所述活动限位件为环状结构,所述第一电连接件设于该环状结构外侧,所述第一气流连接部设于所述该环状结构内侧。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述主体还包括气流驱动件:所述气流驱动件连通所述第一气流连接部,用于驱动气流在所述第一气流连接部流动。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述美容头的第二组装面与所述主体的第一组装面之间形成排气通道,所述排气通道与所述气流驱动件连通,以排出所述气流驱动件驱动的气体。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第二组装面设置有排气槽,所述排气槽与所述第一组装面形成所述排气通道。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述主体还包括气流驱动件:所述气流驱动件连通所述第一气流连接部,用于驱动气流在所述第一气流连接部流动;所述气流驱动件包括气泵,所述主控板与所述气泵电性连接,以控制所述气泵。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部可拆卸连接,以使所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通;和/或,第二气流连接部的连接通道的通气面积小于所述负压槽的槽口面积。
在本申请的一些实施例中,所述第一电连接件与所述第二电连接件在拆卸方向上接触或抵接,以使在所述美容头与所述主体连接时,使所述第一电连接件与所述第二电连接件电性连接;和/或,第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部在拆卸方向上对接,以使在所述美容头与所述主体连接时,使所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通。
图1示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的结构示意图。
图2示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的一视角的分解示意图。
图3示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的另一视角的分解示意图。
图4示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的外壳的分解示意图。
图5示出了图4中A区域的局部放大图。
图6示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的连接模块和头壳的结构示意图。
图7示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的连接模块的结构示意图。
图8示出了本申请一种实施方式中的连接模块的另一视角的结构示意图。
图9示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的连接模块的结构示意图,其中,解锁
按钮被按压以驱动活动限位件靠近抵持件。
图10示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的连接模块的结构示意图,其中,解锁按钮未被按压,锁止弹性件恢复形状以驱动活动限位件远离抵持件。
图11示出了本申请一种实施方式中的连接模块的另一视角的结构示意图。
图12示出了图11中B区域的局部放大图。
图13示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的局部的剖视图。
图14示出了本申请一种实施方式中的头壳和连接模块的结构示意图,其中,连接模块包括主体电路板。
图15示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头的结构示意图。
图16示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头的壳体的结构示意图。
图17示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头的结构示意图。
图18示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头的壳体的结构示意图。
图19示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头的结构示意图,其中,射频电极的数量为四个。
图20示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头的结构示意图,其中,盖体被拆离。
图21示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头的剖视图,其中,剖视位置为一组第二电连接件的位置。
图22示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的局部的剖视图。
图23示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪的结构示意图,其中,后壳被拆离。
图24示出了本申请一种实施方式中的气源组件的结构示意图,其中,负压槽的气体被气泵抽吸。
图25示出了本申请一种实施方式中的气源组件的结构示意图,其中,负压槽经由泄气口吸气。
图26示出了本申请一种实施方式中的气路切换模块的结构示意图。
图27示出了本申请一种实施方式中的后壳和显示模块的分解示意图。
图28示出了本申请一种实施方式中的按压件的结构示意图。
图29示出了本申请一种实施方式中的气路切换模块的结构示意图。
图30示出了本申请另一种实施方式中的美容仪的爆炸示意图。
图31示出了本申请另一种实施方式中的美容仪的剖视图。
如下具体实施方式将结合上述附图进一步说明本申请。
以下由特定的具体实施例说明本申请的实施方式,本领域技术人员可由本说明书所揭示的内容轻易地了解本申请的其他优点及功效。虽然本申请的描述将结合较佳实施例一起介绍,但这并不代表此申请的特征仅限于该实施方式。恰恰相反,结合实施方式作申请介绍的目的是为了覆盖基于本申请的权利要求而有可能延伸出的其它选择或改造。为了提供对本申请的深度了解,以下描述中将包含许多具体的细节。本申请也可以不使用这些细节实施。此外,为了避免混乱或模糊本申请的重点,有些具体细节将在描述中被省略。需要说明的是,在不冲突的情况下,本申请中的实施例及实施例中的特征可以
相互组合。
以下,如果有用到,术语“第一”、“第二”等仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”等的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是两个或两个以上。“上”、“下”、“左”、“右”等方位术语是相对于附图中的部件示意置放的方位来定义的,应当理解到,这些方向性术语是相对的概念,它们用于相对于的描述和澄清,其可以根据附图中部件所放置的方位的变化而相应地发生变化。“前”、“后”等方位属于是根据产品的使用状态或者放置状态来定义的,应当理解到,这些方向性术语是相对的概念,它们用于相对于的描述和澄清,其可以根据不同使用场景或不同使用习惯而相应地发生变化。
在本申请中,如果有用到,除非另有明确的规定和限定,术语“连接”应做广义理解,例如,“连接”可以是固定连接,也可以是可拆卸连接,或成一体;可以是直接相连,也可以通过中间媒介间接相连。本文所使用的术语“和/或”包括一个或多个相关的所列项目的任意的和所有的组合。
在下述实施例结合示意图进行详细描述时,为便于说明,表示器件局部结构的图会不依一般比例作局部放大,而且所述示意图只是示例,其在此不应限制本申请保护的范围。
为使本申请的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请的实施方式作进一步地详细描述。
图1示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的结构示意图。
如图1所示,这种美容仪001包括主体010和美容头030,美容头030包括负压槽4111和射频电极420,负压槽4111用于负压吸附用户皮肤,以将皮肤吸附到负压槽4111内,射频电极420用于对用户皮肤释放射频电流。美容头030可拆卸地设置于主体010的工作端011,当美容头030与主体010连接时,负压槽4111与主体010连通以用于产生负压,射频电极420与主体010电性连接以使得主体010向射频电极420提供电能。
这种美容仪001为射频美容仪001。当头部设置于主体010的工作端011时,美容头030可以作用于用户皮肤。通过主体010对美容头030提供负压,使得用户皮肤吸附于美容头030,并通过美容头030对用户皮肤发射射频电流,实现美容效果。
具体来说,当使用美容仪001时,将美容头030可拆卸连接于主体010,以实现射频电极420与主体010电性连接以及负压槽4111与主体010连通,从而主体010可通过负压槽4111将皮肤吸入负压槽4111内后,再通过射频电极420对吸入后的皮肤发出射频电流,从而可使射频电流穿透被吸入负压槽4111内的皮肤,从而可增大射频能量的射入深度,从而可提高美容效果。美容头030与主体010可拆卸连接使得美容头030可以与主体010分离,分别进行保存。而需要使用时,再组装美容头030和主体010,以实现射频电极420与主体010电性连接以及负压槽4111与主体010连通即可。此外,通过美容头030与主体010的可拆卸连接,用户可根据使用需要更换不同的美容头030,如更换具有不同负压槽4111的美容头030,又如更换具有不同数量的射频电极420的美容头030,再如更换具有不同大小的射频电极420的美容头030等,以便于满足用户的多样化需求。
且可以理解的是,本申请通过将美容头030与主体010分体设计,并使负压槽4111
设于美容头030,当美容头030安装到主体010上时,即可实现负压槽4111与主体010的连通,从而不必考虑气道软管是否与美容头030或气泵510分离,从而可提高组装效率。
具体的,美容头030具有在工作时朝向甚至贴合于面部皮肤的贴肤面410c,射频电极420和负压槽4111设于贴肤面410c。
这种美容仪001还包括控制组件,以用于控制射频电极420等工作。可选地,控制组件设置于外壳100内,以形成主体010的一部分。
进一步地,主体010包括第一电连接件240,美容头030还包括第二电连接件470,第二电连接件470与射频电极420电性连接,美容头030与主体010连接时,第一电连接件240与第二电连接件470电性连接,以使得主体010向射频电极420提供电能。这样,可通过第一电连接件240与第二电连接件470实现对射频电极420的控制。
进一步地,主体010包括第一气流连接部232,美容头030还包括与负压槽4111连通的第二气流连接部4114,美容头030与主体010连接时,第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通,以使得负压槽4111与主体010连通。如此,通过在美容头030上设置第一气流连接部232,并在主体010上设置与气流驱动件连接的第一气流连接部232,可实现只需要当将美容头030安装在主体010上时,使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通即可实现主体010与负压槽4111连通,从而可进一步降低组装难度。
进一步地,射频电极420靠近负压槽4111设置,或者射频电极420至少部分地延伸至负压槽4111的内壁,以使得射频电极420对被负压槽4111负压吸附的皮肤释放射频电流。其中,射频电极420靠近负压槽4111设置定位为射频电极420与负压槽4111的内壁的距离小于等于12mm。如此,通过使射频电极420靠近负压槽4111设置,或者射频电极420至少部分地延伸至负压槽4111的内壁,可减少射频路径,提高美容效果。
其中,第一电连接件240和第一气流连接部232构成下述连接模块200的一部分。
其中,主体010包括连接模块200,美容头030可拆卸连接于连接模块200,以使美容头030与主体010可拆卸连接。第一电连接件240和第一气流连接部232等均为连接模块200的一部分。
需要说明的是,本申请中所说的连接模块200,既可以为独立的模块,也可以为依托主体010其他特征而形成的特征集合,其与其他部件的关系是相互依托的,只是为了便于描述而将其单独列出说明。
在一部分实施例中,可使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114可拆卸连接,以使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通。这样当美容头030安装在主体010上的同时,使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连接,以使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通;当需要将美容头030拆卸下时,可使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114拆卸。如可使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114其中之一为插嘴,另一为设有插孔的气道连接件,插嘴可插接在插孔内。当然也可将第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114设置为其他结构形式,只需要满足当美容头030安装/连接于主体010时,第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连接且连通,当美容头030拆下时,第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114能够分离即可。
在一部分实施例中,第二气流连接部4114的连接通道的通气面积小于负压槽4111
的槽口面积。其中,第二气流连接部4114的连接通道的通气面积是指该连接通道的与第一气流连接部232连接处的通气面积。如此,可使负压槽4111具有较大的吸附面积,而用于抽吸气体的通道较细,以便于与气泵510连接和控制负压槽4111抽吸。
进一步的,主体010具有第一组装面212b,美容头030具有第二组装面412a,当美容头030与主体010连接时,第一组装面212b与第二组装面412a对应设置。
其中,第一电连接件240从第一组装面212b露出于主体010,第二电连接件470从第二组装面412a露出于美容头030,以在美容头030与主体010连接时,使第一电连接件240与第二电连接件470电性连接。
其中,第一气流连接部232从第一组装面212b露出于主体010,第二气流连接部4114从第二组装面412a露出于美容头030,以在美容头030与主体010连接时,使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通。
可以理解第一组装面212b与第二组装面412a分别受主体010与美容头030的形状限制,但只要满足当美容头030与主体010连接时,第一组装面212b与第二组装面412a对应设置即可。如,美容头030具有与贴肤面410c相背设置的相对面,该相对面即可形成第二组装面412a,第一组装面212b也可为主体010上在工作时朝向面部皮肤的表面;又如,当主体010上形成有装配槽212a时,第一组装面212b既可以为该装配槽212a的底部,又可以为该装配槽212a的内周壁。
这样,通过使第一电连接件240从第一组装面212b露出于主体010,第二电连接件470从第二组装面412a露出于美容头030,能够实现当美容头030安装到主体010上时即可实现第一电连接件240与第二电连接件470电性连接。通过使第一气流连接部232从第一组装面212b露出于主体010,第二气流连接部4114从第二组装面412a露出于美容头030,能够实现当美容头030安装到主体010上时即可实现第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通,从而可提高使用便捷性。
具体的,当美容头030与主体010连接时,第一组装面212b与第二组装面412a接触或抵接。如此便于对美容头030与主体010定位。
进一步地,当美容头030与主体010连接时,第一组装面212b与第二组装面412a拆卸方向上对应设置。其中拆卸方向为当拆卸或安装美容头030与主体010时,美容头030远离或靠近主体010的方向。举例来说,当第二组装面412a为上述相对面时,第一组装面212b为主体010上在工作时朝向面部皮肤的、且与上述相对面相对的侧面;当第一组装面212b为上述装配槽212a的底部时,第二组装面412a为美容头030上对应该底部的侧面(如上述的相对面)。拆卸方向则可以平行于第一倾斜方向U。可选的,当拆卸方向平行于第一倾斜方向U时,第一电连接件240和第一气流连接部232中的至少一个沿第一倾斜方向U延伸。
进一步地,第一电连接件240与第二电连接件470在拆卸方向上接触或抵接,以使在美容头030与主体010连接时,使第一电连接件240与第二电连接件470电性连接。如此便于将第一电连接件240与第二电连接件470电性连接。
进一步地,第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114在拆卸方向上对接,以使在美容头030与主体010连接时,使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通。如此便于将第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通。
这样,可减少在拆装美容头030的过程中损坏第一电连接件240、第二电连接件470、
第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114的风险,也可降低第一电连接件240、第二电连接件470、第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114的设计难度,降低设计成本。
在一些实施例中,美容头030或主体010设置有装配槽212a,装配槽212a的底部形成第一组装面212b或第二组装面412a,以使得美容头030至少部分地装入主体010的装配槽212a或主体010装入美容头030的装配槽212a,并限制连接模块200和美容头030的相对位置。如此,通过设置装配槽212a,当工作时,面部皮肤会接触美容头030,通过设置装配槽212a,可利用装配槽212a的侧壁对美容头030进行支撑,如此可有利于提高美容头030的设置稳定性,从而提高工作时的稳定性。
具体的,第一组装面212b设于连接模块200。
具体的,连接模块200或美容头030设置有装配槽212a,装配槽212a的底部/底壁形成第一组装面212b或第二组装面412a,以使得美容头030装入连接模块200的装配槽212a或连接模块200装入美容头030的装配槽212a,并限制连接模块200和美容头030的相对位置。
进一步地,第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114的可拆卸连接方式有很多种,如当美容头030与主体010连接时,第一气流连接部232插入第二气流连接部4114,或,第二气流连接部4114插入第一气流连接部232,以使得第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通。如此,通过插装的方式可快速实现可拆卸连接,且便于密封。
如在一实施例中,连接模块200设置有装配槽212a,装配槽212a的底壁形成第一组装面212b,第一气流连接部232从第一组装面212b凸出,以插入第二气流连接部4114,以使得第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通。在另一实施例中,美容头030设置有装配槽212a,装配槽212a的底壁形成第二组装面412a,第二气流连接部4114从第二组装面412a凸出,以插入第一气流连接部232,以使得第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通。
图2示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的一视角的分解示意图。图3示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的另一视角的分解示意图。
请参阅图2和图3,主体010包括外壳100。外壳100包括第一半壳、第二半壳和头壳110。其中第一半壳和第二半壳可以不为严格地平分一半,也即第一半壳可以明显地比第二半壳大,也可以明显地比第二半壳小,甚至可以使第一半壳和第二半壳其中之一为板状结构。
进一步地,第一半壳的一端具有向靠近第二半壳的一侧折弯倾斜而在第一倾斜方向U设置的弯折部121,弯折部121能够适配头壳110,以便组装头壳110、第一半壳和第二半壳。
为了便于描述,在图1状态下,下文将第一半壳定义为后壳120,第二半壳定义为前壳130。其中,后壳120整体沿第一方向X延伸,前壳130整体沿第一方向X延伸,弯折部121向前倾斜折弯形成,头壳110向前倾斜地设置,以使头壳110能够设置多个向前倾斜地朝设的射频电极420,以通过射频电极420向用户皮肤释放射频电流。其中,多个射频电极420向前倾斜地朝设是指多个射频电极420向第一半壳靠近第二半壳的一侧倾斜地朝设。
其中,前壳130和后壳120配合形成有拿持部101,便于用户的手拿持美容仪001。其中,弯折部121凸出于前壳130,头壳110连接于弯折部121和前壳130。具体的,拿
持部101沿第一方向X延伸,弯折部121位于拿持部101的一端,且倾斜于第一方向X延伸。具体的,前壳130并不直接与弯折部121配合,使得前壳130和后壳120连接后,弯折部121呈现凸出于前壳130的状态。
具体的,头壳110具有朝肤板011a,当美容仪001需要作用于皮肤时,朝肤板011a朝向用户皮肤。
在一部分实施例中,如图2和3所示,头壳110用于安装美容头030,如可将美容头030安装于朝肤板011a上;在另一部分实施例中,如图30和31所示,头壳110用于形成美容头030,其上(具体可为朝肤板011a)用于安装射频电极420和冷敷件910等。
具体来说,头壳110具有与弯折部121配合连接的组装凹口5122,头壳110通过组装凹口5122可拆卸地安装于弯折部121与第二半壳517。
这样,通过使第一半壳设置凸出第二半壳的弯折部121,头壳110上对应设置配合使用的组装凹口5122,可使得头壳110与第一半壳、第二半壳围合形成外壳100的容置腔100a。而且通过这种设置方式,在制造头壳110时,可便于头壳110脱模,从而降低制造难度;且在组装时,由于组装凹口5122的设置,可增大组装空间,以便于安装射频电极420、冷敷件910等特征;或便于安装连接模块200。
以下先主要以如图2和3所示的头壳110用于安装美容头030的实施例进行说明。
在图2和3所示的实施例中,头壳110包括基板110b和围板110c,基板110b用于形成朝肤板011a,即基板110b为朝肤板011a,组装凹口5122形成于围板110c。在一些实施例中,围板110c连接于基板110b的周缘,使得头壳110大致呈中空的结构。
其中,围板110c包括围板本体111和组装件113。围板本体111为中空结构,围板本体111连接于基板110b的周缘,内部与基板110b配合形成安装腔110a,以便安装用于配合美容头030的连接模块200等。组装件113设置于围板本体111的一端,用于配合后壳120和前壳130,以便将后壳120和前壳130连接于头壳110。
连接模块200从围板本体111的另一端露出,从而便于美容头030和连接模块200配合连接。围板本体111背离组装件113的一端平整设置,以便连接模块200容置于安装腔110a内,并从安装腔110a背离组装件113的一端露出。
可选择性地,组装件113和围板本体111一体成型,提高头壳110的强度,也便于头壳110的生产制备。
组装件113包括第一头壳组装部1131和第二头壳组装部1132。其中,第一头壳组装部1131用于与后壳120连接,第二头壳组装部1132用于与前壳130连接。当头壳110、前壳130和后壳120连接后,前壳130和后壳120大致沿第一方向X延伸,头壳110沿第一倾斜方向U延伸,第一倾斜方向U倾斜于第一方向X。第一倾斜方向U与第一方向X的夹角为20-80°,如可取22°、24°、26°、28°、30°、32°、34°、36°、38°、40°、42°、44°、46°、48°、50°、52°、54°、56°、58°、60°、62°、64°、66°、68°、70°、75°、78°或80°等。
在一实施例中,第一倾斜方向U与第一方向X的夹角为可选为36°-63°。可选择性地,第一倾斜方向U与第一方向X的夹角为37°。
可以理解,由于头壳110用于安装美容头030或用于形成美容头030,通过使第一倾斜方向U与第一方向X的夹角为20-80°或36°-63°,可使美容头030的贴肤面410c也呈倾斜设置,从而可使得用于在拿持美容仪001作用于面部时,避免手臂抬的过高,
从而可以实现更省力的美容。
总而言之,通过以上设置,一方面,使得头壳110装配美容头030后,用户手持前壳130和后壳120形成的拿持部101时,便于美容头030作用于用户皮肤(如脸部),且不用抬高手臂比较省力。另一方面,又可使得美容仪001在第二方向Y的尺寸保持在较小的范围,便于存放美容仪001。
其中,第一倾斜方向U位于第一方向X和第二方向Y之间,第二方向Y垂直于第一方向X。第一方向X形成美容仪001的长度方向。第二方向Y形成美容仪001的厚度方向。垂直于第一方向X和第二方向Y的第三方向Z形成美容仪001的宽度方向。
图4示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的外壳100的分解示意图。
请结合参阅图3和图4,沿垂直于第一倾斜方向U的第二倾斜方向V,从远离第二头壳组装部1132到靠近第二头壳组装部1132,第一头壳组装部1131包括第一头壳区域11311、第二头壳区域11312和第三头壳区域11313。第一头壳区域11311和第二头壳区域11312呈钝角布置,第二头壳区域11312和第三头壳区域11313呈钝角布置,以用于形成组装凹口11314,且使组装凹口11314呈扩大状设置,以进一步便于脱模和增大组装空间。
其中,第一头壳区域11311在头壳110形成的缺口大致垂直于第一倾斜方向U。第二头壳区域11312在头壳110形成的缺口大致垂直于第二方向Y。第三头壳区域11313在头壳110形成的缺口大致垂直于第一倾斜方向U。
其中,第一头壳区域11311和第二头壳区域11312弧形过渡,第二头壳区域11312和第三头壳区域11313弧形过渡。如此,以便于出模。
其中,第一头壳区域11311和第二头壳区域11312之间的区域形成组装凹口11314。
具体的,使得从靠近第一头壳区域11311到靠近第三头壳区域11313,头壳110与第二头壳区域11312对应的部分在第一倾斜方向U上的尺寸逐渐增大。
具体的,沿第一倾斜方向U,围板本体111对应第一头壳区域11311的延伸尺寸,小于围板本体111对应第二头壳区域11312的延伸尺寸。沿第一倾斜方向U,围板本体111对应第二头壳区域11312的延伸尺寸,小于围板本体111对应第三头壳区域11313的延伸尺寸,以用于形成组装凹口11314。
头壳110的组装凹口11314用于与弯折部121配合连接。
可以理解地,组装凹口11314也可以形成于基板110b和围板110c。在部分实施例中,围板110c凸出并连接于基板110b的部分周缘,此时组装凹口11314可以形成于基板110b和围板110c之间的位置。
进一步地,头壳110与第一头壳区域11311对应的部分在第一倾斜方向U上延伸较小的尺寸,当组装头壳110和连接模块200时,便于工具从第一头壳区域11311对应的缺口伸入头壳110内,降低组装难度和成本,提高组装良率。而且头壳110在生产制备时,也容易出模。
在本申请中,头壳110可以采用注塑成型的形式生产,在注塑成型后,对头壳110出模时,由于头壳110形成有组装凹口11314,方便出模,如方便头壳110沿第一倾斜方向U或者沿第一头壳区域11311到第二头壳区域11312的方向出模。
其中,第一头壳组装部1131通过第三头壳区域11313过渡至第二头壳组装部1132,便于后壳120组装于头壳110的同时与前壳130连接。弧形过渡即从一个区域过渡至另
一个区域的部分为弧形,其中,第一头壳区域11311和第二头壳区域11312弧形过渡,为第一头壳区域11311与围板本体111连接处的轮廓过渡至第二头壳区域11312与围板本体111连接处的轮廓为弧形,从而防止出模时尖端变形,且便于对位组装。
其中,后壳120设置有第一后壳组装部1201,第一后壳组装部1201用于配合第一头壳组装部1131,从而实现头壳110和后壳120的连接。
其中,后壳120具有第一容置槽120a,前壳130具有第二容置槽130a,第一容置槽120a与第二容置槽130a共同形成在前壳130和后壳120之间的容置腔100a。
其中,第一后壳组装部1201包括第一后壳区域12011、第二后壳区域12012和第三后壳区域12013。第一后壳区域12011与第一头壳区域11311对应,第二后壳区域12012与第二头壳区域11312对应,也即第一后壳区域12011和第二后壳区域12012与组装凹口11314对应,第三后壳区域12013与第三头壳区域11313对应。可选的,第一后壳区域12011和第二后壳区域12012弧形过渡。
当后壳120与头壳110连接时,第一后壳区域12011形成的缺口大致垂直于延伸方向,第二后壳区域12012形成的缺口大致垂直于第二方向Y,第三后壳区域12013形成的缺口大致垂直于延伸方向。
其中,第一后壳区域12011、第二后壳区域12012和第三后壳区域12013形成于弯折部121。
组装前壳130、后壳120和头壳110时,可以将后壳120沿第二方向Y靠近头壳110,以使得头壳110与后壳120连接,并与前壳130连接以使得第一容置槽120a和第二容置槽130a形成容置腔100a。
其中,第一头壳组装部1131设置有第一头壳卡合件11315,后壳120在第一后壳组装部1201设置有第一后壳卡合件12015。第一头壳卡合件11315和第一后壳卡合件12015卡接配合,可使得头壳110和后壳120卡合。
其中,第一头壳组装部1131的外壁面与围板本体111的外壁面不共面,以使得第一头壳组装部1131和围板本体111之间形成第一台阶。
当后壳120与头壳110连接时,后壳120贴合于第一台阶的底壁,且后壳120靠近头壳110的一端抵接于第一台阶的侧壁。其中,第一台阶的底壁即第一头壳组装部1131的外周,第一台阶的侧壁即围板本体111朝向第一头壳组装部1131的端面。后壳120抵接第一台阶的侧壁,可以限制后壳120沿第一方向X相对于头壳110活动,且可便于使后壳120的外壁面与围板本体111的外壁面共面或光滑过渡,从而提高壳体411外观的平整性。
可选择性地,第一头壳卡合件11315为卡孔,第一后壳卡合件12015为卡扣。卡扣能够弹性变形以进入卡孔内,当卡扣卡进入卡孔内之后,卡扣弹性恢复形状以实现卡扣和卡孔的卡合。
可选择性地,第一头壳组装部1131设置有第一头壳贴合件,后壳120在第一后壳组装部1201设置有第一后壳贴合件。第一头壳贴合件和第一后壳贴合件紧贴配合,可使得头壳110和后壳120连接。可选择性地,第一头壳贴合件为磁性件,第一后壳贴合件为磁性件。第一头壳贴合件和第一后壳贴合件能够磁吸配合。可选择性地,第一头壳贴合件为粘合件,第一后壳贴合件为粘合表面。第一头壳贴合件和第一后壳贴合件能够粘贴配合。
当前壳130与头壳110连接时,前壳130大致沿第一方向X延伸。沿第二方向Y,前壳130的尺寸为后壳120尺寸的0.2-0.25倍。使得后壳120的第一容置槽120a构成容置腔100a的大部分,而前壳130的第二容置槽130a仅构成容置腔100a的小部分。当需要拆离外壳100以维护美容仪001时,仅仅将后壳120拆离,即可使得美容仪001的内部元件露出,并在拆离后壳120的位置形成较大的操作窗口,以便操作,如维护等。
具体的,前壳130还设置有第一前壳组装部1301。第一前壳组装部1301与第二头壳组装部1132配合以装配前壳130和头壳110。第二头壳组装部1132设置有第二头壳卡合件11321,第一前壳组装部1301设置有第一前壳卡合件13011。
这样,通过第二头壳卡合件11321和第一前壳卡合件13011卡接配合,可使得头壳110和前壳130卡合。
具体的,第二头壳组装部1132和围板本体111之间形成第二台阶。当前壳130与头壳110连接时,前壳130贴合于第二台阶的底壁,且前壳130靠近头壳110的一端抵接于第二台阶的侧壁。其中,第二台阶的底壁即第二头壳组装部1132的外周,第二台阶的侧壁即围板本体111朝向第二头壳组装部1132的端面。
如此,前壳130抵接第二台阶的侧壁,可以限制前壳130沿第一方向X相对于头壳110活动。
可选择性地,第二头壳组装部1132设置有第二头壳贴合件,第一前壳组装部1301设置有第一前壳贴合件。第二头壳贴合件和第一前壳贴合件紧贴配合,可使得头壳和前壳贴合。可选择性地,第二头壳贴合件为磁性件,第一前壳贴合件为磁性件。第二头壳贴合件和第一前壳贴合件能够磁吸配合。可选择性地,第二头壳贴合件为粘合件,第一前壳贴合件为粘合表面。第二头壳贴合件和第一前壳贴合件能够粘贴配合。
可以理解地,头壳110也可以不设置组装件113,而通过其他方式实现与前壳130或后壳110的连接。例如,将磁性件嵌合在头壳110内部,通过磁吸的形式使得头壳110和后壳120连接,以及通过磁性的形式使得头壳110和前壳130连接。
图5示出了图4中A区域的局部放大图。
请结合参阅图4和图5,可选择性地,第二头壳卡合件11321为卡合槽,第一前壳卡合件13011为卡合块。
具体的,卡合槽大致呈T型,具有沿第一方向X的第一头壳卡合段11322和第二头壳卡合段11323。卡合块的尺寸和卡合槽匹配。当卡合块沿第二方向Y插入卡合槽内之后,卡合槽会限制卡合块沿第一方向X脱落卡合槽,从而限制前壳130沿第一方向X远离头壳110。且,T型卡合结构的结构强度较大,卡合稳定性较高。
可选地,第一头壳卡合段11322沿第三方向Z的尺寸大于第二头壳卡合段11323沿第三方向Z的尺寸。
可选择性地,前壳130还设置有卡位件1304,卡位件1304卡接于第二头壳组装部1132,以限制前壳130和头壳110沿第二方向Y相对运动。
可选择性地,第二头壳组装部1132的延伸方向倾斜于第二方向Y。
当前壳130与头壳110连接时,围板本体111还能够在第二方向Y上抵接前壳130,以限制前壳130沿第二方向Y脱离头壳110。
第二头壳组装部1132的延伸方向倾斜于第二方向Y的角度为3-10°。可选择性地,第二头壳组装部1132的延伸方向倾斜于第二方向Y的角度为6°,以便前壳130沿第二
方向Y与头壳110配合,又能够使得围板本体111在第二方向Y上抵接前壳130,以限制前壳130沿第二方向Y脱离头壳110。第二头壳组装部1132的延伸方向,即第二头壳组装部1132背离第一头壳组装部1131延伸的方向。
进一步地,如图3和4所示,前壳130在背离头壳110的一端具有尾盖部分131。如此,当前壳130拆卸下后,可以暴露出更多的操作空间,以便于组装或维修等。
进一步地,如图3和4所示,尾盖部分131倾斜于第一方向X,且向后壳120的方向延伸。与之对应地,在一实施例中,后壳120从靠近前壳130的位置到远离前壳130的位置,在第一方向X上的尺寸逐渐增大。后壳120靠近前壳130的一端沿第一方向X的尺寸最小。
这样,当前壳130与头壳110连接时,前壳130和头壳110连接处形成扩口,即沿第二方向Y靠近前壳130到远离前壳130,沿第一方向X的装配尺寸增大,从而便于将后壳120装配于扩口处。可以理解,若沿第二方向Y靠近前壳130到远离前壳130,沿第一方向X的装配尺寸缩小,则容易与后壳120产生位置冲突,导致后壳120难以再装配于前壳130和头壳110形成的装配空间内。而本申请中,当前壳130与头壳110连接时,尾盖部分131和头壳110之间形成敞口,而后壳120从第一方向X尺寸最小的一端靠近该敞口,以便将后壳120组装于前壳130和头壳110。
进一步地,如图3和4所示,前壳130还具有第二前壳组装部1302,第二前壳组装部1302用于配合后壳120,以固定前壳130和后壳120的相对位置。
其中,沿第一方向X,从靠近到远离头壳,第二前壳组装部1302依次包括第一前壳区域13021和第二前壳区域13022。第一前壳区域13021整体平行于第一方向延伸,当前壳130与头壳110连接时,第二前壳组装部1302的第一前壳区域13021和第二头壳组装部1132弧形过渡。
进一步地,如图3和4所示,第二前壳组装部1302的第二前壳区域13022位于尾盖部分131,具体的,第二前壳区域13022沿尾盖部分131的外周设置,第一前壳区域13021与第二前壳区域13022弧形过渡。
进一步地,如图3和4所示,后壳120还具有第二后壳组装部1202,沿第一方向X,从靠近到远离头壳,第二后壳组装部1202依次包括第四后壳区域12021和第五后壳区域12022。后壳120的第四后壳区域12021匹配组装部的第一前壳区域13021。后壳120的第五后壳区域12022匹配组装部的第二前壳区域13022。
当后壳120与前壳130连接时,第四后壳区域12021和第一前壳区域13021连接,第五后壳区域12022和第二前壳区域13022连接,使得第一容置槽120a和第二容置槽130a共同形成在前壳130和后壳120之间的容置腔100a。其中,第二前壳区域13022和第五后壳区域12022的连接后,尾盖部分131使得容置腔100a背离头壳110的一端封闭,从而降低异物进入容置腔100a内的风险。
可选择性地,前壳130也可以在尾盖部分131设置功能孔,通过功能孔可以将电源线050引入容置腔100a内,从而对容置腔100a供电。可选择性地,前壳130也可以在尾盖部分131设置通风孔,通风孔使得容置腔100a和美容仪001外部形成气体交换,便于美容仪001的散热及泄压,且,通过将通风孔设置在倾斜的尾盖部分131上,当通风孔为出风口时,可使得在使用时,即使用美容仪001在对面部射频美容时,斜向下吹风散热,从而既可以避免热风吹到用户,也可以避免热风吹到旁边的其他人。
进一步地,第二前壳组装部1302的第一前壳区域13021的外壁面与前壳130的外壁面不共面,以使得第二前壳组装部1302的第一前壳区域13021和前壳130的外壁之间形成第三台阶。当后壳120与前壳130连接时,后壳120贴合于第三台阶的底壁,且后壳120靠近前壳130的一端抵接于第三台阶的侧壁。第三台阶的底壁即第二前壳组装部1302的第一前壳区域13021背离容置腔100a的外周。后壳120抵接第三台阶的侧壁,可以限制后壳120沿第二方向Y相对于前壳130活动。
可选择性地,第二前壳组装部1302在第一前壳区域13021设置有第二前壳卡合件13023,第二后壳组装部1202在第四后壳区域12021设置有第二后壳卡合件12023。第二前壳组装部1302在第二前壳区域13022设置有第三前壳卡合件13024,第二后壳组装部1202在第五后壳区域12022设置有第三后壳卡合件12024。第二前壳卡合件13023与第二后壳卡合件12023卡接配合,可使得第一前壳区域13021和第四后壳区域12021沿第二方向Y相对固定地连接。第三前壳卡合件13024与第三后壳卡合件12024卡接配合,可使得第二前壳区域13022和第五后壳区域12022沿第一方向X相对固定地连接。
可选择性地,第二前壳卡合件13023为卡孔,第二后壳卡合件12023为卡扣。卡扣能够弹性变形以进入卡孔内,当卡扣卡进入卡孔内之后,卡扣弹性恢复形状以实现卡扣和卡孔的卡合。
可选择性地,第二后壳卡合件12023为卡孔,第三前壳卡合件13024为卡扣。卡扣能够弹性变形以进入卡孔内,当卡扣卡进入卡孔内之后,卡扣弹性恢复形状以实现卡扣和卡孔的卡合。
本申请中,在组装头壳110、后壳120和前壳130时,可以先将头壳110和前壳130组装。前壳130的第一前壳卡合件13011与头壳110的第二头壳卡合件11321卡接配合。使得前壳130的第一前壳区域13021和头壳110的第二头壳组装部1132连接,且第一前壳区域13021和第二头壳组装部1132弧形过渡。尾盖部分131和头壳110之间形成敞口。将后壳120的第一容置槽120a朝向前壳130,驱动后壳120进入尾盖部分131和头壳110之间形成的敞口。后壳120的第一后壳组装部1201和头壳110的第一头壳组装部1131连接,后壳120的第二后壳组装部1202和前壳130的第二前壳组装部1302连接。使得头壳110和前壳130均与后壳120连接。头壳110还进一步固定前壳130和头壳110的相对位置,使得头壳110,前壳130和后壳120相对固定地连接以形成容置腔100a。
可选择性地,第二前壳组装部1302在第一前壳区域13021设置有第二前壳贴合件,第二后壳组装部1202在第四后壳区域12021设置有第二后壳贴合件。第二前壳组装部1302在第二前壳区域13022设置有第三前壳贴合件,第二后壳组装部1202在第五后壳区域12022设置有第三后壳贴合件。第二前壳贴合件与第二后壳贴合件紧贴配合,可使得第一前壳区域13021和第四后壳区域12021沿第二方向Y相对固定地连接。第三前壳贴合件与第三后壳贴合件卡接配合,可使得第二前壳区域13022和第五后壳区域12022沿第一方向X相对固定地连接。
可选择性地,第二前壳贴合件为磁性件,第二后壳贴合件为磁性件。第二前壳贴合件和第二后壳贴合件能够磁吸配合。可选择性地,第二前壳贴合件为粘合件,第二后壳贴合件为粘合表面。第二前壳贴合件和第二后壳贴合件能够粘贴配合。
可选择性地,第三前壳贴合件为磁性件,第三后壳贴合件为磁性件。第三前壳贴合件和第三后壳贴合件能够磁吸配合。可选择性地,第三前壳贴合件为粘合件,第三后壳
贴合件为粘合表面。第三前壳贴合件和第三后壳贴合件能够粘贴配合。
请结合参阅图2和图4,控制组件包括主控板310,主控板310与气源组件500连接,用于控制气流驱动件的开启或关闭,和/或,用于控制气路切换模块520在负压模式和泄气模式间切换。
可选地,主控板310为主体010的一部分。主控板310设置于容置腔100a内,主控板310可与射频电极420、气泵510、按键块721等连接。在一些实施例中,主控板310电性连接第一电连接件240,以通过第一电连接件240和第二电连接件470电性连接射频电极420。
可选择性地,前壳130设置有第一卡位槽132。主控板310的一侧卡设于第一卡位槽132内。后壳120设置有第二卡位槽122,主控板310背离前壳130的一侧卡设于第二卡位槽122内。通过第一卡位槽132和第二卡位槽122可以限制主控板310与外壳100的相对位置,以将主控板310固定。
需要组装主控板310与容置腔100a内时,可以先将主控板310的一侧卡设于第一卡位槽132。沿第二方向Y使得后壳120接近前壳130,此时,主控板310对准第二卡位槽122。当前壳130和后壳120装配完成时,主控板310背离前壳130的一侧也卡设于第二卡位槽122内。
图6示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的连接模块200和头壳110的结构示意图。图7示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的连接模块200的结构示意图。
请结合参阅图6和图7,主体010还包括连接模块200(请结合图2)。连接模块200与头壳110连接,并从头壳110露出以便可拆卸连接美容头030。
连接模块200包括连接内壳210和第一电连接件240;第一电连接件240安装于连接内壳210,连接内壳210安装于头壳110,以使得连接模块200整体安装于头壳110。
请结合参阅图6和图7,连接内壳210包括内基板211和内围板212。内围板212设置于内基板211的一面,且内围板212与内基板211围合形成装配槽212a,内基板211形成装配槽212a的底部。头壳110具有开口,装配槽212a从头壳110的开口处露出。
当使用美容仪001时,头壳110的开口朝向用户皮肤(如面部皮肤)。装配槽212a的底壁形成第一组装面212b。第一组装面212b用于配合美容头030的第二组装面412a。连接内壳210的装配槽212a用于美容头030装入,以用于提高美容头030的安装稳定性。
头壳110在开口处设置向内的内翻边114,该内翻边114形成于上文的基板110b,内围板212背离内基板211的一端抵接于头壳110的内翻边114。头壳110的内翻边114限制连接内壳210沿第一倾斜方向U伸出头壳110,并用于隐藏连接内壳210,提高防水性能。
当美容头030需要装入装配槽212a时,美容头030先穿过头壳110的开口,再装入到装配槽212a中。可以理解地,头壳110也可以与连接内壳210一体成型,以使得头壳110与连接内壳210相对固定,并减少组装步骤。
头壳110还具有止位件115。止位件115用于限制连接内壳210沿第一倾斜方向U远离开口。可选择性地,止位件115为止位凸块,止位凸块在安装腔110a内凸出于围板本体111,即止位凸块设于围板本体111的内侧面。当连接内壳210设置于头壳110的安装腔110a内时,止位凸块位于内基板211的远离头壳110开口的一侧,内基板211被止位凸块抵接。内围板212被内翻边114接触或抵接,内基板211被止位凸块抵接,使
得连接内壳210沿第一倾斜方向U相对头壳110的位置被限制。当美容头030插入连接内壳210并对连接内壳210施力时,连接内壳210也不容易相对头壳110沿第一倾斜方向U移动。
具体的,安装腔110a的内轮廓为非圆,连接内壳210的外轮廓也为非圆,使得连接内壳210设置于头壳110内时,连接内壳210不易相对于头壳110绕第一倾斜方向U的轴线转动。
可选择性地,安装腔110a的内轮廓大致呈方形,连接内壳210的外轮廓大致呈方形,使得连接内壳210设置于头壳110内时,连接内壳210不易相对于头壳110绕第一倾斜方向U的轴线转动。
具体的,装配槽212a的内轮廓为非圆,美容头030装入装配槽212a的部分的外轮廓也为非圆,使得美容头030装入装配槽212a的部分设置于头壳110内时,美容头030装入装配槽212a的部分不易相对于头壳110绕第一倾斜方向U的轴线转动。可选择性地,装配槽212a的内轮廓大致呈方形,美容头030装入装配槽212a的部分的外轮廓大致呈方形,使得美容头030装入装配槽212a的部分设置于头壳110内时,美容头030装入装配槽212a的部分不易相对于头壳110绕第一倾斜方向U的轴线转动。
在一些实施例中,连接模块200还包括锁止结构220。锁止结构220包括锁止组件221。
具体的,锁止组件221用于在第一组装面212b与第二组装面412a接触或抵接时连接美容头030,以限制美容头030远离连接模块200和主体010。如此通过设置锁止组件221可实现美容头030与主体010的连接。
在一实施方式中,可选地,锁止组件221用于在第一组装面212b与第二组装面412a接触或抵接时与美容头030卡接配合,以限制美容头030远离连接模块200,如此,可通过卡接的方式限位美容头030与主体010,拆装方便。
其中,锁止组件221包括卡合部,美容头030设置有卡接部4123;卡合部设置于第一组装面212b,卡接部4123设置于第二组装面412a;第一组装面212b与第二组装面412a接触或抵接时,卡合部与卡接部4123配合,并限制美容头030和主体010的相对位置。
进一步地,连接模块200还包括解锁组件222,解锁组件222用于解除锁止组件221与美容头030的配合。如此,可实现拆装。
具体的,解锁组件222作用于锁止组件221;解锁组件222被配置为:按压解锁组件222时,解锁组件222驱动卡合部和/或卡接部4123滑动,以解除锁止组件221和卡接部4123的配合。如此,提高解锁组件222与锁止组件221的关联度,简化设计。
在另一实施方式中,可选地,锁止组件221用于在第一组装面212b与第二组装面412a接触或抵接时磁性吸附美容头030,以限制美容头030远离连接模块200。
在一具体实施例中,锁止组件221用于配合美容头030的卡接部4123,以限制美容头030和连接内壳210(沿第一倾斜方向U,即可拆方向)的相对运动。
在一具体实施例中,锁止结构220还包括解锁组件222。解锁组件222用于解除锁止组件221和卡接部4123的配合,使得美容头030能够相对连接内壳210沿第一倾斜方向U相对运动,从而沿第一倾斜方向U将美容头030从装配槽212a取出。
具体的,连接模块200设置有装配槽212a,第一气流连接部232设于装配槽212a
的底部,装配槽212a的底部形成第一组装面212b,美容头030安装入装配槽212a内,第一组装面212b与第二组装面412a接触或抵接。
可选择性地,连接模块200还可以包括弹出件,弹出件用于在解锁组件222解除锁止组件221与美容头030的配合后,驱动美容头030远离连接模块200。
具体地,弹出件包括第一磁性件和第二磁性件,第一磁性件设置于连接内壳210,第二磁性件设置于安装壳410。第一磁性件与第二磁性件相互排斥,以使得美容头030具有远离连接模块200的趋势。可以理解地,弹出件还可以为弹簧,弹簧设置于连接内壳210或安装壳410,当安装壳410装入装配槽212a时,挤压弹簧使得弹簧储存弹性势能。
可以理解地,锁止组件221也可以包括第一磁性锁止件和第二磁性锁止件。主体010上设置第一磁性锁止件,美容头030上设置第二磁性锁止件。当美容头030靠近主体010时,通过第一磁性锁止件和第二磁性锁止件的磁性吸附,使得主体010磁性吸附美容头030,以限制美容头030远离主体010。
图8示出了本申请一种实施方式中的连接模块200的另一视角的结构示意图。
请结合参阅图7和图8,在一示例性的实施例中,可选择性地,锁止组件221包括活动限位件2211和锁止弹性件2212,活动限位件2211具有卡接部4123。其中,活动限位件2211与连接内壳210滑动配合,即活动限位件2211可滑动地安装于连接内壳210,活动限位件2211具有使卡接部4123与卡合部通过扣位活动孔2112卡接配合的锁止位置、以及使卡接部4123与卡合部可分离的解锁位置,以通过移动活动限位件2211来实现美容头030的安装。
具体来说,活动限位件2211可滑动地设于装配槽212a的底部的内侧,装配槽212a的底部设有扣位活动孔2112,活动限位件2211具有设于扣位活动孔2112处的卡合部,第二组装面412a上设有卡接部4123,活动限位件2211具有使卡接部4123与卡合部通过扣位活动孔2112卡接配合的锁止位置、以及使卡接部4123与卡合部可分离的解锁位置。如此,本申请利用装配槽212a的底部的内侧具有较大的空间,便于设置活动限位件2211,并可为活动限位件2211提供运动空间,可简化设计。而且,通过驱动活动限位件2211的移动即可实现锁止美容头030与主体010,或解锁美容头030与主体010。
具体的,内基板211背离内围板212的一面形成滑动面2111。可选地,滑动面2111垂直于第一倾斜方向U。活动限位件2211能够沿滑动面2111滑动,从而相对美容头030移动。可以理解地,活动限位件2211也可以基于其他部件引导,从而导向活动限位件2211的运动,例如,活动限位件2211也可以基于内基板211靠近内围板212的一面进行导向。
其中,活动限位件2211上设置有卡合部。卡合部凸设于活动限位件2211的表面,卡合部在滑动方向可活动地设置在扣位活动孔2112内,以用于与卡接部4123配合。可选择性地,卡合部用于随着活动限位件2211沿滑动面2111滑动,并配合卡接部4123,使得活动限位件2211与美容头030卡合。
可选择性地,卡合部包括卡勾22111。卡接部4123包括卡槽41231。连接内壳210的内基板211上具有扣位活动孔2112,卡勾22111通过扣位活动孔2112向连接内壳210设置装配槽212a的一面延伸。可选择性地,扣位活动孔2112沿一方向延伸,即其具有一定的长度以避让卡勾22111和卡接部4123,使得伸入扣位活动孔2112的卡勾22111
能够沿滑动方向相对活动限位件2211运动。活动限位件2211沿滑动面2111滑动,能够使得卡勾22111进入到卡槽41231内。当卡勾22111进入卡槽41231时,卡勾22111作用于卡槽41231的内壁,从而限制美容头030沿第一倾斜方向U脱离连接内壳210,此时,美容头030和主体010实现连接,便于实现主体010和美容头030的配合,进而实现负压槽4111与主体010连通以用于产生负压,射频电极420与主体010电性连接以使得主体010向射频电极420提供电能。
可选择性地,活动限位件2211在滑动面2111上沿滑动方向即第二倾斜方向V滑动。第二倾斜方向V垂直于第一倾斜方向U。
进一步地,装配槽212a的底部的内侧面(即滑动面2111)凸设有导向件213,导向件213限定有滑槽结构,活动限位件2211可滑动地设于滑槽结构内。
具体来说,导向件213夹持于活动限位件2211上垂直于第二倾斜方向V的两侧,从而限制活动限位件2211相对连接内壳210沿第二倾斜方向V滑动,而不易偏斜。导向件213背离滑动面2111的一端设置有倒钩2131。倒钩2131向活动限位件2211的方向延伸,倒钩2131作用于活动限位件2211背离滑动面2111的一端,使得活动限位件2211不易沿第一倾斜方向U脱离滑动面2111。
可选择性地,导向件213为弹性元件,通过导向件213的变形使得倒钩2131能够相对滑动面2111位移。当活动限位件2211两侧的导向件213变形后,能够使得活动限位件2211两侧的倒钩2131相互远离,便于将活动限位件2211装配于滑动面2111。随着活动限位件2211接触到滑动面2111,倒钩2131通过导向件213的变形恢复位置并位于活动限位件2211背离滑动面2111的一端,从而限制活动限位件2211沿第一倾斜方向U脱离滑动面2111。可以理解地,导向件213为弹性元件,使得导向件213能够弹性变形。随着导向件213的变形,导向件213上远离滑动面2111的一端的变形量大于靠近滑动面2111的一端的变形量。因此,导向件213的变形使得倒钩2131能够产生足够的位移以便于组装活动限位件2211和连接内壳210,又能够使得导向件213靠近滑动面2111的一端几乎不存在变形,导向件213依然可以限制活动限位件2211在垂直于第二倾斜方向V上的位移。导向件213可以使用弹性材料形成从而形成弹性元件。
可选择性地,锁止弹性件2212设置于活动限位件2211沿第二倾斜方向V的一端。锁止弹性件2212一端抵接于连接内壳210,另一端抵接于活动限位件2211,锁止弹性件2212能够驱动活动限位件2211相对连接内壳210沿第二倾斜方向V滑动。连接内壳210包括设置在滑动面2111的抵持件214。抵持件214凸出于滑动面2111。锁止弹性件2212设置于抵持件214和活动限位件2211之间。锁止弹性件2212可以为压簧,以驱动活动限位件2211沿第二倾斜方向V远离抵持件214。在卡勾22111的端部设置有引导斜面22112,引导斜面22112倾斜于滑动面2111。当美容头030沿第一倾斜方向U安装入装配槽212a内并接触引导斜面22112后,美容头030继续沿倾向方向靠近第一组装面212b,并作用于卡勾22111的引导斜面22112,以驱动卡勾22111沿第二倾斜方向V靠近抵持件214。此时,活动限位件2211和抵持件214共同压缩锁止弹性件2212,当美容头030继续沿第一倾斜方向U靠近第一组装面212b,使得卡勾22111对准美容头030的卡槽41231时,锁止弹性件2212恢复形状,使得卡勾22111沿第二倾斜方向V远离抵持件214并进入卡槽41231内,实现美容头030和连接内壳210沿第一倾斜方向U的锁止。
图9示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的连接模块200的结构示意图,其
中,解锁按钮2221被按压以驱动活动限位件2211靠近抵持件214。图10示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的连接模块200的结构示意图,其中,解锁按钮2221未被按压,锁止弹性件2212恢复形状以驱动活动限位件2211远离抵持件214。
请参阅图9和图10,可选择性地,活动限位件2211设置有导向槽22113。锁止弹性件2212伸入导向槽22113内,导向槽22113的内壁可以接触锁止弹性件2212,从而限制锁止弹性件2212的变形。当活动限位件2211沿第二倾斜方向V相对连接内壳210滑动时,活动限位件2211和抵持件214共同挤压锁止弹性件2212,而导向槽22113的内壁可以尽量限制锁止弹性件2212沿第二倾斜方向V变形,以尽量形成平行于第二倾斜方向V的弹性力。当锁止弹性件2212释放恢复形状以驱动弹性件相对连接内壳210滑动时,锁止弹性件2212的弹性力尽量平行于第二倾斜方向V,可以降低活动限位件2211滑动时的卡涩。
图11示出了本申请一种实施方式中的连接模块200的另一视角的结构示意图。图12示出了图11中B区域的局部放大图。
请结合参阅图7、图11和图12,解锁组件222用于驱动活动限位件2211克服锁止弹性件2212的弹性力以沿第二倾斜方向V靠近抵持件214。在此过程中,卡勾22111沿第二倾斜方向V脱离卡槽41231,以解除美容头030和连接内壳210沿第一倾斜方向U的锁止。
可选择性地,解锁组件222包括解锁按钮2221和解锁弹性件2222。解锁按钮2221一端伸出外壳100,另一端插入安装腔110a内以驱动活动限位件2211滑动。解锁弹性件2222一端作用于解锁按钮2221,另一端作用于连接内壳210。解锁弹性件2222对解锁按钮2221施加远离活动限位件2211的弹性力,使得解锁按钮2221具有远离活动限位件2211的运动趋势。当需要将美容头030从连接内壳210取出时,用户可以按压解锁按钮2221,并通过解锁按钮2221对活动限位件2211施加克服锁止弹性件2212的压力。活动限位件2211沿第二倾斜方向V靠近抵持件214,卡勾22111逐渐脱离卡槽41231。当卡勾22111脱离卡槽41231时,美容头030和连接内壳210沿第一倾斜方向U的锁止被解除,用户即可将美容头030从连接内壳210取出。
可选择性地,头壳110设置有按钮孔1101,解锁按钮2221通过按钮孔1101伸出头壳110,以便用户按压解锁按钮2221。安装腔110a的内壁在设置按钮孔1101的一侧形成引导弧面1103。当连接模块200中连接内壳210和锁止结构220一起装配到安装腔110a内时,引导弧面1103抵接解锁按钮2221,直到解锁按钮2221对准按钮孔1101,并从按钮孔1101伸出。
可选择性地,解锁组件222还包括传动件2223。解锁按钮2221通过传动件2223作用于活动限位件2211,以驱动活动限位件2211沿第二倾斜方向V运动。传动件2223与连接内壳210可活动地连接,在解锁按钮2221或活动限位件2211的驱动下,传动件2223相对连接内壳210运动。连接内壳210在滑动面2111设置有定位轴2113。传动件2223具有相对的第一传动端22231和第二传动端22232。传动件2223的第一传动端22231套设于定位轴2113,并可以相对连接内壳210绕定位轴2113转动。传动件2223的第二传动端22232能够抵接活动限位件2211,以推动活动限位件2211靠近抵持件214。解锁按钮2221具有推杆22211,推杆22211朝向传动件2223设置。当用户按压解锁按钮2221时,能够使得解锁按钮2221的推杆22211推动传动件2223转动,并使得传动件2223
推动活动限位件2211靠近抵持件214。推杆22211作用于传动件2223位于第一传动端22231和第二传动端22232之间的区域,使得传动件2223形成杠杆,推杆22211沿第二倾斜方向V的位移量通过传动件2223放大后再作用于活动限位件2211。
可选择性地,活动限位件2211包括圆弧传动面22114。传动件2223的第二传动端22232与圆弧传动面22114滑动配合。传动件2223绕定位轴2113转动时,传动件2223的第二传动端22232作用于圆弧传动面22114上并推动活动限位件2211滑动。第二传动端22232的弧形运动路径和活动限位件2211的直线运动路径,通过第二传动端22232和圆弧传动面22114的相对滑动实现匹配。圆弧传动面22114使得第二传动端22232和活动限位件2211相对滑动顺滑,用户按压解锁按钮2221以驱动活动限位件2211运动的体感较佳。
可选择性地,传动件2223包括多个对中臂22233。传动件2223具有传动孔。定位轴2113穿过传动孔,使得多个对中臂22233抵接定位轴2113,以使得传动件2223绕定位轴2113相对连接内壳210可转动地连接。多个对中臂22233在传动孔内周向布置,且向对中臂22233从传动孔的内壁向传动孔的轴心处延伸。当定位轴2113穿过传动孔时,多个对中臂22233周向布置于定位轴2113外周,且每个对中臂22233均抵接定位轴2113。每个对中臂22233倾斜于传动孔的径向设置,即对中臂22233倾斜于定位轴2113的径向设置。每个对中臂22233具有抵接弧面222331,抵接弧面222331用于抵接定位轴2113。抵接弧面222331能够增加对中臂22233和定位轴2113的接触面积,提高传动件2223和定位轴2113配合时的稳定性。对中臂22233可以弹性地抵接于定位轴2113,对中臂22233对定位轴2113施加弹性力。使得传动件2223在偏心定位轴2113之后,也能弹性回位。
可选择性地,每个对中臂22233包括第一臂段222332和第二臂段222333。第一臂段222332从传动孔的内壁大致沿传动孔的径向延伸。第二臂段222333从第一臂段222332背离传动孔的内壁的一端大致沿传动孔的周向延伸。第二臂段222333、第一臂段222332和传动孔的内壁之间能够形成一个变形槽。当第二臂段222333收到挤压时,能够向变形槽的方向变形。第二臂段222333背离第一臂段222332的一端设置抵接弧面222331,第二臂段222333通过抵接弧面222331抵接于定位轴2113。
可选择性地,对中臂22233的数量为三个。三个对中臂22233绕传动孔的轴心均匀布置。
可选择性地,传动件2223还包括限位凸起22234。限位凸起22234位于第一传动端22231和第二传动端22232之间。解锁按钮2221的推杆22211作用于限位凸起22234朝向第一传动端22231的一侧。限位凸起22234朝向第一传动端22231的一侧具有导向弧面22235。推杆22211推动传动件2223绕定位轴2113转动时,推杆22211沿导向弧面22235滑动。推杆22211的直线运动推动传动件2223顺滑地绕定位轴2113转动。
可选择性地,解锁弹性件2222一端与解锁按钮2221连接,另一端与固定柱217连接。当用户按压解锁按钮2221时,解锁按钮2221将解锁弹性件2222压向固定柱217,使得解锁弹性件2222变形并储存弹性势能。当用户不再按压解锁按钮2221时,解锁弹性件2222能够释放弹性势能进而驱动解锁按钮2221远离固定柱217以回到按压前的位置。
其中,解锁弹性件2222包括弹性臂22221和限位夹22222。弹性臂22221的一端连
接解锁按钮2221,另一端连接限位夹22222。限位夹22222抵持于固定柱217。限位夹22222还可以绕固定柱217转动。弹性臂22221包括第一段22223和第二段22224。第一段22223从解锁按钮2221延伸至固定柱217背离解锁按钮2221的一侧,第二段22224从第一段22223的端部向固定柱217延伸。第二段22224呈弧形,使得弹性臂22221变形时,降低弹性臂22221各位置的应力集中,提高弹性臂22221的使用寿命。弹性臂22221使得限位夹22222具有朝向推杆22211的运动的趋势。当限位夹22222抵持于固定柱217背离推杆22211的一侧时,弹性臂22221能够使得限位夹22222对固定柱217施加弹性力,从而提高限位夹22222和固定柱217连接的稳定性。限位夹22222大致呈半圆环状,且限位夹22222靠近解锁按钮2221的一端还具有直线延伸段22225。当解锁按钮2221驱动解锁弹性件2222变形运动时,限位夹22222绕固定柱217转动,且限位夹22222靠近解锁按钮2221的一端对固定柱217施加较大的压力,限位夹22222靠近解锁按钮2221的一端具有变形的风险。直线延伸段22225可以进一步降低限位夹22222变形并脱离固定柱217的风险。
可选择性地,解锁弹性件2222的数量为两个。两个解锁弹性件2222对称地设置在解锁按钮2221的两侧。每个解锁弹性件2222的弹性臂22221使得限位夹22222具有朝向另一个解锁弹性件2222运动的趋势。
图13示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的局部的剖视图。
请结合参阅图7、图8和图13,可选择性地,连接模块200还包括气流连接件230。气流连接件230包括固定基座231和上述第一气流连接部232。第一气流连接部232为呈管状的气流连接管。固定基座231与第一气流连接部232固定连接。第一气流连接部232上设有第一气道孔232a。
请结合参阅图7、图8和图13,可选择性地,固定基座231与连接内壳210连接。
其中,连接内壳210设置有多个连接柱215,连接柱215设置有螺纹孔。固定基座231具有多个连接通孔。通过螺栓穿过连接通孔后与连接柱215的螺纹孔螺纹配合,即可使得固定基座231和连接内壳210相对固定,进而使得第一气流连接部232与连接内壳210相对固定。
可选择性地,三个连接柱215位于三角形的三个顶点。三个连接柱215可以位于一个三角形(如等腰三角形)的三个顶点以提供相对均匀的支撑力。固定基座231大致呈三角形。固定基座231在三角形的每个角处设置一个连接通孔以对应每个连接柱215。通过三个螺栓连接固定基座231和连接内壳210,提高固定基座231和连接内壳210连接的稳定性。第一气流连接部232位于固定基座231上三个连接通孔之间,第一气流连接部232受到外力时,该外力能够通过固定基座231大致均匀地传递至三个连接通孔对应的螺栓处,各螺栓限制气流连接件230相对连接内壳210运动,使得气流连接件230和连接内壳210的相对位置关系能够保持稳定。
可选择性地,气流连接件230还包括加强筋233,加强筋233连接固定基座231和第一气流连接部232,以提高第一气流连接部232的稳定性。
可选择性地,连接内壳210设置有气流连接孔2101,第一气流连接部232为气流连接管,其通过气流连接孔2101从第一组装面212b露出于主体010,并进一步延伸至装配槽212a内,使得第一气道孔232a伸入装配槽212a内。美容头030安装入装配槽212a内时,与第一气流连接部232伸入装配槽212a的部分连接,从而使得美容头030和主体
010气流连通。可选地,第一气流连接部232沿第一倾斜方向U延伸。
可选择性地,气流连接件230还包括密封圈234。密封圈234套设于第一气流连接部232外周。当第一气流连接部232与美容头030连接时,密封圈234可以填充美容头030和第一气流连接部232外周的间隙,提高气密性,以保证或提高抽气效率。
可选地,密封圈234的数量为两个,两个密封圈234沿第一气流连接部232的延伸方向间隔设置,从而增强密封效果。
具体的,密封圈234套设于第一气流连接部232位于装配槽212a内的部分。可选择性地,第一气流连接部232位于装配槽212a内的部分设置有两个环形槽2321。密封圈234部分地容置于环形槽2321内,并凸出于环形槽2321以便填充美容头030和第一气流连接部232外周的间隙。
可选择性地,活动限位件2211设置有让位孔2211a。沿滑动方向,让位孔2211a的尺寸大于第一气流连接部232的尺寸。第一气流连接部232穿过让位孔2211a和气流连接孔2101后延伸至装配槽212a内。随着活动限位件2211沿第二倾斜方向V滑动,让位孔2211a也沿第二倾斜方向V产生位移。沿第二倾斜方向V,让位孔2211a的尺寸大于第一气流连接部232的尺寸,可以避免活动限位件2211在滑动时触碰到第一气流连接部232。
可选择性地,连接内壳210还具有排气口216。排气口216与让位孔2211a对应。当美容头030和连接内壳210装配时,美容头030和连接内壳210之间形成排气通道,排气通道与排气口216连通。具体来说,第二组装面412a与第一组装面212b之间形成排气通道,排气通道与气流驱动件连通,以排出气流驱动件驱动的气体。美容仪001在排气的时候,可以通过排气口216到排气通道的路径排出气体。如此,通过将排气口216设置在连接内壳210,可使得气流驱动件具有进口和出口的一端朝向美容头030设置,从而可便于简化气路设计。
可选地,排气口216凸出于滑动面2111,便于连接排气管道。沿第二倾斜方向V,让位孔2211a的尺寸大于第一气流连接部232和排气口216的综合尺寸,可以避免活动限位件2211在滑动时触碰到第一气流连接部232或者排气口216。美容头030外周与装配槽212a的侧壁之间形成排气间隙212c,排气间隙212c与排气通道连通,使得气体可以通过排气通道流通至排气间隙212c,再通过排气间隙212c排出美容仪001。
可以理解地,排气间隙212c可以通过在美容头030的安装壳410外周设置凹槽,使得美容头030安装入装配槽212a之后,装配槽212a的内壁与安装壳410外周的凹槽形成排气间隙212c,排气间隙212c与排气通道连通,使得气体能够排出美容仪001。排气间隙212c还可以通过在装配槽212a的内壁设置凹槽,使得美容头030安装入装配槽212a之后,装配槽212a内壁的凹槽与安装壳410外周形成排气间隙212c,排气间隙212c与排气通道连通,使得气体能够排出美容仪001。排气间隙212c形成于美容头030和装配槽212a之间,使得美容头030和主体010拆卸时,清洁美容头030外周和装配槽212a内壁即可清洁排气间隙212c。
可选择性地,排气口216包括依次设置的第一孔段2161和第二孔段2162。第一孔段2161和第二孔段2162沿第一倾斜方向U连续并连通。第一孔段2161背离第二孔段2162的一端从第一组装面212b露出。在垂直于排气口216的延伸方向,也即垂直于第一倾斜方向U的截面上,第一孔段2161的截面积大于第二孔段2162的截面积。第一孔
段2161具有较大的截面积以便于连接美容头030的导气件4124。而第二孔段2162具有较小的截面积以便在容置腔100a内露出以连接管道,进而连通气流驱动件。
可以理解地,排气口216也可以不分为第一孔段2161和第二孔段2162,使得排气口216整体呈圆柱状、扩口状或其他形状,也能够使得排气口216连通气流驱动件和导气件4124。
可以理解的是,排气口216的位置不局限于连接内壳210,即主体010上设有排气口216,以用于排气,如可以设于尾部。
可以理解地,若主体010不设置排气口216,还可以通过主体010的组装缝隙进行排气,例如通过第一半壳和第二半壳之间的组装缝隙排出。
图14示出了本申请一种实施方式中的头壳110和连接模块200的结构示意图,其中,连接模块200包括主体电路板250。
请结合参阅图7和图14,可选择性地,连接模块200还包括第一电连接件240和主体电路板250。主体电路板250与连接内壳210沿第一倾斜方向U间隔设置。连接内壳210设置有固定柱217,固定柱217从滑动面2111沿第一倾斜方向U延伸。固定柱217设置有螺纹孔。主体电路板250上与固定柱217对应的位置设置有固定通孔251。通过螺栓穿过固定通孔251并与固定柱217螺纹连接,即可使得主体电路板250与连接内壳210的相对位置保持固定。固定柱217的数量为多个,与之对应地,主体电路板250上设置多个固定通孔251。通过多个螺栓连接主体电路板250和固定柱217,可以提高主体电路板250和连接内壳210连接的稳定性,也可以避免主体电路板250相对连接内壳210绕任一个固定柱217转动。主体电路板250与主控板310电性连接。主体电路板250与主控板310可以通过柔性导线电性连接。柔性导线设置于容置腔100a内,被外壳100保护。用户在使用美容仪001时,不易使得柔性导线收到外力而移位,能够维持主体电路板250和主控板310的电性连接。
可以理解地,第一电连接件240也可以为一体成型的导体,如第一电连接件240为金属棒。
其中,连接内壳210还设置有电性连接孔218。第一电连接件240的一端与主体电路板250连接,另一端穿过电性连接孔218从第一组装面212b露出于主体010,并进一步伸入装配槽212a内。请结合参阅图2,当美容头030安装入装配槽212a时,美容头030能够与安装入装配槽212a的第一电连接件240接触。如此,通过设置主体电路板250,以安装第一电连接件240,便于对第一电连接件240进行安装和固定,以便于使第一电连接件240露出于主体010。
可选择地,第一电连接件240的数量为多个。当美容头030与多个第一电连接件240接触时,至少部分地第一电连接件240与美容头030电性连接,以使得美容头030和主体010电性连接。通过主体010能够为美容头030提供电能,也能控制美容头030的运行。
可选择性地,第二电连接件470的数量设置为多个,以与第一电连接件240一一对应。
可选择性地,第一电连接件240的数量为多个,例如十个。多个第一电连接件240分为两组,如每五个第一电连接件240为一组,两组第一电连接件240分别位于活动限位件2211的两侧。主体电路板250在两组第一电连接件240之间设置有贯穿孔252。第
一气流连接部232和排气口216从贯穿孔252露出,以便第一气流连接部232和排气口216与其他气道元件的组装。
可选择性地,第一电连接件240和/或第二电连接件470为PIN针,如此可便于与美容头030保持电性连接。
为便于区分,在后续的部分内容中,对于配置为第一电连接件240的PIN针,以“电接PIN针”一词进行指代,对于配置为第二电连接件470所对应的PIN针,以“电控PIN针”一词进行指代。
其中,第一电连接件240包括固定针段241和弹性活动针段242。固定针段241和弹性活动针段242可滑动地弹性配合,使得第一电连接件240沿第一倾斜方向U的尺寸可以调整。固定针段241与主体电路板250连接,弹性活动针段242通过电性连接孔218安装入装配槽212a内。当美容头030安装入装配槽212a内并接触到弹性活动针段242时,可以挤压弹性活动针段242使得第一电连接件240沿第一倾斜方向U的尺寸缩小。通过每个第一电连接件240沿第一倾斜方向U的伸缩量,来匹配美容头030和主体电路板250的误差,从而尽量使得每个第一电连接件240均能够与美容头030稳定地连接。
可以理解,弹性活动针段242背离固定针段241的一端形成第一电触点,第一电触点用于配合美容头030,实现与美容头030的电连接。
图15示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头030的结构示意图。图16示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头030的壳体411的结构示意图。
请结合参阅图15和图16,美容头030包括安装壳410。安装壳410具有相对的负压端410a和连接端410b。安装壳410在负压端410a设置有负压槽4111。安装壳410的连接端410b用于安装入装配槽212a以连接主体010。安装壳410还设有与负压槽4111连通的第二气流连接部4114。安装壳410用于与主体010可拆卸连接。
进一步地,负压槽4111和第二组装面412a分别位于安装壳410的相对两侧。
进一步地,安装壳410包括壳体411和盖体412。壳体411在连接端410b形成具有开口的容纳腔4112,盖体412安装于该开口处;可选地,盖体412和壳体411连接以遮盖容纳腔4112的开口。其中,盖体412背离壳体411的一面形成第二组装面412a。
其中,第二组装面412a设于盖体412的外侧面,第二电连接件470安装于盖体412,并从盖体412露出。
其中,第二气流连接部4114从负压基板41101朝盖体412延伸,并从盖体412露出。
可以理解地,对具有负压槽4111以负压吸附皮肤的美容仪001来说,在美容仪001工作完成后,负压槽4111内更容易吸纳污渍。通过使美容头030与主体010可拆卸连接,可以拆下美容头030后,只对美容头030进行清洁,可更加方便地清洗负压槽4111。
进一步地,壳体411包括负压基板41101、负压围板41102和容纳围板41103。负压围板41102设置于负压基板41101的一侧,负压围板41102凸设于负压基板41101,使得负压围板41102和负压基板41101共同形成负压槽4111,射频电极420设于负压围板41102和/或负压基板41101。
容纳围板41103设置于负压基板41101背离负压围板41102的一侧,容纳围板41103凸设于负压基板41101,使得负压基板41101和容纳围板41103共同形成具有敞口的容纳腔4112,盖体412安装于容纳腔4112的敞口处,容纳腔4112能够容纳头部电路板460。如此,可通过一体注塑的方式生产壳体411,以简化组装。
进一步地,容纳围板41103的尺寸大于负压围板41102的尺寸,如沿垂直于负压基板41101的投影面,负压围板41102的投影位于容纳围板41103的投影内,负压槽4111的投影位于容纳腔4112的投影内。使得容纳围板41103装入装配槽212a时,能够较稳定地安装在装配槽212a内。且,负压槽4111具有相对较小的覆盖面积,从而提高负压槽4111的吸附和释放效率,能够快速产生负压以吸附皮肤,也能快速向负压槽4111充气以解除皮肤的吸附。
进一步地,壳体411在容纳腔4112内还设置有第一配合柱4113,盖体412设置有第一配合孔4121。螺栓穿过第一配合孔4121并与第一配合柱4113螺纹配合,即可使得壳体411和盖体412连接。第一配合孔4121可以为沉孔,从而容置螺栓的螺栓头,以保持盖体412背离壳体411的一面大致平整。
进一步地,壳体411具有第二气流连接部4114,盖体412设置有负压孔4122。可选择性地,第二气流连接部4114为设于负压基板41101的负压管道。可选地,第二气流连接部4114从负压槽4111的底部向盖体412的方向延伸,并与负压孔4122连接,以从第二组装面412a露出。
其中,负压管道具有第二气道孔411a。第二气流连接部4114用于与第一气流连接部232可拆卸连接,以使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通。第一气流连接部232和第二气流连接部4114的对接方向可以匹配美容头030和主体010的配合方向,即,第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114在拆卸方向上对接,以使在美容头030与主体010连接时,使第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通。可选择性地,当美容头030安装入装配槽212a内时,装配槽212a内的第一气流连接部232通过负压孔4122插入第二气流连接部4114内,并与第二气流连接部4114连通。也即,第一气流连接部232设于装配槽212a的底部,并凸出于第一组装面212b,以插入第二气流连接部4114内,以与第二气流连接部4114连通。当第一气流连接部232抽吸气体时,负压槽4111内的气体可以通过第二气流连接部4114被第一气流连接部232抽走,从而在负压槽4111内形成负压,以将用户皮肤在负压作用吸入负压槽4111内。
在工作时,美容头030的射频电极420对吸入负压槽4111内的皮肤释放射频电流,使得射频电极420作用于更深处的皮肤。另外,皮肤接触射频电极420的面积增大,射频电极420能够对更大面积的皮肤释放射频电流,从而提高射频电流美容的效率。
可以理解地,第一气流连接部232也可以设置为负压管道,第一气流连接部232不伸出装配槽212a。第二气流连接部4114也可以设置为气流连接管,第二气流连接部4114伸出壳体411。当美容头030安装入装配槽212a内时,美容头030的气流连接管插入连接模块200的负压管道内。
进一步地,美容头030还包括透气件413,以用于阻污透气。其中,透气件413设置在第二气流连接部4114内。如此,通过在第二气流连接部4114内设置透气件413,以允许气体通过,而防止液体、汗渍、凝胶等杂物通过,从而可防止其进入主体010内的气路中,从而污染气路。
具体的,第一气流连接部232插入第二气流连接部4114后配合形成气流管道,使得美容头030和主体010连通。当第一气流连接部232插入第二气流连接部4114后,第一气道孔232a与第二气道孔411a对接连通。透气件413位于第一气流连接部232的入口处。第一气流连接部232经由第二气流连接部4114抽吸负压槽4111内的气体时,负压
槽4111内的气体会先通过透气件413,再进入第一气流连接部232内。通过透气件413的过滤,可以减少进入第一气流连接部232的杂质,降低第一气流连接部232堵塞或者滋生细菌的几率。可选择性地,透气件413可以包括透气棉,通过透气棉既能够使得气体流通,又能够对流通的气体起到过滤的作用。而且透气棉便于低成本地更换。
可选择性地,透气件413还可以包括防水透气膜,通过防水透气膜可以降低水汽流经透气棉并进入到主体010的几率。防水透气膜可以由特氟龙制成,设置于透气棉的表面,从而降低水汽经由负压槽4111进入到透气棉的几率。
具体的,第二气流连接部4114靠近第一气流连接部232的位置处的连接通道的通气面积小于负压槽4111的槽口面积。使得负压槽4111的槽口处气体流通速度更慢,降低气流对皮肤的刺激。
具体的,壳体411在负压槽4111的底壁上还设置有防堵槽4115。防堵槽4115位于第二气流连接部4114的外侧,防堵槽4115连通第二气流连接部4114。当用户皮肤安装入负压槽4111内时,第二气流连接部4114可能被用户皮肤堵塞。但是用户皮肤具有韧性,难以在局部产生剧烈变形,因此难以完全堵塞尺寸小于第二气流连接部4114的防堵槽4115。当第二气流连接部4114被用户皮肤堵塞时,第二气流连接部4114还可以通过防堵槽4115继续在负压槽4111内产生负压。
可选的,气流管道还包括设于负压槽4111底部以与负压槽4111连通的过滤槽,过滤槽连通第一气流连接部232的入口,透气件413设于过滤槽内,以限制杂质进入气流管道;过滤槽连通防堵槽4115。将过滤槽设于负压槽4111的底部,有利于在抽吸气体时充分利用负压槽4111的槽口,以提高抽吸的效率,透气件413设于过滤槽内,能够减小杂志进入气流管道的可能性,降低气流管道堵塞或者滋生细菌的几率。
图17示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头030的结构示意图。图18示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头030的壳体411的结构示意图。
请参阅图17和图18,盖体412设置卡接部4123。卡接部4123凸出于盖体412背离壳体411的一面。在卡接部4123的一侧设置卡槽41231。卡勾22111插入卡槽41231内之后能够使得美容头030和主体010沿第一倾斜方向U相对固定。卡接部4123插入扣位活动孔2112内,卡勾22111在扣位活动孔2112内沿第二倾斜方向V移动以插入卡接部4123的卡槽41231内。
美容头030还包括射频电极420。安装壳410具有用于贴合用户面部的贴肤面410c,射频电极420显露地设于贴肤面410c,负压槽4111设于贴肤面410c,多个射频电极420设于负压槽4111的周侧;可选地,贴肤面410c设于负压端410a。射频电极420与壳体411连接,当美容头030接触用户皮肤时,能够通过射频电极420对用户皮肤发出射频电流,从而起到美容效果。射频电极420设置于负压槽4111的内壁,负压槽4111内形成负压使得用户皮肤变形且贴合于射频电极420,然后通过射频电极420发出射频电流,对用户皮肤美容。相较于未被负压吸附大致平整的皮肤,可使射频电流穿透被吸入负压槽4111内的皮肤,从而可增大射频能量的射入深度,从而可提高美容效果。
其中,负压槽4111的槽口形成吸附口,吸附口用于贴合皮肤以使得负压槽4111负压吸附皮肤;吸附口的朝向倾斜于外壳100的延伸方向,射频电极420设于吸附口处。可以理解,射频电极420设于吸附口处包括射频电极420设于负压槽4111内并靠近槽口设置,以及射频电极420设于负压槽4111外并靠近槽口设置等。如此,通过使射频电极
420设于吸附口处,可减少射频路径,提高美容效果。
可以理解地,射频电极420也可以设置于吸附口外较远处,对未被吸附的皮肤处释放射频电流,使得射频电流能够流经皮下更深的深度,提高美容效果。
壳体411在负压槽4111内设置有安装缺口4101。射频电极420设置于安装缺口4101处,以使得射频电极420和壳体411连接后,射频电极420的表面和负压槽4111的内壁平滑过渡。可以理解地,射频电极420既可以至少部分地设置于负压槽4111内,使得射频电极420能够对吸附的皮肤释放射频电流,也可以将射频电极420完全设置于负压槽4111外,使得射频电极420位于负压槽4111的外周侧,从而连接触的皮肤释放射频电流。
可以理解地,射频电极420既可以部分地设置于负压槽4111内,使得射频电极420能够对吸附入负压槽4111的皮肤释放射频电流。射频电极420也可以完全设置在负压槽4111外,使得射频电极420位于壳体411的端部,当用户皮肤接触射频电极420时,对成对的射频电极420之间的皮肤释放射频电流。
具体地,射频电极420具有相对的底端421、顶端422以及连接顶端422和底端421的贴肤侧面。射频电极420的底端421朝向负压槽4111的底壁。当美容头030接触用户皮肤时,射频电极420的顶端422抵接用户皮肤。射频电极42的顶端422具有工作弧面423,和/或贴肤侧面与顶端422的连接处形成工作弧面423。可选地,工作弧面423具有弯折轴心,弯折轴心大致垂直于第一倾斜方向U。用户皮肤受到负压吸附时,被负压吸附进负压槽4111内的皮肤根据工作弧面423的支撑而变形,从而可使皮肤的变形符合皮肤变形特性,从而可提高用户的舒适性,同时又增加了射频电极420和用户皮肤的接触面积,从而提高美容效率,提高美容效果。
射频电极420具有厚度。射频电极420的厚度为射频电极420朝向负压槽4111中心的一面到射频电极420背离负压槽4111中心的一面的尺寸。射频电极420的厚度可以为2至5mm。工作弧面423的弧度直径可以2至5mm。射频电极420的厚度增加,可以降低射频电极420从底端421到顶端422的电能损耗,同时增加工作弧面423的弧度,从而增加射频电极420与用户皮肤的接触面积。射频电极420的厚度缩减,可以降低射频电极420的成本,提高射频电极420射频电流的能量集中。
美容头030还包括第一温度传感器430。第一温度传感器430用于感应射频电极420的温度。第一温度传感器430接触射频电极420,以感应射频电极420的温度。通过第一温度传感器430感应射频电极420的温度,当射频电极420的温度升高到可接受的阈值外时,美容仪001可以提醒用户,或降低射频电流能量,甚至直接中止射频电极420的射频电流,降低用户被射频电极420烫伤的风险。当用户皮肤接触射频电极420时,与射频电极420接触的用户皮肤和射频电极420传热,使得与射频电极420接触的用户皮肤温度和射频电极420的温度大致相当,通过第一温度传感器430还可以反应与射频电极420接触的用户皮肤的当前温度,可以作为调整射频电极420射频功率的参考。第一温度传感器430可以为NTC(Negative Temperature CoeffiCient,负温度系数)传感器。利用NTC热敏电阻在限定的测量功率下,电阻值随着温度上升而迅速下降。通过测量NTC热敏电阻的电阻值来确定相应的温度,从而达到检测温度的目的。
可选择性地,射频电极420的数量为两个。两个射频电极420相对设置,第二气流连接部4114位于两个射频电极420之间。沿第一倾斜方向U观察负压槽4111,负压槽
4111位于两个射频电极420之间的内壁呈曲面,使得容置有两个射频电极420的负压槽4111大致呈跑道状。负压槽4111位于两个射频电极420之间的内壁还具有内倒角。用户皮肤受到负压吸附时,被负压吸附进负压槽4111内的皮肤根据内倒角的支撑而变形,从而可使皮肤的变形符合皮肤变形特性,从而可提高用户的舒适性。
可选择性地,两个射频电极420之间的间距大于或者等于8mm,且小于或等于20mm。如此,既有利于兼顾负压槽4111的大小,使适宜面积的皮肤能够被吸入负压槽4111中,另一方面还能够具有足够的射频距离,提高射频电流刺激皮肤的效率的同时,减小射频能量过于集中而导致皮肤温度过高的可能性,降低用户被烫伤的风险。
在一些实施例中,两个射频电极420的间距为9mm、10mm、11mm、12mm、13mm、14mm、15mm、16mm、17mm、18mm、19mm中的任意一个。如此,既有利于兼顾负压槽4111的大小,使适宜面积的皮肤能够被吸入负压槽4111中,另一方面还能够具有足够的射频距离,提高射频电流刺激皮肤的效率的同时,减小射频能量过于集中而导致皮肤温度过高的可能性,降低用户被烫伤的风险。
较优的,两个射频电极420的间距大于或者等于10mm,小于或者等于15mm。
图19示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头030的结构示意图,其中,射频电极420的数量为四个。
可选择性地,射频电极420的数量为四个。四个射频电极420位于四棱柱的四个侧面,每两个相对的射频电极420平行设置。负压槽4111具有四个侧壁,四个侧壁分别对应四个射频电极420。相邻两个侧壁之间形成间隔面41111。间隔面41111也位于相邻的两个射频电极420之间。间隔面41111可以为平面,也可以为曲面。当间隔面41111为平面时,间隔面41111与任一相邻的射频电极420之间的夹角大于100°。负压槽4111具有沿第二倾斜方向V的第一尺寸,和沿第三方向Z的第二尺寸。第一尺寸大于第二尺寸。沿第二倾斜方向V间隔设置的两个射频电极420与相邻的间隔面41111之间的夹角为100至120°之间。例如,沿第二倾斜方向V间隔设置的两个射频电极420与相邻的间隔面41111之间的夹角为105°,110°或115°。沿第二方向Y间隔设置的两个射频电极420与相邻的间隔面41111之间的夹角为150至170°之间。例如,沿第二方向Y间隔设置的两个射频电极420与相邻的间隔面41111之间的夹角为155°,160°或165°。通过限制间隔面41111和射频电极420的夹角,使得负压槽4111的整体轮廓大致平整。用户皮肤受到负压吸附时,被负压吸附而变形的部分轮廓与负压槽4111的轮廓大致匹配,从而提高用户的舒适性。
间隔面41111也可以为曲面,曲面大致靠近任一射频电极420的一端的切面与对应的射频电极420的夹角大于100°。使得间隔面41111与任一射频电极420的过渡位置大致平整。用户皮肤受到负压吸附时,被负压吸附而变形的部分轮廓与负压槽4111的轮廓大致匹配,从而提高用户的舒适性。
以上对射频电极420在负压槽4111内的分布做了简单的介绍,但并未对其进行总结,为了便于更好的表达本申请的设计构思,以下对射频电极420在负压槽4111的安装做一些总结性的解释和说明。
具体的,射频电极420至少部分设于负压槽4111的侧壁,射频电极420在负压槽4111的周向上形成多个射频区,相邻的射频区具有间隔面41111,间隔面41111与负压槽4111的底部倾斜设置,和/或,相邻的射频区通过间隔面41111光滑过渡。
具体来说,可将射频电极420全部设置在负压槽4111的侧壁,也可将射频电极420的部分设于负压槽4111周缘的侧面(即贴肤面410c)上、部分设置在负压槽4111的侧壁上,这样可使射频电极420能够将更多的能量射入被吸入负压槽4111内的皮肤上,且可使得射频路径较短。
其中,射频电极420设有多个,多个射频电极420在负压槽4111的周向上形成多个射频区。可以理解,射频电极420可以呈片状设置,也可呈点状分布,或者设置为其他形式。当射频电极420呈片状设置时,每一射频电极420可形成一射频区;当射频电极420呈点状设置时,若干点状射频电极420分布在一起可形成一射频区。射频区具有射频面。
其中,相邻的射频区之间的负压槽4111的侧壁形成了间隔面41111,通过该间隔面41111与负压槽4111的底部倾斜设置,可使用户皮肤受到负压吸附时,被负压吸附进负压槽4111内的皮肤根据间隔面41111的支撑而变形,从而可使皮肤的变形符合皮肤变形特性,从而可提高用户的舒适性。
可以理解,基于基本相同的理由,也可以使射频区的射频面负压槽4111的底部倾斜设置,以及使相邻的射频区通过间隔面41111光滑过渡。
举例来说,对于非圆形的负压槽4111来说,该类负压槽4111具有多个侧壁,可将部分侧壁设置为射频侧壁,即负压槽4111具有多个射侧壁,每个射频侧壁均设有射频电极420,射频电极420与其所在的侧壁形成射频面;可以理解,当射频电极420安装于射频侧壁,射频电极420的侧面或射频电极420的侧面与射频侧壁一起可形成射频面。位于相邻两射频侧壁之间的侧壁即形成分割两射频面的间隔面41111,即是说,负压槽4111还具有位于相邻两个侧壁之间的间隔面41111,为了使皮肤的变形符合皮肤变形特性以提高舒适性,可使:射频面与间隔面之间的夹角大于100°;和/或,间隔面41111与负压槽4111底部呈倾斜状设置;和/或,射频面与负压槽4111底部呈倾斜状设置。
在一实施例中,负压槽4111大致呈方形设计,可使射频电极的数量为四个,四个射频电极420分布于负压槽4111的四边,间隔面41111形成于四个边角。在另一实施例中,负压槽4111大致呈方形设计,也可使射频电极420的数量为两个,两个射频电极420分布于负压槽4111的相对两边,另外两边形成间隔面41111。
需要说明的是,当负压槽4111大致呈圆形时,仍可按照以上设计方式进行设置。
进一步的,在部分实施例中,可使多个射频电极420呈环状排布,多个呈环状排布的射频电极420形成多个电极组,主控板310用于控制多个电极组按照预设工作顺序依次工作,多个电极组的刺激范围呈交叉分布。
其中,电极组是指至少包括一正电极和一负电极的电极组合,如可以包括一个正电极和一个负电极,又如,也可以包括一个正电极和多个负电极,再如可以包括多个正电极和一个负电极。在工作时,射频能量从正电极射出,并通过皮肤射向负电极,这过程中射频能量流经的过程就是该电极组的刺激范围。
其中,可以理解的是,多个电极组按照预设工作顺序依次工作可以包括以下三种形式:①相邻工作的两对电极的工作时间有部分重合,即是说,上一电极组先开始工作,在其工作未完成时,下一电极组开始工作,且其在上一电极组工作结束后仍工作一段时间,如上一电极组在第0-3s工作,下一对电极在第2.5-6s工作;②相邻工作的两对电极的工作时间顺延,即是说,主控板310用于控制多个电极组按预设工作顺序依次交替工
作,即是说,上一电极组先开始工作,在其工作完成时,下一电极组立即开始工作,并工作一段时间,如上一电极组在第0-3s工作,下一对电极在第3-6s工作;③相邻工作的两对电极的工作时间具有间隔,即是说,上一电极组先开始工作,在其工作完成后,下一电极组延后一小段时间开始工作,并工作一段时间,如上一电极组在第0-3s工作,下一对电极在第4-7s工作。
对于以上三种形式,均满足相邻工作的两对电极组启动时间有时间差,先启动工作的电极组先停止工作,这样可以使每对电极组的工作时间小于处于交叉区域的工作时间。
多个电极组的刺激范围呈交叉分布,是指不同电极组的刺激范围存在重合部分。可选地,如图19所示,4个电极形成2个电极组,中间围合的部分为重合部分。
如此,通过设置刺激范围呈交叉分布的多个电极组,并使各电极组按照预设工作顺序依次工作,这样可使多个电极组刺激范围重合的区域对应的皮肤在一个周期内可持续被电刺激,从而使得该部位的皮肤一直在被加热,使得其可与射频电极420处对应的皮肤温度相当,从而可以提高美容的均衡性,增强用户的体验感。
特别是对于具有负压槽4111的美容仪001时,可先将皮肤吸入负压槽4111内,然后,再控制多个电极对按预设工作顺序依次工作,以通过射频电极420对吸入后的皮肤发出射频电流,从而既可以使射频电流穿透被吸入负压槽4111内的皮肤,从而可增大射频能量的射入深度,从而可提高美容效果;又可以对吸入负压槽4111内的皮肤进行持续电刺激;以既实现提高射频深度,又提高射频均匀性。
举例来说,对图19所示的具有4个射频电极420的美容仪001来说,每两个相对的射频电极420形成电极组。具体地,沿第二倾斜方向V间隔的两个射频电极420形成第一电极组。沿第二方向Y间隔的两个射频电极420形成第二电极组。通过主体电路板250和头部电路板460的转接实现主体010和美容头030的电性连接,从而使得主控板310能够通过控制第一电极组和第二电极组交叉射频。
可选择性地,第一电极组和第二电极组的交叉射频可以包括三个射频阶段。第一射频阶段为:第一电极组发出射频电流0.5s,第二电极组不发出射频电流,随后进入第二射频阶段。第二射频阶段为:第二电极组发出射频电流0.5s,第一电极组不发出射频电流,随后进入第三射频阶段。第三射频阶段为:第一电极组和第二电极组均布停止发出射频电流0.5s,随后回到第一射频阶段。
可选择性地,第一电极组和第二电极组的交叉射频可以包括五个射频阶段。第一射频阶段为:第一电极组发出能量逐渐升高的射频电流0.5s,第二电极组不发出射频电流,随后进入第二射频阶段。第二射频阶段为:第一电极组发出能量逐渐递减的射频电流0.5s,第二电极组不发出射频电流,随后进入第三射频阶段。第三射频阶段为:第二电极组发出能量逐渐升高的射频电流0.5s,第一电极组不发出射频电流,随后进入第四射频阶段。第四射频阶段为:第二电极组发出能量逐渐递减的射频电流0.5s,第一电极组不发出射频电流,随后进入第五射频阶段。第五射频阶段为:第一电极组和第二电极组均布停止发出射频电流0.5s,随后回到第一射频阶段。
可以理解地,射频电极420的数量还可以为其他。例如,当射频电极420的数量为六个时。每两个相对的射频电极420形成电极组。主控板310可以通过主体电路板250和头部电路板460(如图18所示)控制各电极组交叉射频。
进一步地,主控板310可控制多个电极组周期性工作,也可控制负压槽4111周期性
吸附用户皮肤,且电极组的工作周期与负压槽4111的吸附周期同频;在一个周期内,主控板310控制气泵510将皮肤吸入负压槽4111内后,控制多个电极组按照预设工作顺序依次工作,多个电极组工作结束后,释放皮肤。这样将负压吸附皮肤的过程与射频工作的过程相结合,可提高美容效果。
在一些实施例中,负压槽4111在气源组件500的调节下,可以实现周期性的吸附和释放皮肤。而射频电极420通过形成不同的电极组来实现多个射频阶段。在相邻两个射频阶段之间的间歇时间,可以正好对应于负压槽4111释放皮肤的时间。一方面可以降低射频电极420仅作用于未被吸附的皮肤的几率,导致射频电极420的美容功效下降。另一方面,可以存在一个时间间隙,在不吸附皮肤的情况下也不对皮肤释放射频电流,使得皮肤得到充分地缓冲,降低用户的疼痛感。
进一步地,美容头030还包括第二温度传感器450。在壳体411上位于负压槽4111的底壁设置有工作孔4116。第二温度传感器450设置于工作孔4116内。第二温度传感器450朝向负压槽4111设置,第二温度传感器450能够测量安装入负压槽4111的皮肤的温度。可选择性地,第二温度传感器450为红外传感器,通过测量皮肤的红外辐射进而判断皮肤温度。
进一步地,美容头030还包括保护板451,保护板451为透光板。保护板451设置于工作孔4116朝向负压槽4111的端面,保护板451可以保护第二温度传感器450。保护板451能够透过红外光,使得第二温度传感器450能够检测到皮肤的红外辐射。保护板451还能够限制气体通过工作孔4116流通,降低工作孔4116对负压槽4111内形成负压造成的影响。保护板451可以为硅片,硅片具有红外波段的透光性能,使得红外光可以透过硅片。而且硅片性质稳定不易在空气暴露情况下发生反应而丧失红外波段的透光性能。
图20示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头030的结构示意图,其中,盖体412被拆离。图21示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容头030的剖视图,其中,剖视位置为一组第二电连接件470的位置。
请参阅图20和图21,美容头030还包括头部电路板460,头部电路板460电性连接射频电极420。头部电路板460设置于容纳腔4112内。头部电路板460具有让位通孔4602。第二气流连接部4114向盖体412延伸,并穿过让位通孔4602后与负压孔4122连接。头部电路板460还设置有避让槽461,避让槽461避让第一配合柱4113。
可选地,壳体411在容纳腔4112内还设置有第二配合柱4117,头部电路板460设置有第二配合孔4601。螺栓穿过第二配合孔4601并与第二配合柱4117螺纹配合,即可使得头部电路板460和壳体411连接。
进一步地,头部电路板460还设置有连接触点464。
可选择性地,连接触点464可包括第一类型电触点462。第一类型电触点462与第一温度传感器430电性连接。通过头部电路板460可以向第一温度传感器430提供电能,也可以收集第一温度传感器430发出的电信号。第一温度传感器430和第一类型电触点462的电性连接可以通过焊接导线实现,也可以通过设置排线来实现。
连接触点464可包括第二类型电触点463。第二类型电触点463与第二温度传感器450电性连接。通过头部电路板460可以向第二温度传感器450提供电能,也可以收集第二温度传感器450发出的电信号。第二温度传感器450和第二类型电触点463的电性
连接可以通过焊接导线实现,也可以通过设置排线来实现。
连接触点464可包括第三类型电触点,第三类型电触点与射频电极420通过焊接导线或排线等方式电性连接。
连接触点464可包括第四类型电触点,第四类型电触点用于与头部电路板460内部电路配合以用于识别美容头030的类型。
可选地,盖体412设置有连接通孔4126,连接通孔4126可与连接触点464对应设置。
进一步地,美容头030还包括头部电连接件。头部电连接件即第二电连接件470。可选择性地,第二电连接件470为PIN针,可称为电控PIN针。第二电连接件470一端安装于盖体412,并露出盖体412而形成pin点,以与第一电连接件240电连接;第二电连接件470的另一端弹性接触或抵接于头部电路板460,以与头部电路板460电连接。如此,通过使第二电连接件470一端固定安装于盖体412上,一方面可以对第二电连接件470进行固定,另一方面也可形成pin点,且当安装在头壳110上时,也可使头部电路板460与第二电连接件470的另一端弹性接触或抵接而实现电连接。
具体来说,第二电连接件470包括第一针段471和第二针段472,第一针段471和第二针段472可滑动地连接。第一针段471与连接触点464接触配合。第二针段472穿过连接通孔4126,以通过连接通孔4126从第二组装面412a露出形成pin点。
可选择性地,第二针段472包括小径段4721和大径段4722。小径段4721与连接通孔4126的轮廓相当,使得小径段4721能够安装入连接通孔4126内,并从盖体412背离壳体411的一端露出。大径段4722能够抵接与盖体412,从而限制第二针段472继续通过连接通孔4126伸出。即,垂直于大径段4722的延伸方向的投影面上,大径段4722至少部分地位于连接通孔4126的投影外,从而使得大径段4722能够抵接于盖体412。第一针段471和第二针段472具有相对远离的弹性。通过外力施加于第一针段471和第二针段472,能够使得第一针段471和第二针段472相对滑动以缩减第二电连接件470的尺寸。当外力消除后,第一针段471和第二针段472能够通过弹性力相对远离以延长第二电连接件470的尺寸。可选择性地,第二针段472与安装壳410限位连接,以限制电控PIN针与安装壳410的相对位置;例如,第二针段472与盖体412固定连接,固定连接的形式可以为粘接、焊接等。
可以理解地,第二电连接件470也可以为其他结构,例如第二电连接件470为金属杆,金属杆的一端电性连接头部电路板460,另一端从盖体412露出。
当盖体412和壳体411连接时,第一针段471能够弹性地抵接于头部电路板460的连接触点464。即使各个连接触点464与对应的连接通孔4126之间存在距离偏差,与各个连接触点464对应的第二电连接件470也能够通过自身的伸缩来匹配偏差。第二针段472背离第一针段471的一端形成第二电触点。第二电触点与第一电连接件240的第一电触点配合,实现美容头030和连接模块200的电性连接。
可选择性地,第一针段471背离第二针段472的一面为球面。球面与连接触点464接触时,能够大致位于连接触点464的中心位置。相对于第一针段471背离第二针段472的一面为平面的形式,球面抵接于头部电路板460时,头部电路板460不容易对第一电连接件240产生力矩,从而导致第一针段471和第二针段472的相对滑动卡涩。球头能够与连接触点464保持稳定的接触。
可选择性地,第二电连接件470的数量为多个,如多个第二电连接件470分为两组,如十个。每五个第二电连接件470为一组,两组第二电连接件470分别位于安装壳410的两侧。负压孔4122位于两组第二电连接件470之间。
当美容头030和主体010连接时,多个第二电连接件470与多个第一电连接件240一一对应,即十个第二电连接件470与十个第一电连接件240一一对应。若每个第二电连接件470均与头部电路板460电性连接,则每个第一电连接件240也与头部电路板460电性连接。主体电路板250与主控板310电性连接,进而使得头部电路板460和主控板310电性连接。
可以理解地,通过以上介绍可知,为了实现多种信号传输,第二电连接件470通常设有多个,在组装或生产过程中,可先将第二电连接件470的一端安装于安装壳410的一部分,例如安装于安装壳410的盖体412处。第二电连接件470从盖体412露出以形成与第一电连接件240电性接触的pin点,然后再通过组装盖体412与安装壳410的其他部分而实现多个第二电连接件470与头部电路板460的电性连接,从而可实现快速准确的组装。可以理解地,第二电连接件470的一端可以与安装壳410的盖体412一体注塑,以使得第二电连接件470的一端安装于安装壳410的一部分。
通过第二电连接件470形成pin点与从第一组装面212b露出的第一电连接件240电连接,可以简化连接的形式,便于在美容头030与主体010对接的过程中,也能实现第一电连接件240和第二电连接件470电性连接。
图22示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的局部的剖视图。
请参阅图17和图22,可选择性地,盖体412还设置有导气件4124和排气槽4125。导气件4124和排气槽4125设置在盖体412背离壳体411的一面(即第二组装面412a)。导气件4124设于盖体412的中心部位,排气槽4125从导气件4124向盖体412的边缘延伸。可选地,导气件4124和排气槽4125位于两组第二电连接件470之间。
其中,导气件4124朝向排气槽4125的一侧设置有导气通孔41241。导气件4124的一侧具有导气缺口,导气缺口形成导气通孔41241。
导气件4124与盖体412的本体部分一体成型,在导气件4124成型时导气缺口即可成型,制造简单。
导气件4124被配置为能够插入排气口216中,并引导排气口216的气体进入排气槽4125内。
当美容头030装入装配槽212a内时,导气件4124插入排气口216中,盖体412背离壳体411的一面与第一组装面212b紧密配合,排气槽4125和第一组装面212b之间形成排气通道。排气口216排出的气体通过导气件4124的引导进入到排气槽4125内。
排气槽4125内的气体通过排气槽4125的内壁和第一组装面212b引导,流通至盖体412的边缘,并进一步通过壳体411的侧壁和装配槽212a侧壁之间的缝隙流出装配槽212a。导气件4124隔离在排气槽4125和第一气流连接部232之间,降低气流通过第一气流连接部232的位置流通的风险,避免气流影响负压槽4111的负压效果。
如此,通过以上方式,可以将排气口216内流出的气体导向排气槽4125,装配简单方便。
可以理解地,导气通孔41241也可以为导气件4124的一侧单独开设的通孔。例如,导气件4124为圆筒状,在圆筒状的导气件4124的一侧车削出通孔以形成导气通孔
41241。导气件4124的设置使得气体更顺畅地进入到排气槽4125内,有利于气体的流通。
可以理解地,排气槽4125也可以设置于第一组装面212b,当第一组装面212b和第二组装面412a靠近时,排气槽4125与第二组装面412a形成排气通道。
沿第一倾斜方向U,美容头030的尺寸大于装配槽212a的尺寸。当美容头030安装入装配槽212a内,且卡勾22111和卡槽41231配合时,美容头030背离主体010的一端位于装配槽212a外。用户皮肤接触美容头030背离主体010的一端,且和头部保持的距离。通过负压槽4111引出的气流能够通过头壳110和皮肤之间的缝隙散发至环境中。
当美容头030安装入装配槽212a内时,外壳100和安装壳410装配形成美容仪001的保护壳。
可以理解地,外壳100和安装壳410还可以一体成型,使得美容仪001中美容头030和主体010为不可拆卸的结构。在外壳100和安装壳410一体成型时,外壳100部分和安装壳410部分共同形成美容仪001的保护壳。
图23示出了本申请一种实施方式中的美容仪001的结构示意图,其中,后壳120被拆离。图24示出了本申请一种实施方式中的气源组件500的结构示意图,其中,负压槽4111的气体被气泵510抽吸。图25示出了本申请一种实施方式中的气源组件500的结构示意图,其中,负压槽4111经由泄气口5213吸气。
请结合参阅图23、图24和图25,主体010还包括气源组件500。气源组件500连接排气通道和负压槽4111,气源组件500用于从负压槽4111抽吸气体以使得负压槽4111吸附皮肤,或,使得气体进入负压槽4111以解除被吸附的皮肤。控制组件电性连接气源组件500,以用于控制气源组件500。
气源组件500包括气流驱动件。气流驱动件连通第一气流连接部232,用于驱动气流在第一气流连接部232流动。当第一气流连接部232与第二气流连接部4114连通时,第一气流连接部232和第二气流连接部4114共同形成连通气源组件500和负压槽4111的气流管道。气流驱动件为气泵510,控制组件包括主控板310,气泵510与主控板310电性连接,以在主控板310的控制下开启或关闭。气泵510和气路切换模块520设置于容置腔100a内。气泵510具有泵出气口511和泵进气口512。气泵510能够通过泵进气口512吸入气体。气泵510能够通过泵出气口511排出气体。可选地,泵出气口511连通排气口216。泵进气口512通过气路切换模块520能够与第一气流连接部232连通,进而通过第二气流连接部4114连通负压槽4111。当泵进气口512与第一气流连接部232连通时,气泵510工作,能够通过第一气流连接部232抽吸美容头030的气体,以在美容头030的负压槽4111形成负压。气流驱动件还可以为其他结构,例如为手动泵。
可选的,气流驱动件具有正向抽气模式和反向供气模式,在正向抽气模式时,气流驱动件用于抽取负压槽4111内的气体,以用于将皮肤吸附进负压槽4111内;在反向供气模式时,气流驱动件用于向负压槽4111内供气或暂停抽取负压槽4111内的气体,以用于使皮肤从负压槽4111内脱离。如此,通过一个气流驱动件即可进行对于用户皮肤的吸附与释放,结构简单,有利于简化结构,节约容置腔100a的内部空间,降低组装难度。
通过气源组件500设置于容置腔100a内,使得主体010本身就具有了产生负压的结构基础。主体010和美容头030组装即可进行使用,相较于外置的落地式抽气装置具有更强的便携性能。当然,气源组件500也可以采用外接的形式,气源组件500与外壳100固定连接,且位于外壳100外侧时,使得气源组件500可以进行快速更换。
进一步地,气源组件500还包括气路切换模块520,主控板310与气路切换模块520连接,气路切换模块520具有泄气口5213,气路切换模块520连接在气流驱动件与负压槽4111之间;气路切换模块520被配置为具有负压模式,在负压模式,气路切换模块520使得气流驱动件与负压槽4111连通,以使得气流驱动件抽取负压槽4111内的气体,如此可将用户皮肤抽吸进负压槽4111内;气路切换模块520被配置为还具有使得泄气口5213与负压槽4111连通的泄气模式,以使得通过泄气口5213向负压槽4111内输送气体,以释放皮肤。主控板310控制气路切换模块520在负压模式和泄气模式之间切换。如此,通过控制气路切换模块520在泄气模式和负压模式之间切换即可实现利用负压槽4111抽吸和释放皮肤。
具体的,气路切换模块520包括气阀。通过气阀控制美容仪001的气体流通。具体来说,气阀用于控制负压槽4111与气泵510的连通,以使得气泵510用于从负压槽4111抽吸气体以使得负压槽4111吸附皮肤,或,气阀用于使得气体通过气阀进入负压槽4111以解除被吸附的皮肤。
可选择性地,气阀为三通阀521。在负压模式下,三通阀521能够控制气泵510的泵进气口512与第一气流连接部232和排气口216连通,使得气泵510能够通过第一气流连接部232抽吸负压槽4111的气体,以在负压槽4111形成负压,并将抽吸的气体通过排气口216排出。在泄气模式下,三通阀521还能控制第一气流连接部232和泄气口5213连通,泄气口5213能够向第一气流连接部232提供气体,从而解除负压槽4111的负压,使得负压槽4111处被吸附的皮肤得到释放。
可以理解地,气路切换模块520也可以为其他部件,例如气路切换模块520为单向阀和双向阀组合形成的组件。
这种美容仪001在工作时,可以循环地在负压槽4111内形成负压吸附皮肤,解除负压以释放皮肤。从而使得皮肤能够间歇式地被吸附和被释放,降低长时间负压吸附皮肤带来的不适感,提高用户的使用体验。
可选择性地,泄气口5213可以与排气口216连通,当需要释放负压槽4111的负压时,可以经由排气槽4125引入环境气体。泄气口5213也可以直接连通容置腔100a。容置腔100a非完全密封,通过容置腔100a也可以引入环境气体进入泄气口5213。
可以理解地,气泵510的形式可以为活塞泵,也可以为涡轮泵、真空泵、叶片泵、柱塞泵、薄膜泵、螺杆泵、蠕动泵等。
图26示出了本申请一种实施方式中的气路切换模块520的结构示意图。
请结合参阅图24、图25和图26,可选择性地,三通阀521具有第一阀口5211、第二阀口5212和第三阀口。第三阀口为泄气口5213。三通阀521可以控制第一阀口5211与第二阀口5212连通,或,第一阀口5211与泄气口5213连通。第一阀口5211与第一气流连接部232连通。第二阀口5212与泵进气口512连通。可选地,第一阀口5211与第一气流连接部232通过软管或拼合气道连通,第二阀口5212与泵进气口512通过软管或拼合气道连通。
可选的,三通阀521为电磁阀。
当需要从负压槽4111抽吸气体时,三通阀521控制第一阀口5211与第二阀口5212连通。气体通过负压槽4111、第一气流连接部232、第一阀口5211、第二阀口5212、泵进气口512、泵出气口511、排气口216、排气槽4125的路径排出环境,使得负压槽4111
内形成负压。
当需要解除负压槽4111的负压时,三通阀521控制第一阀口5211与泄气口5213连通。气体通过泄气口5213、第一阀口5211、第一气流连接部232进入负压槽4111内,使得负压槽4111内的其他升高,解除或减轻对皮肤的吸附。
在容置腔100a内,气路切换模块520位于头壳110和气泵510之间。气泵510的泵进气口512和泵出气口511均位于朝向气路切换模块520的一侧,便于气泵510与气路切换模块520的连接。
气路切换模块520还包括气压检测件522。气压检测件522用于检测负压槽4111的气压。无论是抽取负压槽4111的气体的过程,还是卸除负压槽4111的负压的过程,负压槽4111均和第一阀口5211连通,将气压检测件522设置于负压槽4111和第一阀口5211之间,可以检测得到负压槽4111的气压。如此,通过气压检测件522检测负压槽4111内的气压,可防止抽气过量,以避免吸入过多的皮肤而导致用户疼痛。
进一步地,气路切换模块520还包括安装架523。安装架523与外壳100连接,三通阀521和气压检测件522均设置于安装架523。如此,可先将气阀等部件安装于安装架523,再通过安装架523安装到容纳腔4112内,从而可提高安装效率,且便于对气阀等部件固定。
可选择性地,安装架523上设置有限位孔5231。外壳100在容置腔100a内设置有第一预固定部。第一预固定部包括限位柱1303。安装架523还包括限位螺栓(图中未示出)。限位螺栓穿过限位孔5231后,与限位柱1303螺纹连接,即可使得安装架523与外壳100连接。具体地,限位柱1303设置于前壳130。
进一步地,安装架523设置有阀安装腔。其中,阀安装腔包括第一槽体5232,三通阀521容置于第一槽体5232内。
可选择性地,第一槽体5232的开口朝向前壳130设置,当三通阀521容置于第一槽体5232内时,前壳130遮挡第一槽体5232的开口,使得前壳130抵接三通阀521,以限制三通阀521移离第一槽体5232。
进一步地,安装架523在第一槽体5232的侧壁设置有第一避让缺口5233。第一避让缺口5233形成泄气避让口,三通阀521的泄气口5213通过第一避让缺口5233引出第一槽体5232。如此,通过将泄气口5213通过第一避让缺口5233设于第一槽体5232外,一方面可便于将壳体411内或壳体411外的气体吸入泄气口5213内,另一方面也通过将可便于减小第一槽体5232的容积,以便于减小安装架523的体积。
可选择地,第一槽体5232设置第一避让缺口5233的侧壁抵接三通阀521,以限制三通阀521沿第一方向X相对安装架523运动。
进一步地,第一避让缺口5233与第一槽体5232的开口连通,以便于气阀安装。
可选择性地,安装架523设置有第二预固定部。第二预固定部包括定位槽5234。限位孔5231设置于定位槽5234的底壁。限位柱1303能够安装入定位槽5234内,且抵接于定位槽5234的侧壁。示例性的,前壳130设置有两个限位柱1303。当安装架523与外壳100装配时,安装架523设置于两个限位柱1303之间。当装配安装架523于外壳100时,可以先相对靠近前壳130和安装架523,使得限位柱1303插入定位槽5234中,两个限位柱1303均与对应的定位槽5234的侧壁抵接,初步限制安装架523和前壳130的相对位置。再将限位螺栓穿过限位孔5231,并与限位柱1303螺纹配合,加强安装架
523和前壳130的连接强度。
可以理解地,第一预固定部和第二预固定部也可以设置为:第一预固定部包括定位槽5234,第二预固定部包括限位柱1303。通过第二预固定部插入第一预固定部内,以初步限制安装架523和前壳130的相对位置。
进一步地,在安装架523上与第一槽体5232相对的一端设置有第二槽体5235。第二槽体5235的开口朝向后壳120。第二槽体5235用于容置气压检测件522,当安装架523安装于后壳120时,后壳120遮挡第二槽体5235的开口。
进一步地,气压检测件522包括气道件522a和气压传感器5222。其中,气压传感器5222设置于气泵510和负压槽4111之间,用于检测负压槽4111的气压。其中,气压传感器5222安装于气道件522a,且气压传感器5222设于检测通道5221d内,以通过检测通道5221d检测负压槽4111的气压。如此,通过增设气道件522a可便于将气压传感器5222设置于气泵510和负压槽4111之间,且可便于对气压传感器5222进行固定,以提高检测准确性。
具体的,气道件522a包括气道本体5221,气道本体5221内部设置有检测通道5221d,气压传感器5222设于检测通道5221d内,以通过检测通道5221d检测负压槽4111的气压。
示例性的,气道本体5221形成有与检测通道5221d连通的第一端口52211、第二端口52212和第三端口52213,第三端口52213也称为检测口。第一端口52211用于与负压槽4111连通,第二端口52212用于与气泵510连通;第三端口52213位于第一端口52211和第二端口52212之间,气压传感器5222设置于第三端口52213。
具体的,三通阀521的第一阀口5211伸入第二槽体5235内,以与第二端口52212在第二槽体5235内连接,使得第一阀口5211与检测通道5221d连通。
气道件522a安装于安装架523,安装架523安装于保护壳,以使得气道件522a和安装架523整体安装于保护壳。
进一步地,气道本体5221固定安装在第二槽体5235内。可选地,安装架523在第二槽体5235的开口处设置有两个安装螺纹孔5236,气道本体5221设置有两个锁止槽52214。锁止槽52214与安装螺纹孔5236对应。气源组件500包括安装螺栓,两个安装螺栓部分地设置于锁止槽52214内,并与安装螺纹孔5236螺纹配合。气道本体5221被两个安装螺纹孔5236夹持,从而限制安装螺栓、气道本体5221和安装架523的相对位置。通过安装螺栓的头部卡持气道本体5221,可以限制气道本体5221相对远离安装架523,从而固定气道本体5221和安装架523的相对位置。
当安装架523安装于前壳130连接时,前壳130遮挡第二槽体5235的开口,也遮挡并保护气道本体5221。而需要检修气压检测件522时,解除前壳130和安装架523的配合,即可使得气压检测件522露出,从而直接对气压检测件522进行检修。
可以理解地,气源组件500也可以不包括气压传感器5222,将气压传感器5222设置于其他位置也可。例如气泵510内置检测气压的功能,则可以推导得到负压槽4111内的气压,例如气压传感器5222设置于负压槽4111内。
进一步地,气道本体5221包括用于形成检测通道5221d的气道基板5221a、第一气道柱5221b和第二气道柱5221c、第一气道柱5221b凸设于气道基板5221a的一侧面,第二气道柱5221c凸设于第一气道柱5221b的一侧,气道基板5221a的另一侧面形成与
第一气道柱5221b连通的第三端口52213,第一气道柱5221b的自由端形成第二端口52212,第二气道柱5221c与第一气道柱5221b连通,第二气道柱5221c的自由端形成第一端口52211。
检测通道5221d的第一端口52211与第一气流连接部232连通。气体在第一阀口5211和第一气流连接部232之间流通时,都会通过第一端口52211和第二端口52212流经检测通道5221d。
当需要从负压槽4111抽吸气体时,控制三通阀521使第一阀口5211与第二阀口5212连通。气体通过负压槽4111、检测通道5221d、第一气流连接部232、第一阀口5211、第二阀口5212、泵进气口512、泵出气口511、排气口216、排气槽4125的路径排出环境,使得负压槽4111内形成负压。
当需要解除负压槽4111的负压时,控制三通阀521使第一阀口5211与泄气口5213连通。气体通过泄气口5213、第一阀口5211、检测通道5221d、第一气流连接部232进入负压槽4111内,使得负压槽4111内的其他升高,解除或减轻对皮肤的吸附。
进一步地,安装架523在第二槽体5235的一侧还设置有观察窗5237。通过观察窗5237可以观察第一阀口5211和第一端口52211在第二槽体5235内的配合情况。也方便调整第一阀口5211和第一端口52211的相对位置,使得第一阀口5211和第一端口52211紧密配合,在第一阀口5211和第一端口52211处不易泄气。
进一步地,安装架523在第二槽体5235上与观察窗5237相对的一侧还设置有第二避让缺口52351。第二避让缺口52351形成检测避让孔。通过第二避让缺口52351设置通气管道以连通第一端口52211和第一气流连接部232。如此,通过将第一端口52211通过第二避让缺口52351设于第二槽体5235外,一方面可便于连通第一端口52211和第一气流连接部232,另一方面也通过将可便于减小第二槽体5235的容积,以便于减小安装架523的体积。
进一步地,气压检测件522还包括气道密封件5223。气道密封件5223与气道本体5221连接以密封第三端口52213。如此,可方便安装和拆卸气压传感器5222。
可选择地,气道本体5221设置有第一连接孔52215,气道密封件5223设置有第二连接孔52231。通过在第一连接孔52215和第二连接孔52231设置密封螺栓使得气道密封件5223和气道本体5221紧密配合,气道密封件5223紧贴气道本体5221的表面,并密封第三端口52213。
气道密封件5223安装于气道基板5221a的另一侧面,以密封检测口,气压传感器5222安装于气道密封件5223。
进一步地,气道密封件5223的侧面设有安装入检测口内的气道环凸5223a,气道环凸5223a与检测口密封连接,气压传感器5222安装于气道环凸5223a内。其中,第三端口52213设置为沉孔。
一部分实施例中,可使气压传感器5222通过粘接等方式固定在气道环凸5223a内。另一部分实施例中,可使气压传感器5222设置于第三端口52213处,抵接于沉孔的底壁,具体来说,当气道密封件5223与气道本体5221连接后,沉孔的底壁和气道密封件5223共同夹持气压传感器5222,气道环凸5223a抵接沉孔的内壁,从而限制气压传感器5222和气道本体5221的相对位置。
进一步地,气路切换模块520还包括限位板524,阀安装腔还包括扩展限位腔5238。
第一槽体5232和扩展限位腔5238并列设置。三通阀521的第二阀口5212伸入扩展限位腔5238内,扩展限位腔5238朝向气泵510的侧壁设置有腔连通口5239。通过腔连通口5239设置通气管道以连通第二阀口5212和泵进气口512。如此,通过将第二阀口5212设置在扩展限位腔5238并在其内与气泵510连接,可以通过扩展限位腔5238对其进行防护,以防止在组装其他部件时触碰到第二阀口5212而影响气密性。
其中,扩展限位腔5238还具有敞口。限位板524安装于扩展限位腔5238背离第二槽体5235的一端,也即扩展限位腔5238的敞口处。如此,可通过限位板524实现防脱和保护。
可选地,限位板524通过安装架523和/或前壳130限制位置,如限位板524卡接于安装架523。当三通阀521具有相对安装架523移动的趋势时,还可以通过限位板524抵接第二阀口5212以限制三通阀521的移动趋势,限制第二阀口5212从扩展限位腔5238脱离。
其中,第一槽体5232和扩展限位腔5238之间具有阀隔板523c,阀隔板523c上设有连通两者的连通缺口,以便于安装气阀。
具体地,安装架523包括泵安装基板523a和阀围板523b。阀围板523b设置于泵安装基板523a的一侧。阀围板523b绕泵安装基板523a的外周设置,与泵安装基板523a围合形成阀安装腔。阀围板523b的内壁还凸设有阀隔板523c,以在阀安装腔内限定出均具有敞口(即开口)的第一槽体5232和扩展限位腔5238,以用于安装三通阀521。阀围板523b包括靠近气泵510设置的第一阀侧板523b1和与第一阀侧板523b1相对设置的第二阀侧板523b2。第一阀侧板523b1上设置腔连通口5239,第二阀侧板523b2上设置用于显露和避让泄气口5213的第一避让缺口5233。
具体地,安装架523还包括设于泵安装基板523a的另一侧的气道围板523d,气道围板523d与泵安装基板523a围合形成具有敞口的第二槽体5235。气道围板523d包括靠近负压槽4111设置的气道侧板523d1,气道侧板523d1上设有第二避让缺口52351,以供气道件522a与负压槽4111连通。
图27示出了本申请一种实施方式中的后壳120和显示模块600的分解示意图。图28示出了本申请一种实施方式中的按压件710的结构示意图。
请结合参阅图2和图27,主体010还包括显控组件,外壳100具有与容置腔100a连通的显控安装口1203,显控组件整体安装于显控安装口1203处,如此,可事先在外壳100外组装好显控组件后再整体安装在外壳100上,可减少外壳100对组装的影响,从而降低组装难度、提高装配效率。
进一步地,显控组件包括显示模块600和按键模块700。显示模块600用于显示美容仪001的信息。美容仪001的信息可以为美容仪001的工作信息,例如射频电极420的射频电流强度,主体010的故障状态等,也可以为美容仪001的装配状态,例如当前连接于主体010的美容头030的类型。
显示模块600设置于后壳120的显示区域,显示区域位于外壳100从第一方向X过渡至第一倾斜方向U的区域,也即显示区域为外壳100上从拿持部101过渡至弯折部121的区域。如此,可以避免用户在握持时遮挡显示区域,且可便于增大显示区域。
其中,显示模块600包括显示电路板620和导光组件630,显示电路板620用于向显示区域发出光线。
进一步地,显控模块还包括显控板610。外壳100在显示区域设置有显示窗口;显控板610与外壳100连接于显示窗口处;显示电路板620用于向显控板610发出光线。按键模块700安装于显控板610,显控板610安装于外壳100,以使得按键模块700通过显控板610整体安装于外壳100。如此,通过事先将按键模块700安装于显控板610,再通过显控板610整体安装于外壳100上,可提高安装效率。
其中,显控安装口1203设于后壳120,显控板610与后壳120连接于显控安装口1203处。可选地,显控板610盖设于显控安装口1203,以限制杂物通过显控安装口1203进入到容置腔100a内。
其中,显控安装口1203设置于后壳120背离前壳130的一侧,且显控安装口1203位于后壳120靠近头壳110的一端。具体来说,显控安装口1203位于外壳100从第一方向X过渡至第一倾斜方向U的区域;显控板610也呈弧面状。
在部分实施例中,从远离头壳110的一端到靠近头壳110的一端,显控板610从沿第一方向X延伸弯折至沿第一倾斜方向U延伸,并与头壳110连接。沿第三方向Z,显控板610的尺寸小于后壳120的尺寸。
在本实施例中,沿垂直于第一方向X的截面,第一半壳的截面为U型,以形成朝向第二半壳的开口,这样在第一半壳与第二半壳组装后可形成较大的内部空间,但是这样会使得第一半壳在朝向第二半壳的方向具有较大的深度,在组装时空间相对较受限。而本申请中,通过整体组装的方式,可以降低第一半壳对组装的影响,从而提高组装效率。
可选择性地,后壳120在显控安装口1203的外周设置有限位槽1204。也即,显控安装口1203位于限位槽1204的底部,显控板610容置于限位槽1204内,具体的,显控板610贴合限位槽1204的底壁设置。如此,通过设置限位槽1204容置显控板610,可在组装时事先初定位,又可在组装完成后防止显控板610凸出过高。其中,限位槽1204设于后壳120的外表面,从而可进一步地降低组装难度。通过限位槽1204的内壁限制显控板610沿第一方向X和第三方向Z相对后壳120移动。
进一步地,后壳120在限位槽1204的区域内还设置有限位通孔1205。限位通孔1205沿第二方向Y贯通。通过螺栓穿过限位通孔1205并与显控板610螺纹连接,即可在第二方向Y上固定显控板610和后壳120。具体来说,显控组件还包括显控安装螺栓,显控板610设置有显控螺纹孔,显控安装螺栓穿过限位通孔1205并与显控螺纹孔螺纹配合,以安装外壳100和显控板610。
进一步地,限位通孔1205设置在限位槽1204内且显控安装口1203之外的区域。
可选择性地,显控板610背离头壳110的一端具有第一弧形边611和第二弧形边612。第一弧形边611和第二弧形边612沿一对称面对称,该对称面垂直于第三方向Z,后壳120大致也沿该对称面对称。第一弧形边611和第二弧形边612之间形成凸角。凸角为小于180°的角,即向外凸出的角。第一弧形边611和第二弧形边612均抵接于限位槽1204的内壁,通过第一弧形边611、第二弧形边612与限位槽1204内壁的抵接,可以使得显控板610对准限位槽1204的中部。
可选择性地,显示模块600的显示电路板620与显控板610可拆卸连接。显控板610大致呈板状。显示电路板620包括多个灯光件621,灯光件621朝向显控板610设置,通过灯光件621可以向显控板610发出可见光。
其中,显控板610设置有向容置腔100a内延伸的限位卡扣613。限位卡扣613卡设
于显示电路板620背离显控板610的一面,从而限制显示电路板620脱离显控板610。
显示电路板620可以与主控板310电性连接,通过主控板310控制显示电路板620上的灯光件621发出可见光。
可以理解地,显示模块600也可以不包括显示电路板620,而将显示电路板620的功能集成于其他电路板中,例如集成于主控板310内,主控板310连接灯光件621,而灯光件621可以集成于显控板610内。
其中,导光组件630设置于显控板610和显示电路板620之间,导光组件630用于传导显示电路板620的光线至显控板610。可选的,导光组件630朝向显控板610的一端贴合显控板610,导光组件630朝向显示电路板620的一端贴合显示电路板620。如此,有利于提高显控组件的整体结构的紧凑程度,减少对于容置腔100a的占用,以便于安装其他元器件;此外,采用贴合的方式设置能够提高导光的效率,使得用户能够观察到更高的亮度,便于用户获取关于美容仪001的信息。通过导光组件630匹配板状的显示电路板620和弧面状的显控板610。导光组件630穿过显控安装口1203以将容置腔100a内显示电路板620的可见光传导至显控板610处。
可选择性地,导光组件630包括导光件631和隔光件632。导光件631包括至少两个导光板6311,多个导光板6311沿第一方向X间隔分布。导光板6311沿第二方向Y的尺寸适配显控板610的弧面,使得导光板6311的一端靠近显示电路板620的同时,另一端尽量靠近显控板610。每个导光板6311对应显示电路板620上至少一个灯光件621。导光件631将灯光件621发出的可见光传导至显控板610处。显控板610与导光件631对应的区域为透光区域。用户通过显控板610可以观察到导光件631传导的可见光。
可选择性地,隔光件632包括多个隔光板6321,多个隔光板6321沿第一方向X间隔分布。隔光板6321沿第二方向Y的尺寸适配显控板610的弧面,使得隔光板6321的一端靠近显示电路板620的同时,另一端尽量靠近显控板610。每相邻的两个导光板6311之间设置一个隔光板6321,通过隔光板6321限制相邻两个导光板6311之间传导可见光。通过隔光板6321,一方面使得各个导光板6311可以独立地导光,降低相邻导光板6311之间串色,另一方面可以降低导光板6311内光线的逸散,提到导光板6311的导光效果。
可选地,隔光件632与导光件631连接,导光件631与显示电路板620连接。如此,在进行装配时,可在外壳100外将隔光件632与导光件631连接,以及将导光件631与显示电路板620连接,随后再将连接后的整体与外壳100连接,以降低组装难度。
可选地,每个导光板6311具有第一端面63111和第二端面63112。第一端面63111和第二端面63112大致沿对称面对称。第一端面63111和第二端面63112之间呈凸角。凸角为小于180°的角,即向外凸出的角。第一端面63111和第二端面63112抵接于同一个隔光板6321,使得导光板6311能够对准后壳120的中部。
可选择性地,导光件631还包括第一底板6312。多个导光板6311之间通过第一底板6312连接。隔光件632还包括第二底板6322。多个隔光板6321之间通过第二底板6322连接。第一底板6312朝向显示电路板620的一面设置底板安装槽63121。第二底板6322卡设于底板安装槽63121内,以限制导光件631和隔光件632沿第三方向Z的相对位移。导光板6311和隔光板6321抵接,限制导光件631和隔光件632沿第一方向X的相对运动。第一底板6312朝向显示电路板620的一面还设置有插接柱63122,插接柱63122与显示电路板620插接,使得导光件631与显示电路板620相对固定地连接。第二底板6322
夹设于第一底板6312和显示电路板620之间,限制导光件631、隔光件632和显示电路板620沿第二方向Y的相对运动。
进一步地,按键模块700用于接收来自用户的按压信号,以便操控美容仪001。显控板610设置有按压窗口6101,按键模块700安装于显控板610的按压窗口6101处,如此,可通过按压窗口6101观察和控制按键模块700。
进一步地,按键模块700与控制组件电性连接,以使得控制组件根据按键模块700的信号控制射频电极420释放射频电流,和/或,以使得控制组件根据按键模块700的信号控制气源组件500。
进一步地,按键模块700包括按压件710和按键电路板720。按压件710能够相对显控板610沿第二方向Y相对运动。按键电路板720设置于容置腔100a内。显控板610设置有装配柱6102。螺栓穿过按键电路板720后与装配柱6102螺纹连接,即可使得按键电路板720与显控板610连接。按键电路板720包括按键块721。按压件710具有柔性部711。当用户按压柔性部711时,柔性部711能够柔性变形且朝向按键块721移动。柔性部711作用于按键块721,能够触发电信号,使得按键电路板720产生电信号,以操控美容仪001工作。
可以理解地,按键模块700也可以采用非接触式的形式,例如,采用手势感应的形式,通过感应用户的手势即可转换为电信号以操控美容仪001工作。
可选择性地,显控组件由显控板610、显示模块600和按键模块700组成。显示模块600和按键模块700安装于显控板610,显控板610安装于外壳100,以使得显示模块600和按键模块700可以通过显控板610整体安装于外壳100。这种显控组件可以先预组装再安装于外壳100,降低了美容仪001的组装难度。
可选择性地,按压件710具有限位外沿712。限位外沿712设置容置腔100a内。限位外沿712的尺寸大于按压窗口6101的尺寸。当按压件710相对显控板610沿第二方向Y移动时,限位外沿712能够抵接显控板610以限制按压件710沿第二方向Y从按压窗口6101脱离显控板610。柔性部711设置于限位外沿712中间。
可以理解地,按压件710的限位外沿712与柔性部711也可以一体成型。限位外沿712与柔性部711采用同一种材料。限位外沿712的体积足够大,使得限位外沿712受到外力变形后不容易收缩至能够从按压窗口6101的狭小区域穿过,从而依然可以抵接显控板610,以限制按压件710沿第二方向Y从按压窗口6101脱离显控板610。而柔性部711的区域足够大,则可以柔性部711产生足够大的变形量以接触按键块721并驱动按键块721。请结合参阅图27和图28,柔性部711还包括按压凸起713。按压凸起713向按压件710延伸,以便柔性部711在变形后接触到按键块721。
当用户使用美容仪001时,可以观察显控板610上的信息,以便判断美容仪001的状态。通过手指对按压件710施力,以驱动按键块721。按键块721被驱动后,主控板310能够接收到电信号,并改变美容仪001的工作模式。与之对应地,显示电路板620匹配工作模式以控制灯光件621发出可见光。用户能够从显控板610显示的信息,判断美容仪001当前的工作模式,并按需求对按压件710施力得以选择对应的工作模式。例如,用户需要开启美容仪001。观察显控板610未发出可见光,则可以通过长按按压件710,使得按键块721被长按,主控板310接收到持续的电信号,则判断用户需要开启美容仪001,开启美容仪001后,显控板610发出可见光,用户则能够判断当前美容仪001
已开启。当用户需要从第一工作模式切换到第三工作模式时,观察显控板610发出与第一工作模式对应的第一颜色。用户通过短按按压件710,使得按键块721被按压,主控板310接收到电信号,则判断用户需要切换美容仪001的工作模式,则将第一工作模式切换至第二工作模式。用户再次观察显控板610,显控板610发出与第二工作模式对应的第二颜色,而非与第三工作模式对应的第三颜色。此时,用户再次通过短按按压件710,使得按键块721被按压,主控板310接收到电信号,则判断用户需要切换美容仪001的工作模式,则将第二工作模式切换至第三工作模式。用户再次观察显控板610,显控板610发出与第三工作模式对应的第三颜色,则判断美容仪001处于需求的第三工作模式。
按键模块700、显示模块600以及显控板610共同形成显控组件。按键模块700、显示模块600以及显控板610可以预先组装形成显控组件后,再一起安装至外壳100的显控安装口1203处,使得美容仪001更容易装配。
进一步地,控制组件还包括射频电路板810。射频电路板810与主控板310电性连接,射频电路板810用于控制射频电极420释放射频电流。可选地,射频电路板810可以用于连接电源线050,以接收电能,射频电路板810电性连接主控板310,以对主控板310供电。可选地,射频电路板810与显控板610连接,显控板610又与后壳120连接,从而限制射频电路板810与后壳120的相对位置。
可选地,主控板310与射频电路板810围绕气流驱动件设置。
在部分实施例中,可使美容仪001还可以包括适配器,适配器连接电源线050。通过适配器连接家用电网或者便携电源,使得家用电网或者便携电源的电压转换为美容仪001需要的电压后,再将电能提供至射频电路板810。具体的,适配器与控制组件电性连接,适配器用于对控制组件和/或气源组件500供电。
可选的,适配器与外壳100可拆卸连接。如此,在无需向射频电路板810提供电能时,用户可将适配器从外壳100上取下,以便于收纳美容仪001和适配器,且当适配器出现损坏时,也便于维修更换,有利于降低美容仪001的维护成本。
在另一部分实施例中,可使美容仪001还包括电池。电池设置于容置腔100a内。电池电性连接射频电路板810,射频电路板810对主控板310供电。而主控板310又可以通过主体电路板250对头部电路板460供电,从而使得射频电极420能够输出射频电流,主控板310还能够对气源组件500供电。
进一步地,主控板310还与气源组件500电性连接,使得气泵510能够通过三通阀521抽吸负压槽4111的气体。
可以理解地,电池和适配器两者可以择一,使得美容仪001仅从电池或适配器取得电能。美容仪001也可以同时包括电池和适配器,提高用户的选择自由度。
可以理解地,射频电路板810也可以直接与外壳100连接,从而限制射频电路板810与外壳100的相对位置,使得射频电路板810能够稳定地设置于容置腔100a内。
可以理解地,射频电路板810沿第一方向X延伸,射频电路板810与主控板310位于气源组件500靠近的两侧,使得射频电路板810与主控板310之间的夹角在70°至110°之间,如可使射频电路板810与主控板310大致垂直。如此可以便于提高空间利用率。
本申请提供的美容仪001,在使用时,使得美容头030主体010连接。在美容头030装入装配槽212a内后,卡勾22111与卡槽41231配合,限制美容头030和主体010的相
对位置。而美容头030装入装配槽212a时,第一气流连接部232通过负压孔4122插入第二气流连接部4114内,实现第一气流连接部232与负压槽4111连通。通过三通阀521连通第一阀口5211和第二阀口5212,即可使得气泵510从负压槽4111抽吸气体,在负压槽4111内形成负压以吸附皮肤。在美容头030装入装配槽212a时,导气件4124插入排气口216中,排气槽4125和第一组装面212b之间也形成排气通道。气泵510排出的气体可以通过排气口216和排气槽4125排出美容仪001。因此,在装配美容头030和主体010的同时,气泵510出口和气泵510入口均与美容头030实现连接,既可以通过气泵510入口在负压槽4111内形成负压,又可以在美容头030和容置腔100a内壁之间排出气体。而且用户拿持外壳100并使用美容仪001时,用户主要观察美容仪001的美容头030,而很少观察美容仪001的尾盖部分131。通过排气槽4125引导气体经由美容头030和装配槽212a内壁之间的缝隙排出,便于用户观察美容仪001排气槽4125是否被堵塞,保持美容仪001的正常运行。
在美容头030装入装配槽212a时,主体010的第一电连接件240也与美容头030的第二电连接件470连接,从而实现美容头030和主体010的电性连接。射频电极420通过头部电路板460与第二电连接件470电性连接。主体010能够对美容头030提供电能,并控制射频电极420的射频电流输出。
本申请提供的美容仪001通过美容头030装入装配槽212a,既能够实现气泵出口和气泵入口与美容头030的连接,又能够实现美容头030和主体010的电性连接。方便用户的操作。
进一步地,主体010还能够识别美容头030的类型。美容头030包括多种类型。例如,美容头030可以为包括两个射频电极420的第一类型模块,还可以为包括四个射频电极420的第二类型模块。当美容头030装入装配槽212a时,主体010能够识别美容头030的类型,如是第一类型模块还是第二类型模块,便于主体010针对性地控制美容头030。美容头030上的射频电极420的数量也可以为其他,例如,五个射频电极420位于五边形的五个角,每次开启间隔的两个射频电极420形成射频电流。
如此,本申请通过设置多个美容头030择一地安装于主体010上,可使用户能够根据需求选择不同的美容头030进行使用;且本申请还可通过识别不同类型的美容头030而进行相对应的控制,从而可提高美容仪001的使用灵活性。
进一步地,主体010包括感应器,美容头030包括感应件。感应器用于识别美容头030的类型。在一些实施例中,感应器可以为霍尔传感器,感应件为磁性件;不同类型的美容头030设置不同类型的磁性件,通过霍尔传感器感应美容头030的磁性件,即可判断美容头030的类型。在另一些实施例中,感应器还可以为嵌入或集成到主控板310或者主体电路板250内的识别电路,通过识别第二电连接件470的类型以判断美容头030的类型。在另一些实施例中,感应器还可以为NFC传感器,感应件为NFC线圈;NFC传感器可以感应到NFC线圈的类型,从而判断美容头030的类型。
图29示出了本申请一种实施方式中的气路切换模块520的结构示意图。
请结合参阅图20-22和图29,感应器包括至少三个感应点,感应件分别与其中至少两个感应点电性接触,以导通被感应件电性接触的两个感应点。如此,可通过感应到的不同位置或数量的感应点来识别不同类型的美容头030,且这种方式成本较低,占用空间较小。
进一步地,可使至少三个第一电连接件240的一端形成感应点,每个第一电连接件240可以形成一个感应点。至少两个第二电连接件470被配置为感应件的一部分,即是说,感应件包括至少部分的第二电连接件470,其中,“至少部分的第二电连接件470”所示的是数量上的部分,即多个第二电连接件470可能仅有其中的几个用于形成感应件。如此,可以理解的是,既可以对第一电连接件240和第二电连接件470进行分类,即部分第一电连接件240以及与其对应的第二电连接件470用于实现与射频电极420或第一温度传感器430又或第二温度传感器450的电连接和控制,部分第一电连接件240以及与其对应的第二电连接件470用于实现美容头030的类型识别;又可以使部分第一电连接件240和第二电连接件470具有多重功能,即实现与射频电极420或第一温度传感器430又或第二温度传感器450的电连接的第一电连接件240以及与其对应的第二电连接件470,还用于实现美容头030的类型识别。这两种方式都是只需要改变第一电连接件240和第二电连接件470的数量,制作简单、成本低。
进一步地,头部电路板460的连接触点464包括导通触点和断路触点(即第四类型电触点)。部分第二电连接件470与导通触点接触配合,部分第二电连接件470与断路触点接触配合。可以理解,当一个第二电连接件470与导通触点接触配合时,该第二电连接件470形成导通针470a,并与头部电路板460电性连接,至少两个第二电连接件470被配置为导通针470a。当一个第二电连接件470与断路触点接触配合时,该第二电连接件470为假第二电连接件,假第二电连接件形成断路针470b,并与头部电路板460非电性连接。断路针470b接触的第一电连接件240也与头部电路板460非电性连接。断路针470b不在头部电路板460和主体电路板250之间传递电信号。
具体来说,主体电路板250或主控板310等内设有与第一电连接件240连接的识别电路,不同类型的美容头030包括不同数量和/或位于不同位置的导通针470a和断路针470b,不同类型的美容头030安装到主体010上时后,识别电路会产生不同的电信号,从而可识别出不同的美容头030。
换而言之,当主体电路板250向所有第一电连接件240施加高电平时,收到头部电路板460的反馈,以便电路板判断第二电连接件470属于导通针470a或断路针470b。电路板判断所有第二电连接件470的类型后,可以进而判断美容头030的类型。例如,若第一类型模块中有四个第二电连接件470为断路针470b,而其他第二电连接件470为导通针470a。当主体电路板250判断头部电路板460中有四个第二电连接件470时,则判断该美容头030为第一类型模块。若第二类型模块中有两个第二电连接件470为断路针470b,而其他第二电连接件470为导通针470a。当主体电路板250判断头部电路板460中有二个第二电连接件470时,则判断该美容头030为第二类型模块。再例如,若第一类型模块中有两个第二电连接件470为断路针470b,且两个断路针470b相邻设置,而其他第二电连接件470为导通针470a。当主体电路板250判断头部电路板460仅有两个断路针470b,且两个断路针470b相邻设置时,则判断该美容头030为第一类型模块。若第二类型模块中有两个第二电连接件470为断路针470b,且两个断路针470b之间还设置有一个导通针470a,而其他第二电连接件470为导通针470a。当主体电路板250判断头部电路板460仅有两个断路针470b,且两个断路针470b之间还设置有一个导通针470a时,则判断该美容头030为第二类型模块。
具体的,安装壳410和第二电连接件470一体注塑。
可以理解,在其他实施例中,也可以不设置假第二电连接件(即断路针470b),这样的话,会使得不同类型的美容头030的安装壳410的模具不同。即是说,本方式中,通过设置假第二电连接件,可使得不同类型的美容头030的安装壳410的模具,从而可以便于降低生产成本。
可以理解的,断路针470b使得头部电路板460和第一电连接件240非电性连接的形式也可以为其他。例如,在断路针470b的表面涂覆绝缘层,而在导通针470a的表面不涂覆绝缘层。例如,在断路针470b的第一针段471或第二针段472的表面涂覆绝缘层。
通过设置假第二电连接件,可以使得不同类型的美容头030具有外观大致相同的第二电连接件470排布。在生产美容头030时,不同类型的美容头030的第二电连接件470数量可以相同,使得不同类型的美容头030在生产时可以采用同一套生产模具,从而节省生产成本。
而第二电连接件470中的导通针470a和断路针470b可以在生产的过程中放置于不同的原料盒内,使得生产设备从对应的原料盒取料即可。或者将不同类型的头部电路板460放置于不同的原料盒,生产设备从不同的原料盒取出对应不同美容头030类型的头部电路板460,以完成不同类型的美容头030的生产装配。再或者在生产出美容头030后,再对第二电连接件470涂覆绝缘层以使得对应的第二电连接件470形成断路针470b。
进一步地,至少三个感应点中任意两个感应点之间具有不同的电阻。这样当任意两个感应点被两个导通针470a导通后,可将该两感应点之间的电阻短路,从而主体010内的识别电路可以根据不同电阻的短路情况产生不同的电信号,以识别出不同的美容头030。
如图29所示,具体来说,通过当美容头030与主体010连接时,两个导通针470a连接两个第一电连接件240形成的感应点并导通形成回路,该两个第一电连接件240之间的电阻被两个导通针470a及头部电路板460内的线路短路,使得主体010感应到电流特性,从而判断美容头030的类型。当美容头030上导通针470a的位置发生变化时,主体010能够感应到不同的电流特性,从而识别不同类型的美容头030。
可以理解地,感应件也即第二电连接件470形成的导通针470a也可以同时导通三个第一电连接件240形成的感应点,以形成对应的电阻组件,通过主体010感应到不同的电流特性,从而识别不同类型的美容头030。可选择性地,电流特性可以为电阻、电压或电流。
当用户将美容头030装配至主体010时,主体010识别出美容头030的类型,并能够提供与美容头030类型对应的控制形式以供用户选择,能够提高用户的使用体验。
可以理解地,本申请提供的美容仪001中,美容头030还可以应用于直板状的主体010。直板状的主体010中,头壳110不再相对前壳130和后壳120沿第一倾斜方向U倾斜。使得整个外壳100均沿第一方向X延伸。当用户使用直板状的美容仪001时,可以倾斜手腕以适配皮肤和美容仪001的夹角。
可以理解,在上述美容头030与主体010可拆的实施例中,多个射频电极420、安装壳410等形成射频组件,其中安装壳410即为射频壳,该部分实施例中,可使多个射频电极420通过安装壳410等间接的方式安装于朝肤板011a,射频壳可拆卸地安装于朝肤板011a。
图30示出了本申请另一种实施方式中的美容仪001的爆炸示意图。图31示出了本
申请另一种实施方式中的美容仪001的剖视图。
如图30和图31所示,这种美容仪001包括外壳100、射频组件。外壳100包括第一半壳、第二半壳和头壳110。第一半壳为后壳120,第二半壳为前壳130。第一半壳的一端具有向靠近第二半壳的一侧折弯倾斜而在第一倾斜方向U设置的弯折部121,弯折部121能够适配头壳110,以便组装头壳110、前壳130和后壳120。头壳110、前壳130和后壳120组装后形成外壳100。当用户使用这种美容仪001时,美容仪001的头壳110朝向用户皮肤。
在该部分实施例中,头壳110用于形成美容头030,朝肤板011a为贴肤板,多个射频电极420显露地安装于朝肤板011a。
在该部分实施例中,进一步地,美容仪001还包括冷敷组件900,冷敷组件900安装于头壳110,冷敷组件900包括冷敷件910和制冷片930。其中,冷敷件910显露地安装于朝肤板011a,制冷片930设置于头壳110内。制冷片930与冷敷件910导热连接,使得冷敷件910的热量能够传导至制冷片930处,通过制冷片930吸收热量,以保持冷敷件910的温度处于较低的水平实现皮肤的冷敷,甚至实现冰点体感。
在该部分实施例中,可选择性地,射频电极420沿预设方向间隔设有至少3个。预设方向可以为第二倾斜方向V。任意相邻两射频电极420之间均设有至少一个冷敷件910,两个射频电极420之间产生射频电流时,对两个射频电极420之间的皮肤进行电流刺激美容,而冷敷件910则可以对该部分皮肤同步进行冷敷,提高用户的使用体验,降低用户的灼烧感;而且更为重要的是,当射频电极420释放射频能量时,射频电极420覆盖处的皮肤由于射频电极420也有能量加持温度较高,而在两射频电极420之间设置冷敷件910,虽然会对射频电极420覆盖的区域冷敷,但显然两射频电极420之间的皮肤冷敷更好,这样最后可形成冷热交替的冷敷效果,从而可提高美容效果。
这种美容仪001能够通过射频电极420对用户皮肤进行美容,而且头壳110的倾斜设置,使得射频电极420倾斜于第一方向X,当用户手持美容仪001时,能够使得射频电极420和冷敷件910更容易贴合用户皮肤。头壳110设置组装凹口11314,又能够方便头壳110成型后的脱模。弯折部121大致凸出于后壳120,头壳110连接于弯折部121与前壳130,头壳110的组装凹口11314与弯折部121配合连接。弯折部121大致凸出于后壳120指弯折部121从后壳120整体向头壳110的方向延伸,前壳130并不直接与弯折部121配合,使得前壳130和后壳120连接后,弯折部121大致呈现凸出于后壳120的状态。
可以理解,上述美容头030与主体010可拆的美容仪001可以设计为便携式射频美容仪,其将射频组件和气源组件500组合到手持壳上,以实现射频美容的小型化、便携化。其中,在上述实施例中,美容头030的安装壳410、主体010的外壳100和连接内壳210等形成手持壳,也即保护壳。这样,通过将射频组件(射频电极420、射频电路板810等)组装到手持壳上,可实现射频美容仪的小型化和便携化,且通过在手持壳设置负压槽4111和与负压槽4111配合使用的气源组件500,可在射频美容仪工作时,通过负压槽4111将皮肤吸入负压槽4111内后,再通过射频电极420对吸入后的皮肤发出射频电流,从而可使射频电流穿透被吸入负压槽4111内的皮肤,从而可增大射频能量的射入深度,从而可提高美容效果。
可以理解的是,上述实施例中,为了便于提高组装效率,将美容头030与主体010
设计为可拆结构,但在其他实施例中,也可以将便携式射频美容仪的美容头030与主体010设计为不可拆或难拆结构,此时可取消相应的可拆相关结构,如取消第一电连接件240和第二电连接件470、取消第一气流连接部232和第二气流连接部4114其中之一,取消头部电路板460和主体电路板250至少其中之一,取消连接内壳210等,其均为适应性改变的结构,如将手持壳设计为如30和图31所示实施例中的外壳100的形式,在此不一一赘述。
可以理解的是,在该部分实施例中,手持壳即为保护壳。
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的公开范围之内。
Claims (30)
- 一种美容仪,其特征在于,包括;主体;美容头,包括负压槽和射频电极,所述负压槽用于负压吸附用户皮肤,以将皮肤吸附到负压槽内,所述射频电极用于对用户皮肤释放射频电流;所述美容头与所述主体可拆卸连接;当所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述负压槽与所述主体连通以用于产生负压,所述射频电极与所述主体电性连接以使得所述主体向所述射频电极提供电能。
- 如权利要求1所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述主体包括第一电连接件,所述美容头还包括第二电连接件,所述第二电连接件与所述射频电极电性连接,所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一电连接件与所述第二电连接件电性连接,以使得所述主体向所述射频电极提供电能;所述主体包括第一气流连接部,所述美容头还包括与所述负压槽连通的第二气流连接部,所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通,以使得所述负压槽与所述主体连通。
- 如权利要求2所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述主体具有第一组装面,所述美容头具有第二组装面,当所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面对应设置;所述第一电连接件从所述第一组装面露出于所述主体,所述第二电连接件从第二组装面露出于所述美容头,以在所述美容头与所述主体连接时,使所述第一电连接件与所述第二电连接件电性连接;和/或,所述第一气流连接部从所述第一组装面露出于所述主体,所述第二气流连接部从第二组装面露出于所述美容头,以在所述美容头与所述主体连接时,使所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通。
- 如权利要求3所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述主体还包括主控板,所述主控板电性连接所述第一电连接件,以通过所述第一电连接件和所述第二电连接件控制所述射频电极释放射频电流;和/或,当所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面拆卸方向上对应设置;和/或,当所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面接触或抵接。
- 如权利要求1-4中任意一项所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述射频电极靠近所述负压槽设置,或者所述射频电极至少部分地延伸至所述负压槽的内壁,以使得所述射频电极对被所述负压槽负压吸附的皮肤释放射频电流。
- 如权利要求3所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述主体包括连接模块,所述连接模块包括所述第一电连接件和第一气流连接部,所述第一组装面设于所述连接模块,所述美容头可拆卸连接于所述连接模块,以使所述美容头与所述主体可拆卸连接。
- 如权利要求6所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述连接模块或所述美容头设置有装配槽,所述装配槽的底部形成所述第一组装面或所述第二组装面,以使得所述美容头装入所述连接模块的所述装配槽或所述连接模块装入所述美容头的所述装配槽,并限制所述连接模块和所述美容头的相对位置。
- 如权利要求6所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述连接模块还包括锁止组件,所述锁止组件用于在所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面接触或抵接时连接所述美容头,以限制所述美容头远离所述连接模块。
- 如权利要求8所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述锁止组件用于在所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面接触或抵接时与所述美容头卡接配合,以限制所述美容头远离所述连接模块;或,所述锁止组件用于在所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面接触或抵接时磁性吸附所述美容头,以限制所述美容头远离所述连接模块。
- 如权利要求9所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述锁止组件包括卡合部,所述美容头设置有卡接部;所述卡合部设置于所述第一组装面,所述卡接部设置于所述第二组装面;所述第一组装面与所述第二组装面接触或抵接时,所述卡合部与所述卡接部配合,并限制所述美容头和所述主体的相对位置。
- 如权利要求8所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述连接模块还包括解锁组件;所述解锁组件用于解除所述锁止组件与所述美容头的配合。
- 如权利要求10所述的美容仪,其特征在于,所述连接模块还包括解锁组件,所述解锁组件作用于所述锁止组件;所述解锁组件被配置为:按压所述解锁组件时,所述解锁组件驱动所述卡合部和/或所述卡接部滑动,以解除所述锁止组件和所述卡接部的配合。
- 如权利要求8-12中任意一项所述的美容仪,其特征在于,所述连接模块设置有装配槽,所述第一气流连接部设于所述装配槽的底部,所述装配槽的底部形成所述第一组装面,所述美容头安装入所述装配槽内,所述第一组装面与第二组装面接触或抵接;所述连接模块还包括活动限位件,所述活动限位件可滑动地设于所述装配槽的底部的内侧,所述装配槽的底部设有扣位活动孔,所述活动限位件具有设于所述扣位活动孔处的卡合部,所述第二组装面上设有卡接部,所述活动限位件具有使所述卡接部与卡合部通过所述扣位活动孔卡接配合的锁止位置、以及使所述卡接部与卡合部可分离的解锁位置。
- 如权利要求13所述的美容仪,其特征在于,所述卡合部凸设于所述活动限位件的表面,所述卡合部在滑动方向可活动地设置在所述扣位活动孔内,以用于与卡接部配合;和/或,所述装配槽的底部的内侧面凸设有导向件,所述导向件限定有滑槽结构,所述活动限位件可滑动地设于所述滑槽结构内;和/或,所述主体还包括具有开口的外壳,所述外壳在开口处设置向内的内翻边,所述连接模块还包括连接内壳,所述连接内壳限定出所述装配槽,所述连接内壳安装在外壳内、并设于所述外壳的开口处,以使所述装配槽从所述外壳的开口处露出;所述连接内壳包 括内基板和内围板,所述内围板与所述内基板围合形成所述装配槽,所述内基板形成所述装配槽的底部。
- 如权利要求3所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述第一电连接件为PIN针;和/或,所述第二电连接件为PIN针。
- 如权利要求15所述的美容仪,其特征在于,所述美容头还包括安装壳和设于所述安装壳内的头部电路板,所述负压槽和第二组装面均设于所述安装壳,并位于所述安装壳的相对两侧,所述射频电极安装于所述安装壳,所述头部电路板电性连接所述射频电极;所述第二电连接件一端安装于所述安装壳,并露出所述安装壳而形成pin点,以与所述第一电连接件电连接;所述第二电连接件的另一端弹性接触或抵接于所述头部电路板,以与所述头部电路板电连接;和/或,所述主体还包括设于所述主体内的主体电路板,所述第一电连接件一端安装于所述主体电路板,另一端从所述第一组装面穿出,以弹性接触或抵接于所述第二电连接件;和/或,所述第一电连接件设有多个。
- 如权利要求3所述的美容仪,其特征在于:当所述美容头与所述主体连接时,所述第一气流连接部插入第二气流连接部,或,所述第二气流连接部插入所述第二气流连接部,以使得所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通。
- 如权利要求3所述的美容仪,其特征在于,所述主体包括连接模块:所述连接模块设置有装配槽,所述装配槽的底壁形成所述第一组装面,所述第一气流连接部从所述第一组装面凸出,以插入第二气流连接部,以使得所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通;或,所述美容头设置有装配槽,所述装配槽的底壁形成所述第二组装面,所述第二气流连接部从所述第二组装面凸出,以插入第一气流连接部,以使得所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通。
- 如权利要求3所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述美容头还包括安装壳,所述安装壳包括壳体和盖体,所述壳体包括负压基板、连接于所述负压基板并朝一侧凸设的负压围板、以及连接于所述负压围板并朝另一侧凸设的容纳围板,所述负压围板与所述负压基板形成所述负压槽,所述射频电极设于所述负压围板和/或所述负压基板;所述负压基板与所述容纳围板形成具有敞口的容纳腔,所述盖体安装于所述容纳腔的敞口处,所述第二组装面设于所述盖体的外侧面,所述第二电连接件安装于所述盖体,并从所述盖体露出;所述第二气流连接部从所述负压槽的底部朝所述盖体延伸,并从所述盖体露出,以与所述第一气流部连通。
- 如权利要求19所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述第二气流连接部为负压管道,盖体上设置有负压孔,所述第二气流连接部与负压孔连接,以从所述盖体露出;和/或,所述第二气流连接部内设有透气件;和/或,所述第二电连接件为PIN针,所述美容头还包括设于所述安装壳内的头部电路板,所述头部电路板电性连接所述射频电极;所述第二电连接件一端安装于所述盖体,并露出所述盖体而形成pin点,以与所述第一电连接件电连接;所述第二电连接件的另一端 弹性接触或抵接于所述头部电路板,以与所述头部电路板电连接;和/或,所述主体还包括具有开口的外壳和连接模块,所述外壳在开口处设置向内的内翻边,所述连接模块包括所述第一电连接件、第一气流连接部和连接内壳,所述连接内壳限定出装配槽,所述连接内壳安装在外壳内、并设于所述外壳的开口处,以使所述装配槽从所述外壳的开口处露出;所述装配槽的底部形成所述第一组装面,所述美容头安装入所述装配槽内,所述第一组装面与第二组装面接触或抵接;所述第一气流连接部设于所述装配槽的底部,并凸出于所述第一组装面,以插入所述第二气流连接部内,以与所述第二气流连接部连通。
- 如权利要求20所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述外壳包括第一半壳、第二半壳和具有开口和所述内翻边的头壳,所述第一半壳连接于第二半壳的一侧,以形成拿持部,所述第一半壳的一端具有向靠近所述第二半壳的一侧折弯倾斜而在第一倾斜方向设置的弯折部,所述弯折部凸出于所述第二半壳,所述头壳连接于所述弯折部与所述第二半壳,所述头壳具有与所述弯折部配合连接的组装凹口,所述开口用于朝向用户面部设置;所述连接内壳设于所述头壳内。
- 如权利要求19所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述第一气流连接部为气流连接管,所述气流连接管凸出于所述第一组装面,以插入所述第二气流连接部内,以与所述第二气流连接部连通。
- 如权利要求22所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述主体还包括密封圈,所述密封圈套设于所述气流连接管外周,以密封所述气流连接管与第二气流连接部。
- 如权利要求3所述的美容仪,其特征在于,所述主体还包括具有开口的外壳、连接模块和设于所述外壳内的主体电路板,所述外壳在开口处设置向内的内翻边,所述连接模块包括所述第一电连接件、第一气流连接部和连接内壳,所述连接内壳限定出装配槽,所述连接内壳安装在外壳内、并设于所述外壳的开口处,以使所述装配槽从所述外壳的开口处露出;所述第一气流连接部设于所述装配槽的底部,所述装配槽的底部形成所述第一组装面,所述美容头安装入所述装配槽内,所述第一组装面与第二组装面接触或抵接;所述主体电路板设于所述装配槽的底部的内侧,所述第一电连接件为PIN针,所述第一电连接件一端安装于所述主体电路板,另一端从所述第一组装面穿出,以弹性接触或抵接于所述第二电连接件;所述连接模块还包括活动限位件,所述活动限位件可滑动地设于所述装配槽的底部的内侧,所述装配槽的底部设有扣位活动孔,所述活动限位件具有设于所述扣位活动孔处的卡合部,所述第二组装面上设有卡接部,所述活动限位件具有使所述卡接部与卡合部通过所述扣位活动孔卡接配合的锁止位置、以及使所述卡接部与卡合部可分离的解锁位置;所述活动限位件为环状结构,所述第一电连接件设于该环状结构外侧,所述第一气流连接部设于所述该环状结构内侧。
- 如权利要求2-4中任意一项所述的美容仪,其特征在于,所述主体还包括气流驱动件:所述气流驱动件连通所述第一气流连接部,用于驱动气流在所述第一气流连接部流动。
- 如权利要求25所述的美容仪,其特征在于,所述美容头的第二组装面与所述主体的第一组装面之间形成排气通道,所述排气通道与所述气流驱动件连通,以排出所述气流驱动件驱动的气体。
- 如权利要求26所述的美容仪,其特征在于,所述第二组装面设置有排气槽,所述排气槽与所述第一组装面形成所述排气通道。
- 如权利要求4所述的美容仪,其特征在于,所述主体还包括气流驱动件:所述气流驱动件连通所述第一气流连接部,用于驱动气流在所述第一气流连接部流动;所述气流驱动件包括气泵,所述主控板与所述气泵电性连接,以控制所述气泵。
- 如权利要求2所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部可拆卸连接,以使所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通;和/或,第二气流连接部的连接通道的通气面积小于所述负压槽的槽口面积。
- 如权利要求4所述的美容仪,其特征在于:所述第一电连接件与所述第二电连接件在拆卸方向上接触或抵接,以使在所述美容头与所述主体连接时,使所述第一电连接件与所述第二电连接件电性连接;和/或,第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部在拆卸方向上对接,以使在所述美容头与所述主体连接时,使所述第一气流连接部与所述第二气流连接部连通。
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/074778 WO2025160766A1 (zh) | 2024-01-30 | 2024-01-30 | 美容仪 |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/074778 WO2025160766A1 (zh) | 2024-01-30 | 2024-01-30 | 美容仪 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025160766A1 true WO2025160766A1 (zh) | 2025-08-07 |
Family
ID=96589105
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/CN2024/074778 Pending WO2025160766A1 (zh) | 2024-01-30 | 2024-01-30 | 美容仪 |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2025160766A1 (zh) |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| USD1112778S1 (en) | 2022-03-04 | 2026-02-10 | Hydrafacial Llc | Light therapy device for skin care |
Citations (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN201939762U (zh) * | 2011-02-17 | 2011-08-24 | 北京冠舟科技有限公司 | 眼部祛皱操作手柄 |
| CN203777495U (zh) * | 2013-11-28 | 2014-08-20 | 孙臣 | 一种美容仪器手具 |
| CN205127136U (zh) * | 2015-11-09 | 2016-04-06 | 北京新科以仁科技发展有限公司 | 一种可换头的治疗用手柄 |
| CN208552853U (zh) * | 2017-12-21 | 2019-03-01 | 深圳市红颜美科技有限公司 | 热提拉紧肤美容仪 |
| CN114344705A (zh) * | 2020-10-13 | 2022-04-15 | 北京凯尔斯科技开发有限公司 | 一种射频美容仪操作手柄及美容方法 |
| KR102409168B1 (ko) * | 2021-11-25 | 2022-06-15 | (주)이지템 | 석션형 고주파 미용기기 |
-
2024
- 2024-01-30 WO PCT/CN2024/074778 patent/WO2025160766A1/zh active Pending
Patent Citations (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN201939762U (zh) * | 2011-02-17 | 2011-08-24 | 北京冠舟科技有限公司 | 眼部祛皱操作手柄 |
| CN203777495U (zh) * | 2013-11-28 | 2014-08-20 | 孙臣 | 一种美容仪器手具 |
| CN205127136U (zh) * | 2015-11-09 | 2016-04-06 | 北京新科以仁科技发展有限公司 | 一种可换头的治疗用手柄 |
| CN208552853U (zh) * | 2017-12-21 | 2019-03-01 | 深圳市红颜美科技有限公司 | 热提拉紧肤美容仪 |
| CN114344705A (zh) * | 2020-10-13 | 2022-04-15 | 北京凯尔斯科技开发有限公司 | 一种射频美容仪操作手柄及美容方法 |
| KR102409168B1 (ko) * | 2021-11-25 | 2022-06-15 | (주)이지템 | 석션형 고주파 미용기기 |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| USD1112778S1 (en) | 2022-03-04 | 2026-02-10 | Hydrafacial Llc | Light therapy device for skin care |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11197662B2 (en) | Illuminated surgical retractor | |
| US20030163025A1 (en) | Endoscope apparatus | |
| WO2025160766A1 (zh) | 美容仪 | |
| CN217090686U (zh) | 具有侧接一次性部分的便携式内窥镜 | |
| CN117839082A (zh) | 美容仪 | |
| CN210112806U (zh) | 具有摄像头的检测头模组及检测仪器 | |
| CN221889029U (zh) | 美容仪 | |
| CN221905397U (zh) | 射频美容仪 | |
| CN221889031U (zh) | 美容仪 | |
| CN221905396U (zh) | 美容仪 | |
| CN221905400U (zh) | 射频美容仪 | |
| CN221889028U (zh) | 美容仪 | |
| CN221905368U (zh) | 美容头及射频美容仪 | |
| CN221905399U (zh) | 美容仪 | |
| CN222195724U (zh) | 便携式射频美容仪 | |
| CN222172875U (zh) | 美容仪 | |
| CN222195723U (zh) | 美容仪 | |
| CN216702509U (zh) | 适用于一次性内窥镜的对接接头 | |
| CN215224735U (zh) | 雾化组件以及雾化装置 | |
| CN217886520U (zh) | 罐疗仪 | |
| CN217310228U (zh) | 一次性内窥镜系统 | |
| CN115444725A (zh) | 头部理疗仪 | |
| CN210920297U (zh) | 一种适用于牙科综合治疗机的动力可控式脚踏器 | |
| CN221981409U (zh) | 一种美容仪 | |
| CN215128264U (zh) | 内窥镜的插头 |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24920841 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |